SmartPlant P&ID

User’s Guide
June 2004 Version 4.1

DPID2-PE-200004E

Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, PDS, and MARIAN are registered trademarks Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Customer Support and Documentation Comments........................................................9 Introducing SmartPlant P&ID .......................................................................................10 SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................11 What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?..............................................................................12
SmartPlant P&ID Help Command.................................................................................... 12 Printable Guides Command .............................................................................................. 12 SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command ......................................................................... 12 SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command ........................................................................ 13 About SmartPlant P&ID Command.................................................................................. 13 Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID................................................... 13

Navigating in the Software: An Overview .....................................................................14 Working With the Design Window: An Overview ....................................................15
Show Command................................................................................................................ 17 Options Command ............................................................................................................ 17 Previous Command........................................................................................................... 22 Save Settings Command ................................................................................................... 22 Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 22 Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 23 Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 24 Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 24 Pan Command................................................................................................................... 25 Display Command ............................................................................................................ 26 Toolbars Command........................................................................................................... 26 Properties Command......................................................................................................... 28 New Command ................................................................................................................. 34 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 36 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 36 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 36 Active Window List.......................................................................................................... 36

Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview..............................................38
Engineering Data Editor Command.................................................................................. 39 Stockpile Menu: An Overview ......................................................................................... 41 Edit Menu: An Overview.................................................................................................. 43 Claim Command ............................................................................................................... 44 Release Claim Command.................................................................................................. 44 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................... 45 View Menu: An Overview................................................................................................ 45 Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview ......................... 59

Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.......................................................................65
Catalog Explorer Command ............................................................................................. 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview ............................................................................................ 68 View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 77 Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) ............................................................................... 79

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview .................................................................. 82

Working With the Properties Window: An Overview ...............................................83
Properties Window Command .......................................................................................... 84

Customizing the Software: An Overview...................................................................91
Customize Command........................................................................................................ 92 Custom Commands Command ......................................................................................... 97

Working with Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................102 Open Command ........................................................................................................104
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 104 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................... 105 Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 106 Customize Current View Dialog Box ............................................................................. 107 Open an Existing Drawing.............................................................................................. 108 Open a Drawing in a Different Database ........................................................................ 109 Customize the Open Dialog Box .................................................................................... 110

Recent Drawings.......................................................................................................111
Access a Recently Open Drawing................................................................................... 111 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View..................................................................... 111

File Properties Command .........................................................................................112
File Properties Dialog Box.............................................................................................. 112 View Document Properties ............................................................................................. 115 Set Document Properties................................................................................................. 116

Close Command........................................................................................................117
Close an Active Drawing ................................................................................................ 117

Exit Command ..........................................................................................................118
Close the Program........................................................................................................... 118

Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview ............................................................119
New Template Command ............................................................................................... 120 Create a Drawing Template ............................................................................................ 121 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border..................................................................... 122

Saving Drawings: An Overview...............................................................................124
Save Command ............................................................................................................... 125 Save As Command.......................................................................................................... 125

Re-creating Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................127
Recreate a Drawing......................................................................................................... 129 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition ............................................................... 129

Using Filters: An Overview......................................................................................130
Add Filter Command ...................................................................................................... 131 Filter Tab Cut Command ................................................................................................ 138 Filter Tab Copy Command ............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Paste Command.............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Delete Command............................................................................................ 139 Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command............................................................. 140 Filter Tab Properties Command...................................................................................... 140

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview ................................................141 Understanding Database Constraints........................................................................143 Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview...................................................................144 4 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Select Tool Command..................................................................................................... 145 Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 146 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ..................................................................................... 146 Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 147 Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool............................................. 148 Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................... 149

Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.....................................................................150
Show Grid Command ..................................................................................................... 150 Snap Grid Command....................................................................................................... 151

Placing Equipment: An Overview ............................................................................152
Place Equipment ............................................................................................................. 153 Place Multiple Representations....................................................................................... 154

Routing Lines: An Overview....................................................................................156
Line Routing Ribbon....................................................................................................... 157 Route a Line.................................................................................................................... 158 Start a Line in Free Space ............................................................................................... 159 Start a Line from a Connect Point................................................................................... 160 Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line .................................................................... 161 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line .............................................................................. 161 Branch from an Existing Line......................................................................................... 162 Branch to an Existing Line ............................................................................................. 162 Add a Manual Gap to a Line........................................................................................... 163 Assign Heat Tracing ....................................................................................................... 164

Break Run Command ...............................................................................................165
Break a Pipe Run ............................................................................................................ 165

Join Runs Command.................................................................................................166
Join Pipe Runs ................................................................................................................ 166

Using Piping Components: An Overview ................................................................167
Place a Piping Component .............................................................................................. 167 Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview ...................................................................... 169

Placing Instrumentation: An Overview ....................................................................174
Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)................................................................... 175 Place an Inline Instrument .............................................................................................. 175 Place an Offline Instrument ............................................................................................ 177 Add Instruments to a Loop ............................................................................................. 178 Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) .............. 179 Remove an Instrument from a Loop ............................................................................... 180

Labeling: An Overview ............................................................................................181
Placing Labels: An Overview ......................................................................................... 182 Using the Types of Labels: An Overview....................................................................... 191 Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview .................................................. 201 Calling Item Tag Validation ........................................................................................... 208

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................210
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 211 Place an Area Break........................................................................................................ 212 Place a Package............................................................................................................... 213 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 214

Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview ...............................................215
Undo Command .............................................................................................................. 216 Move Command ............................................................................................................. 217

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 222 Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.................................................... 225 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview....................................... 238 Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview........................................................................ 245 Copying Items: An Overview ......................................................................................... 253 Selecting Connected Items: An Overview ...................................................................... 254 Modifying Item Properties: An Overview ...................................................................... 258

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview ................................................263
Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box........................................................................ 264 Place an Item from the Stockpile .................................................................................... 264 Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing......................................... 265 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile........................................................... 265 Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet..................................................................... 267 Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 268

Gapping Lines: An Overview...................................................................................269
AutoGap Command ........................................................................................................ 269 Gap Now Command ....................................................................................................... 270

Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.................................................271
Update Symbology Command........................................................................................ 271 Update Symbology ......................................................................................................... 272 Update Line Settings....................................................................................................... 272

Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview ......................................................273
Image Command............................................................................................................. 275 Object Command ............................................................................................................ 276 Paste Special Command.................................................................................................. 280 Links Command.............................................................................................................. 281

Working With Assemblies: An Overview................................................................284
Save As Assembly Command......................................................................................... 285

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview ....................................................288 Claiming Items: An Overview..................................................................................289
Claim Command ............................................................................................................. 291 Release Claim Command................................................................................................ 300 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................. 301 Show Claims Command ................................................................................................. 303

Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview ................................................304
Compare and Refresh Command .................................................................................... 305

Consistency Checking: An Overview ...........................................................................313 Show Inconsistencies Command ..............................................................................314
Show Inconsistencies ...................................................................................................... 314

Properties Command ................................................................................................315
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 316 Review an Inconsistency................................................................................................. 317 Resolve an Inconsistency................................................................................................ 319

Reapply Rules Command .........................................................................................321
Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.................................................. 322

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview ......................................................................323 6 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents Import Data File Command ......................................................................................324
Import Log Dialog Box................................................................................................... 324

Import SmartSketch Command ................................................................................325
Using the SmartPlant Migrator ....................................................................................... 325 Import a SmartSketch File .............................................................................................. 328

Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .......................................................................329
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .................................................................................. 329

Generating Reports: An Overview...............................................................................331 Plant Reports Command ...........................................................................................333
Plant Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 333 Generate a Report ........................................................................................................... 334

My Reports Command..............................................................................................335
My Reports Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 335

Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview............................................337
Tabular Format Report.................................................................................................... 338 Fixed Format Report ....................................................................................................... 340 Composite Format Report............................................................................................... 341 New Command ............................................................................................................... 343 Edit Command ................................................................................................................ 345 Delete Command ............................................................................................................ 350 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar............................................................................................ 351

Printing Drawings: An Overview .................................................................................361 Print Command.........................................................................................................363
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 363 Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 364 Print a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 365 Print a Selected Area....................................................................................................... 366 Set Print Options ............................................................................................................. 367 Change Printer Properties ............................................................................................... 368 Print to a File................................................................................................................... 368

Page Setup Command...............................................................................................369
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 369 Set up a Page Layout....................................................................................................... 370

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview ......................................371 Publishing to TEF: An Overview .............................................................................373
Publish Command........................................................................................................... 375 Find Documents to Publish Command ........................................................................... 379 Browser Command ......................................................................................................... 381

Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.........................................................................382
Retrieve Command ......................................................................................................... 385

Correlating Items: An Overview ..............................................................................387
Correlate Command ........................................................................................................ 387

Using the To Do List: An Overview.........................................................................390
To Do List Command ..................................................................................................... 391 Open the To Do List ....................................................................................................... 391

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 392

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview ............................................406 Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists....................................................................407 Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID ...............................................................408 Setting Construction Status.......................................................................................409 Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation ........................................................410 Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID ...........................412 Using Filters Versus Levels......................................................................................413 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................414 Index................................................................................................................................436

8 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Customer Support and Documentation Comments

Customer Support and Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/services/support.asp. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 9

10 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional. such as OLE automation. to provide integration with existing data and other systems. and standards compliance. This method provides valuable information throughout the plant life cycle. As a data-centric.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent P&IDs by populating the database with relevant plant data. data consistency. and drag-and-drop capabilities. such as Intergraph PDS. and feedback is immediate. userdefinable rule-based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and subsequent life cycle phases. The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID also differentiate it from other P&ID systems. The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. Intergraph INtools. and Aspen Zyqad. rule-based solution for the P&ID life cycle. automatic checks. or equipment and line lists. All data from the P&ID is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards. Running on Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000. allowing faster. SmartPlant P&ID helps users improve design quality. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive. all of which allow users to share data with third-party software. SmartPlant P&ID significantly cuts design and modification time and increases accuracy with its exclusive data-centric approach and use of design rules. Inc. SmartPlant P&ID is vastly different from graphic-driven P&ID solutions of today. expensive CAD engine for P&ID creation. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits integration with other systems. You can then use this information in the SmartPlant P&ID Stockpile to design the P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies. more efficient design with less iteration. rules are executed. The design rule-base confirms data consistency and compliance with plant and engineering standards. such as process data from process simulation databases based on Aspen Zyqad from Aspen Technologies. Data is entered directly into the database. With quick access to supporting engineering data. The strong data import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system with relevant plant data.

Options Manager also defines paths to SmartPlant files and directories. including all plant components and their relationships. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 11 . The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. such as specifying user permissions.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Program Group SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. unified data structure that represents the plant model. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. Rule Manager defines rules for placement and property copying on placement. or the SmartPlant P&ID Upgrade Guide. SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide. For more information about SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing versions and print multiple drawings. Drawing Manager allows you to perform Workshare. SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for SmartPlant. and so forth. By manipulating model views. SmartPlant has several programs and utilities for running and managing your plant data. SmartPlant Engineering Manager performs higher-level data management tasks. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. and formats. gapping. Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. designing plant hierarchies. heat tracing.and project-specific commands. Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses.

Inconsistency Report . The report is available in the Engineering Data Editor by selecting View > Plant Reports. • SmartPlant P&ID Help Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Help Opens the Help viewer where you can read topics about commands. provides a list of all inconsistencies. you can access registration and support information. • Fit Command . 12 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On this page. Printable Guides Command Help > Printable Guides Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable document format.xls. SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Activates your web browser and opens the SmartPlant P&ID World Wide Web page. The user's guides contain the same information as the online Help. and the guide opens in the appropriate application. You can print it if necessary.A tabular report.Functionality changes provide a variety of display options using the Fit command. Inconsistencies Report. Click a link. procedures. learning tools. and other items to help you use SmartPlant P&ID more efficiently.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID What's New in SmartPlant P&ID? This version of SmartPlant P&ID contains the following new functionality and changes. dialog boxes. and so forth.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 13 . Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID On your desktop. structured product feedback. On this page you can learn about international and regional conferences. and licensing notices. About SmartPlant P&ID Command Help > About SmartPlant P&ID Displays information about your copy of the software. including the version number and the copyright. Follow the instructions and links on this web page to find your information. click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. and more. This documentation consists of a programmer's guide and reference guides for placement automation and the logical model. legal. Note • Programming with SmartPlant P&ID is the method by which you can use the Automation layer to customize the software to meet your own particular requirements. online forums.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Opens your web browser to the Intergraph Process & Power Client Community web page. informal networking.

Properties Window When you select an item in a plant model. and it can also display items in the plant and drawing stockpiles. Related Topics Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. page 264 • 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This view is exactly the same tabular view that you can display in the Design window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Software: An Overview The drawing interface is divided into four distinct parts: the Design window. The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular format. Engineering Data Editor The Engineering Data Editor is a modification of the stockpile display. Catalog Explorer The Catalog Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in drawings and plant models. instrumentation. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter information for the plant model into the database. The two views also provide a way for you to view information in the database in different ways. you can double-click nodes in the tree view to open them. Your system administrator defines customized properties and their defaults for each item in Data Dictionary Manager. editing properties. The Catalog Explorer contains a hierarchical representation of the selected catalog. and piping in a graphical representation. You can navigate through the nodes in a catalog by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node. the Engineering Data Editor. In addition. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. view and modify the properties associated with that item in the Properties window. In the Drawing view. Design Window The Design window displays Drawing views and the Engineering Data Editor. Each part provides specific features that you need to create drawings in the software. you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing equipment. the Catalog Explorer. and the Properties window. with the same capabilities for modifying the display. and organizing data. page 67 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. you can enter.

and so forth. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 15 . too. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a drawing. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table. Each window has its own independent set of properties defining view range. You can open as many windows as needed to support a design. A tab scroll provides a way to view tabs hidden from display by the horizontal scroll bar. The title bar identifies the drawing name. You can add new tabs for additional filters as needed. using vertical and horizontal scroll bars as well as Zoom and Pan commands to change the center point for the Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Design Window: An Overview The Design window itself consists of several parts. much like a Properties window. By using commands on the Window menu. You create your drawing In the Drawing view. you can cascade or tile views to more easily navigate among them. The Design window. display properties. too. Filter tabs provide a quick and easy way to choose what appears in the Drawing view. displays the model information for a design in a Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view. In the Engineering Data Editor. you can specify filters and layouts to define the table information and even edit some item properties. or Modeler.

the software can end in an abnormal way.A tabular view that presents the plant data in a tabular format. page 35 • Open an Existing Drawing. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. however. for example. and instrumentation. Occasionally. due to power outage. As a result. (B) Engineering Data Editor . the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database and displays a message: One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing.A graphical representation of the plant model. By manipulating model views. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. page 108 • 16 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. • SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. page 53 • Open a New Drawing View. piping. This view displays the common idea of a model: a diagram containing items such as equipment. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. When you re-open the drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • (A) Drawing view . page 138 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. unified data structure that represents the plant model. see Using the Properties Glossary: An Overview Related Topics Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Caution • The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. For more information about the data model. including all plant components and their relationships.

For more information about linking. page 21 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options on the main menu bar. page 273 Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current drawing. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. grids.Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on the File menu. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 17 . Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. see Related Topics.Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Command Available on the Drawing View Shortcut menu. For example. the status bar. placement information. such as notes. Display as printed . screen appearance. and recently used files. Opens the Options dialog box. the Show command allows you to choose to display drawing elements. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. export formats. Recently used files list . page 33 Options Command Tools > Options Changes settings that control recently used files. page 91 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and so forth.Updates links automatically when a drawing is opened. labels. page 21 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for updating links in the drawing and displaying the drawing. Update links automatically at open . you can set the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu. and so forth. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command.

Sets the highlight color.Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window. Related Topics • Break a Link. Handles . Selected items . page 21 • Embed a New Object. When you point at the command button on the toolbar. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Use Defaults .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show status bar . page 283 • Change a Link.Sets the color of handles when an item is selected. and handle colors in the drawing. prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command appear in the status bar.Sets the color of selected items. highlight. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active drawing. Highlight . page 278 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Allows you to select options for the background. (for example. and messages about the operations the software is performing appear in the status bar. The connect points in the drawing appear in this color. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Also. page 17 18 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . too. Background . Note • To set the symbology. the description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window. the line weight and color) for item types throughout a plant structure. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value. use Options Manager. page 21 • Options Command. selection.

the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Stockpile. and Future. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. called the locate zone. The plant administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup. the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place a new OPC. the locate tolerance defines how close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item. but this option allows you to change the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. If you keep the pointer within the break-away tolerance from the line. Also. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. The construction status for an item appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. Locate . For example. is placed. at which a candidate item is highlighted when another item approaches. If you are not placing an item but only selecting drawing items. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 19 . This list contains the following options: New. you can indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing.Specifies the range. Existing. Default construction status . the valve does not disconnect from the line. and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run. Break-away . For example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets the default construction status for the active drawing. a pipe run can be a candidate item. you drag the valve. page 21 • Options Command. the construction status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties window. A candidate item is any item in the drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. page 204 • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent item. to move a valve. and tolerances for locating items and moving around in the drawing. OPC. If you clear this option. Using this dialog box. Place partner OPC in Stockpile .Indicates that when a new off-page connector.Assigns the selected construction status to all placed items. The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance.

page 204 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for inserting objects in the drawing. the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference file within the drawing. The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed. Select Scale . the drawings associated with that node appear in the Drawing list area. The reference file is at the end of the pointer. Coincident (1:1) . Note • The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet.Imports a reference file.Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. page 204 • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile. at full scale (1:1). also known as an inserted object. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object.Sets a scale option for importing a drawing.Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. page 206 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector. Scale reference files . page 204 • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box. ready to be placed in the drawing. These settings take effect in your next drawing session. Drawing list . much like a catalog item during placement mode. page 202 • Store a Partner Connector. When you select a node. This tab is part of the Options dialog box. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector.Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC Dialog Box Opens after you place a connector on a drawing. 20 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which opens when you click Tools > Options on the main menu bar. Choose a stockpile from this view to associate your partner connector with. For a 2:1 ratio. Plant Hierarchy .

Click Tools > Options. or personal. page 282 • Embed a New Object.Displays the currently selected folder and the available folders in the active drive.Sets the scale for a drawing that you insert. On the Options dialog box. 2. Select options on the dialog box to make the appropriate changes. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. page 283 • Change a Link.Lists the drives that are currently active on your computer. click the tab containing the information that you want to customize. Select a different drive in order to see directories that reside on that drive in the Look in box. page 19 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box). page 18 Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box). page 17 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box).Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Scale . page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 21 . page 278 Browse Dialog Box Allows you to select a directory that contains your reports. My Reports . page 21 • Options Command. Drives .Specifies the folder where your user-defined. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options > Files Tab > Browse. For example.Opens the Browse dialog box. report templates are stored. page 20 3. the scale of the foreign drawing is one and one half times its original size. page 17 Customize the Software With the Options Command 1. page 21 • Edit an Embedded Object. Browse . which allows you to select a local or network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. • • • • General Tab (Options Dialog Box). when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes. Look in .

press Esc. page 22 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To refresh the window. Related Topics • Save the Settings for the Active View. page 15 Restore a Drawing View Click View > Previous. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 37 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. if you zoom in and then click View > Previous. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. the view changes to the view present before you zoomed in. and the software does not remember more than one view. page 15 Save Settings Command View > Save Settings Stores all display filters for the active Drawing view. press F5.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Previous Command View > Previous Restores the previous view. Notes • To stop the repainting of items in the window. page 15 22 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This action is convenient for large drawings. page 15 Zoom Area Command View > Zoom Area Enlarges the display of an area in the active window by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the drawing. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. For example.

On the main toolbar. press Esc. use the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. press F5. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. 3. right-click or press Esc. click Zoom Area: . press Esc or right-click in the drawing. click Zoom In: . • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This action is convenient for large drawings. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. This action is convenient for large drawings. 2. page 15 Zoom In on the Drawing 1. To quit the command. press Esc. Click the view at the center of the area you want to zoom in on. On the Drawing view. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To refresh the window. The selection then fills the view. press F5. On the main toolbar. To stop the repainting of items in the window. page 15 Zoom In Command View > Zoom In Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in the active window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom In on an Area 1. click View > Previous. 2. To stop the repainting of items in the window. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. To quit the command. To refresh the window. click View > Previous. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 23 .

To quit the command. This action is convenient for large drawings. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click Zoom Out . the command fits only the selected items in the active view. To stop the repainting of items in the window. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 • Zoom Out from an Area. Related Topics • Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. If only one item is selected in the drawing. To refresh the window. page 15 24 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. However. if any items are selected in the drawing. right-click or press Esc. press F5. page 15 Fit Command View > Fit Fits all items in the active view if no items are currently selected. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. On the main toolbar. press Esc. the command zooms to the selected item. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom Out Reduces the display of items around a specified point in the active window. Click the Drawing view at the center of the area you want to zoom out from. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click View > Previous. page 24 Zoom Out from an Area 1.

page 15 • Pan a Drawing View 1. press F5. To go back to the previous view. press Esc. Notes • • • You can click and drag the hand pointer to pan the view. Click in the view that you want to pan. Click in the view again to define how far you want to pan. too. On the main toolbar. click Pan: . Related Topics Pan a Drawing View. 3. To refresh the window. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. click Fit . page 15 Pan Command View > Pan Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer across the view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View On the main toolbar. 2. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 25 . To quit the command. press Esc or right-click in the Drawing view. This action is convenient for large drawings. click View > Previous. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box. page 91 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Adds color to the toolbar buttons. Customize . page 28 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. or change. page 41 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off.Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. New . Toolbars . hiding. You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes. Reset . Color Buttons . Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 15 Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Toolbars on the main menu bar. Clearing this option causes toolbar buttons to appear in black and white. or changing toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar that you want to display.Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. page 85 Toolbars Command View > Toolbars Opens the Toolbars dialog box. too. page 66 • Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Command View > Display Allows you to specify the windows you want to see in your design session: • • • Catalog Explorer Properties Window Engineering Data Editor Related Topics • Display the Engineering Data Editor. which allows you to create new toolbars and display or hide selected toolbars. 26 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Toolbar Name .Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected. page 28 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Lists the available toolbars. hide.

click the category that contains the command that you want to add. 4. page 95 New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. 7.Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Click Tools > Customize. 6. Open this dialog box from the main menu bar by clicking View > Toolbars > New. Show ToolTips .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Large Buttons . Click View > Toolbars. 3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the new toolbar. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 27 .Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over one of them. You cannot choose a name for your new toolbar that is already used for another toolbar. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. click New. On the New Toolbar dialog box. On the Toolbars dialog box. Toolbar Name . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. 5. type the name of the new toolbar. 2. Click OK.Type the name of the new toolbar in the box. page 95 Create a New Toolbar 1.

2. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click the Reset button. These tabs logically organize the properties into sets that you can use for manipulating special view qualities. page 91 Properties Command View > Properties Displays the View Properties dialog box. 3. page 314 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. In the Toolbars dialog box. page 15 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • If you create a new toolbar. 3. select the toolbar that you want to restore. you cannot reset it. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. 2. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Its Default Settings 1. On the Toolbars tab. On the Toolbars tab. 2. page 22 • Save the Settings for the Active View. click Tools > Customize. page 37 • Show Inconsistencies. The set of property tabs that are available in the View Properties dialog box depends on the active view. Click View > Toolbars.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. On the main menu bar. Click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. page 91 Remove a Button From a Toolbar 1. drag the button that you want to remove from the toolbar into the Buttons area. Drag the command button from the Buttons area to the toolbar. which lets you define and control settings for the active view.

Color . page 138 View Properties Dialog Box Controls the display of information in the Drawing view. This dialog box allows you to edit a filter for your drawing.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view.Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. Properties . In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. Browse . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Note • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. Alternate symbology . which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Properties on the main menu bar. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Properties from the shortcut menu. Filter Name . Filter .Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. • Related Topics Properties Command.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. Scroll down the list to choose a color. Width . You can name the new filter appropriately. page 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 29 .Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. then View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. This information is read-only.

and readout category. Prevent selection of inserted objects . Items that you can display include labels. if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing.Turns the display of notes on or off. Select . Notes can contain links to a file. the display toggles on for that item.Allows you to name the Drawing view. drawing borders. Notes . page 29 Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of items in a Drawing view. description. Drawing borders . Show .Navigating in the Software: An Overview General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Displays miscellaneous information about a Drawing view.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. 30 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing. and inconsistency indicators. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box.Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable in a drawing. View name . When you select the check box. for example.Turns the grid display on or off. Inconsistency indicators . Related Topics • Properties Command. a Microsoft Word file. Description .Prevents the display of labels in filtered views of the design. select this box. If the display of labels is turned off here.Turns on the display of the options selected on the Claims tab. then the Do not show labels options is not available since all labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using. For example.Toggles the display of all labels on or off. Claims . Labels . The inserted file appears gray in the drawing. type. View type .Displays the type of view. Grids .Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view. including the name. grids.Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or off.Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off. notes. Do not show labels for filtered items . in any view. This information is read-only.

The choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box and the availability of the Index options.Turns the grid display on or off. medium. Spacing . the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification. page 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 31 . Show grid . and so you cannot change the Index list when using the Dynamic grid style. Style . solid grid lines. This option is available only with the Static grid style. For a dynamic grid display the number of index lines varies depending on the zoom level. too. which is the number of minor grid lines. Grid lines are not printed. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. When you select this option.Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. Index . You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. Snap grid . items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. page 33 • Properties Command. When you zoom in or out. Density . Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out.Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style. View . or coarse levels when you choose the Dynamic grid style from the Style list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. page 29 Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of the grid in the view.Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off.Allows you to specify fine. Related Topics • Properties Command.Specifies the grid index.Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you choose the Static grid style from the Style list. page 28 • Show Grid Command.

Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. Not claimed . which signify the suitability of design work that you perform while creating the drawing. Errors above severity . Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support shared claiming of database items. Invalidly claimed items are items which differ from the Plant items and which you cannot modify and check into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. Show . Claim . page 28 • Show Inconsistencies. For example. Invalid claims . Approved warnings . which appears when you click View > Properties. page 314 Claims Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the display of items in the Drawing view according to their claim states. Again. then these display options override all other options designated in the Claim area of this dialog box. This tab is part of the View Properties dialog box. You can specify the severity level. Status .Turns the display of approved warnings on or off. The software verifies in real-time if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule Manager. Errors are marked with a Warnings above severity . all errors with .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of inconsistency indicators. if you specify a severity level of five. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing.Displays the possible claim states for all items except invalidly claimed items.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are not claimed at all. If you specify a special display for invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Properties Command.Specifies the display of invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. you can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see. Warnings are marked with a . Approved warnings are marked with . Open the View Properties dialog box by clicking View > Properties. severity of five or above appear.Turns the display of errors on or off. 32 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Turns the display of warnings on or off.Displays the possible claim states and combination of claim states for drawing items.

4. For more information about claiming items. page 302 • Release a Claim. For example. see Related Topics. If your Plant is configured so that it honors only exclusive claiming. Filter labels. and Index options. you can select from any of the Errors. 6. errors with severity level of 5 or greater are displayed. 5. then these display options will have no effect in the Drawing view. project status.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claimed only by others . and Approved warnings options. select the General tab. Warnings. On the Display tab. For errors and warnings. select the items that you want to display in the view.Specifies the special display of drawing items to which this project has the sole claim. On the Grid tab. 3. you can choose the Show grid or Snap grid option. You can select any of the Labels. Density. Colors . Drawing borders. 7. 2. Notes. On the View Properties dialog box. you can specify the severity level of the displayed inconsistencies.Allows you to select a line width for items with the corresponding claim state. page 292 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. if you specify 5. Shared claims . and you can enter a view name and description. and Inconsistency indicators options. Widths . select the Prevent selection of inserted objects option if you want to prohibit the selection of linked or embedded objects in the drawing. you can choose special display colors for drawing items according to their claim status. Tip • Claiming items is governed by projects. Click View > Properties. Grids.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are claimed solely by other projects or the Plant. Related Topics Claim a Drawing Item. The View type box is read-only. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 33 . On the Claims tab.Specifies the special display of drawing items when the active project shares a claim on with another project or the Plant. if needed. in the Style. and options specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Drawing Manager. page 301 • Change the Properties of a Drawing View 1. Also on the Display tab. On the Inconsistency Indicator tab.Allows you to select a color for items with the corresponding claim state. Claimed only by this project . and the properties of the grid.

page 15 • 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 91 • New Command Window > New Allows you to open a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor window within the Design window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics Claiming Items: An Overview. Notes • If only the Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing is open. Related Topics • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). • Related Topics Open a New Drawing View. then clicking View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. Creating a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing does not create a new copy or version of the drawing. page 35 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. You can change the view features for the new Drawing window using the commands on the View menu. the graphical Drawing view is opened on top of the Engineering Data Editor when you select Window > New > Drawing. The same drawing data simply displays in the different views. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a new window and displays the contents as graphical items. page 34 New Drawing Window Command Window > New > Drawing Creates a new Drawing view within the active drawing. page 35 • New Drawing Window Command. The new view has the same filters as the previous Drawing view. page 289 • Customizing the Software: An Overview.

Pipeline.Navigating in the Software: An Overview New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu) Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Opens the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window and allows you to view and edit model data for a drawing in a tabular format. page 34 • Open a New Drawing View 1. see SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. For more information. and then open the Windows Task Manager. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. When you open a new Drawing view (for example.pid:1.pid) the new view is named Pipeline. which you can access from the Help > Printable Guides command. Tip A new Drawing view is not the same as a new drawing. If the software gives indications that a drawing is in use when it is not.exe process.pid:2. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 35 . see Microsoft Windows Help. Pipeline. and so forth. and subsequent new Drawing views are Pipeline. • Notes • • You can have as many Drawing views open for a drawing as needed. You create new drawings in Drawing Manager. Click Window > New > Drawing. In Task Manager search for an extra draft.pid:3. Edit the drawing as needed. 2. quit all SmartPlant applications. Select it and click End Task. For more information on the Windows Task Manager. Related Topics New Drawing Window Command.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Cascade Command Window > Cascade Overlaps windows diagonally across in the Design window. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 15 • Zoom In on an Area. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 15 Tile Vertically Command Window > Tile Vertically Arranges windows to fit vertically in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 23 • Zoom In on the Drawing. page 24 Tile Horizontally Command Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges windows to fit horizontally in the Design window. page 15 Active Window List Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. page 15 36 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 23 • Zoom Out from an Area. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Your settings are automatically saved upon quitting the software. Notes • • This command saves all display filters for the active Drawing view. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 37 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save the Settings for the Active View Click View > Save Settings or right-click a tab at the bottom of the active view and select Save Settings.

Customizing the EDE Commands on the Edit menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further. which allows you to define the items that you want to see in the EDE. You can also filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to different stockpiles and drawings: • • • • Active Drawing Active Drawing Stockpile Stockpile Other Drawings By default. The menu buttons are found here: • • • Stockpile Edit View Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to expose the available commands. You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh button . to color code items according to the stockpile that they are currently in. The list on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display the corresponding items in the EDE. The EDE is automatically displayed in the lower left of the main window. initially only the Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. Finally a summary box displays a comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the query results for the database. If you want to list all items select Plant Item from the list. Use Edit View to display the Table Properties dialog box. You can use the Display Settings command. of the type chosen in the list. that exist in the database. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. for instance. and you can also open the EDE to appear in the Design window. 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The EDE Toolbar At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar.

For more information. page 41 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 54 • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview. you cannot edit that cell. Notes • The maximum number of items that can be displayed in the EDE is 65. If your database query results in more than this number. page 263 Engineering Data Editor Command View > Display > Engineering Data Editor Turns on or off the display of the Engineering Data Editor. If the property has a select list associated with it.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Editing Properties in the EDE You can edit some of the properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. The EDE is where you view items in the Stockpile or in a drawing stockpile. click Related Topics. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. You can then choose to refine your query in order to generate fewer items or to enter report-only mode and run a report on your query results. • Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. the Query Results dialog box opens. If the cell is populated by a readonly property or a property that is only automatically generated by validation. too.537. then you choose the value from the select list. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. if the cell contents are compatible. The contents of cells can be copied to other cells. Related Topics Display the Engineering Data Editor. You can select a entire row by clicking the corresponding icon in the left-most column of the table. page 38 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 39 . Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item properties there.

Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. an operator. Match any . Additional Filter Criteria . You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Displays the number of items that your query returned. and Estimated Length. My Reports. Options .Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter. for example. >.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of items in the view. and so forth. Property . <>.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Maximum Allowed . Match all . Match any is the default matching method. Examples of properties include Equipment Type. Instrument Loop Item Tag. Add . Refine Query Definition . Delete . To add to or modify the definition list.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Query Results Dialog Box Displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. Delete view. Operator . and Plant Reports. Rows Returned . and a value. You can either refine your query or run a report with your query results. Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. 40 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . not equal to. greater than. =. equal to. Relationships include.Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only mode. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. This option is useful when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database. Save view. Edit .Displays the currently allowed number of items in the Engineering Data Editor.

Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Tip • To close the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 154 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. which can be free text.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Value . page 58 Display the Engineering Data Editor Click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor. or type a question mark. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. or choose null. You can type a percent sign. *. page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. page 265 • Place Multiple Representations. in the Value box. Click the down-arrow next to the Stockpile menu to display the available commands. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. as a wildcard character for a single character. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. you must type a value. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor again. ?. page 15 • Stockpile Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile Contains commands for moving and deleting items. %. page 38 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 251 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 41 . Do not use an asterisk. page 59 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View.

You can even move items from one drawing stockpile to another. For instance. page 154 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. That is the item and its properties are deleted from the database and can no longer be placed in a drawing. The Move to Different Stockpile dialog box opens. page 152 Delete Stockpile Item Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Delete Stockpile Item Removes the stockpile item from the plant model completely. Similarly you can move an item in the Drawing Stockpile to the Stockpile so that it can be used in other drawings. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. page 38 42 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Place Multiple Representation Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Place Multiple Representation Allows you to place a second instance of an equipment item in a second drawing. page 265 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 • Place Multiple Representations. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 251 Move to Different Stockpile Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Move to Different Stockpile Allows you to move a stockpile item from one stockpile to another. page 245 • Remove an Item from the Model. This multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Multiple representations are available only for some types of equipment. you can move an item from the Stockpile into the stockpile for your active drawing if you know the item belongs in that drawing but are not yet ready to place the item. regardless of symbol settings in Options Manager or Catalog Manager.

Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 43 • Review and Edit Item Properties. If the cell is read-only. You can also invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. page 289 • Copy Command. then the Paste command is not available. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them. You must have previously placed a value on the Clipboard in order to paste it. You can also release a claim at any time and you can determine the validity of a claim. page 43 • Paste Command. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Edit Allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to another cell in the Engineering Data Editor and to select all the items in the view in order to create a select set. page 147 Copy Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Copy Places the value in the currently selected cell onto the Clipboard so that you can paste it somewhere else. This command does not remove the value from the selected table cell. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 43 . page 87 Paste Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Paste Places the value from the Clipboard into the selected cell. page 87 • Select All Command. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 44 • Select an Item. Click the down-arrow next to the Edit menu button to display the available commands.

page 144 • Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 289 • Release a Claim. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Select All Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Select All Chooses all the items in the active Engineering Data Editor. page 87 • Select an Item. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. You can create a select set using this command. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 301 44 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 289 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. Related Topics Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. The Claim dialog box opens. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments.

page 64 • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. page 58 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 56 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to display the commands. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. release the claims to items. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. and so forth. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. page 57 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 302 View Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > View Displays the commands that help you customize and manipulate the layout and content of the Engineering Data Editor. page 54 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. page 61 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 45 .

For a list of default layouts. see Default Table Layouts. page 46 • 46 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This dialog box appears when you right-click an existing table and select Edit View.Lists all the item types that you can select (for example. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items are displayed.Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type. Advanced . page 38 Table Properties Dialog Box Enables you to select the item types. the Advanced Table Properties dialog box opens. page 50. where you can access options to specify the tabular display.Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. filters. If you click Advanced on this dialog box. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. Layout . page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. where you can define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Brief and bulk properties appear in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. page 53 • Edit View Command. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Item type . Specify brief and bulk properties in this dialog box. Filter .Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. too. and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. and you can further modify the layout and create custom filters for your Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Edit View Opens the Table Properties dialog box. Copy Bulk Properties. equipment or motors). You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also. Related Topics Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.

Base filter .Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. Browse .Displays the name of a saved filter. or edit filter criteria.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. an operator. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Match any is the default matching method. select. Default . which allows you to select a base filter. Property .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. select.Displays the name of the filter.Includes areas to add. Match any . remove. Related Topics • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. Definition . You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box Allows you to define. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. and save a filter for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor.Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table Properties dialog box.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Name .Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. as it is defined in Filter Manager. page 46 Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define. page 53 • Edit View Command. Delete . You can change a filter to the default by selecting this box. Examples of properties include revision number and name. and save filters and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 47 . Edit . Match all . and a value. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Add .

page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. greater than. which can be free text. Bulk. or type a question mark. for example. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. select.Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window. you must type a value. Layout names must be unique. Default . page 54 Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Define. or choose null. Copy Bulk Properties. page 52 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. you must exit and reenter the design software. You can type a percent sign. The selected item type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties.Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Operator . Value . Or. You can designate a layout as the default by checking this box and then clicking Save. Options include a blank value. not equal to.Displays the name of a saved layout.Removes the named layout. For more information about saving views. <>. Name . Do not use an asterisk.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Delete (Name) . You can enter a new layout name and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. Relationships include. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. as a wildcard character for a single character. and save a layout for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. %. In order for your choice in the Usage box to take effect. and so forth. you can select any of the layouts in the list. equal to. =. >. ?. and Brief/Bulk. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. Note • Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data Editor.Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Table Properties dialog box. Brief. *. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. in the Value box. Save . see Save an Engineering Data Editor View 48 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Usage .

Down . Moving a row down either moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down. Caption (Edit) .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. Property . Related Topics • Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box.Removes the currently selected entry. page 54 • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). You select one. Edit . Type . and its type.Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view.Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. Moving a row up either moves a display column to the left or moves a sort order up.Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties dialog box. Add . Sort Property .Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. depending on the row you have selected. To edit an entry. the Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption.Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending. You can select one.Moves the currently selected entry up one line. you can specify the property. If you select an entry in the Display Property view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Definition . order and type. select it and modify the property in the Edit group. page 47 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. depending on the row you have selected. you can specify the property and its caption. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Caption (Definition) .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. page 35 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 49 . its order. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Insert . This group contains two list views. The buttons to the right act upon the active list view.Moves the currently selected entry down one line. the Edit group allows you to edit the property.Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property list views.Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. In order to add to or modify either list. Delete (Definition) . Display Property . Up . Order .Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data Editor.Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Table Properties dialog box.

and saving under a new name. SmartPlant Electrical • • • • • • • • • • • • Default Battery Bank List Default Bus List Default Cable List Default Circuit List Default Circuit Breaker List Default Control Stations List Default Document List Default Generator List Default Load List Motor List Default PDB List Default Reference Cable List Area Break Drawing Equipment Equipment Component Exchanger Mechanical Equipment Other Vessel Instrument Instrument Loop Item Note Nozzle OPC Package SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Default Table Layouts The software includes several default layouts. You can use them to base your own layouts on by changing the layout name. Different layouts are included with SmartPlant Electrical and SmartPlant P&ID. adding or deleting properties.

The Table Properties dialog box opens. you can define a layout on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 53 Define a New Engineering Data Editor View 1. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 51 . Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. 2. Select a filter from the Filter list. 4. On the Table Properties dialog box. To modify an existing table. select an item type from the Item Type list. Notes • If you do not find a filter that you want under Filter. 3. Select a layout from the Layout list. right-click the table and select Edit View. If you do not find a layout that you want under Layout.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • • • • • • • • Pipe Run Piping Component Plant Item Plant Item Group Other Representation Safety Class Signal Run System Related Topics • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Click Window > New > Table.

and value in the Edit group. repeat steps 4 and 5. 3. • 7. the Value list displays the specific properties that you can filter for. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View 1. populate the Definition box with properties and values. • 4. 8. operator. Select a property. if necessary. specify a name for the filter in the Base filter box. 5. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box. You can click Add to add another line to the Definition box. Tip The Property list displays properties that apply to your item type. 6. • Tip Check Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you selected on the Table Properties dialog box. Tip You can open the Table Properties dialog box by right-clicking the Engineering Data Editor and choosing Edit View from the shortcut menu. the Operator list displays all the possible relationships. To further define a filter. Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter (either simple or compound) using the Select Filter dialog box. To add more entries. Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Table Properties dialog box so that the software can populate your table. Click either Match all or Match any. such as greater than and not equal to. 9. page 56 52 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can save that definition: Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Tip • After you have defined a specific filter for your Engineering Data Editor. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. 2.

In the Sort Property list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. you lose that information. • 4. However. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 53 . specify a name for the layout. • Tip Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type. repeat step 7. and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. To further define a layout. 6. Tip You can right-click an existing Engineering Data Editor and select Edit View to open the Table Properties dialog box. and then specify the property and caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager environment. order. populate the Definition box with display and sort properties. select a row in the Display Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. page 91 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Tip • To change the sort order of the properties in the Engineering Data Editor. click Delete if you want to delete the layout. Then select the property. which you specify on the Table Properties dialog box. page 38 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor 1. Click Add to add a blank line to the Display Property list. select a row in the Sort Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another Engineering Data Editor. repeat step 5. 7. Tip To change the display order of the columns in the Engineering Data Editor. 5. click Add to add an entry. • 8. To add and define more sort properties. Project Filters should not be created at a satellite site because when you synchronize reference data. 3. 2. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. To add and define more display properties.

Delete. specify a name in the Name box and click Save on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. you should not store custom layouts for the Engineering Data Editor because when you synchronize reference data. Move Up. you can save it if you want to apply it to another view of the Engineering Data Editor. filter. • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Notes • After defining a layout. layout and all. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Review and edit the item type. For more information. To save the view layout. 3. and layout on the Table Properties dialog box. page 52 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Insert. In the Engineering Data Editor. click the View menu and select Edit View. page 38 Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View 1. page 53 4. If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. and Move Down buttons apply to the active list view. you lose that information. 2. which can be either Display Property or Sort Property. see Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. You can also name and save the entire Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • The Add. page 56 • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. Click OK to display the modified view. page 38 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

This name. page 56 Save View Dialog Box Allows you to specify a name for your custom Engineering Data Editor. which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. is displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with other saved views. Related Topics • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE. page 38 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. page 55 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 55 . page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. which applies to the currently active EDE. Name . These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View Opens the Save View dialog box. page 56 • Save View Command.

There are several ways to customize your EDE: Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 54 Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 56 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . After you customize the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). You can delete a saved view. filter. Notes • An EDE view is a combination of item type. see Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. and the new layout is reflected in both views of the EDE. too. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 2. You can change filters and layouts by using the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 57. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Tip • You can reactivate your saved view any time from the bottom of the filter list on the EDE toolbar. and layout. Enter a name for your view in the Name box. click View > Save View on the EDE toolbar. you can change a layout that applies not only to a standard view but also to a saved view. and this action applies to any EDE that refers to those table properties. For more information.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save an Engineering Data Editor View 1. page 64 • • • The EDE is where you can display stockpile items. That is.

Name . page 57 Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View 1. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineer Data Editor toolbar under Saved Views. page 57 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Tip Saved views are displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Lists the saved views. • Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items can be displayed. page 57 • Delete View Command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Delete View Allows you to delete a view if you have stored a custom Engineering Data Editor view. Select the view that you want to delete from the Name list in the Delete View dialog box. The Delete View dialog box opens. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. and you can choose the view that you want to delete from a list of saved views. Click View > Delete View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. 2. page 38 Delete View Dialog Box Lets you choose a saved custom Engineering Data Editor and delete it. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 57 . Choose one and click OK to delete that view. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. It no longer appears in the filter list in the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Delete View in the EDE.

Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This command queries the database and builds a new view with new results. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 58 • Update the Engineering Data Editor Click Refresh Note • on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Refresh Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Refresh Updates the display in the Engineering Data Editor. The database can change all the time. page 38 58 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. The Engineering Data Editor is not updated automatically: you must update it by using the Refresh command manually.

You can control the scrolling of the Engineering Data Editor with the Freeze Panes command. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. for instance. Several methods to customize the look of the Engineering Data Editor exist. you can quickly limit the number of items that are displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. in exactly the order that you want to see them. You can create your own filters to narrowly define the contents of the view. page 54 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. too. page 61 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 59 . You can clarify the cells that are read-only and the cells that allow you to enter new property information or modify existing information. By using the AutoFilter feature. and you can create unique layouts with exactly the properties that you want to see. you can save it and also delete it later.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview You can change the content and layout of the Engineering Data Editor rather extensively. By specifying the display settings. if necessary. you can define the font that Stockpile items appear in. Once you have defined and edited a view.

Allows you to add another comparison in the Boolean sense of or: this means any one of the criteria must be met. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. you need to use the Edit View command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. arrows appear at the top of each column. if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels. For instance. Select this command again to deactivate it. Or . and so forth.Navigating in the Software: An Overview AutoFilter Command Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter Allows you to filter the items displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. is greater than. begins with. page 61 Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box Sets options for the behavior of the AutoFilter as it controls the display of items in the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • 60 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click the arrow at the top of the column that contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that appears.Lists the available values currently stored in the column. Open this dialog box by clicking View > AutoFilter > Custom in the EDE.Lists the available comparisons: for example. page 60 • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics AutoFilter Command. And . Comparison operator . does not equal. The Boolean or is less restrictive than the and. When you click AutoFilter. Value .Allows you to add another comparison using the Boolean operator sense of and: this means all criteria must be met. but you want to see only vertical drums. page 38 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. equals. To create more elaborate filters and displays. use the AutoFilter command (click the arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums).

page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. • • • Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. To display rows that meet either one condition or another condition. and then click the And button. The Custom AutoFilter dialog box opens. Tip Click View > AutoFilter again to turn the AutoFilter feature off. You can choose Blanks or NonBlanks from the list in order to display items that either have no value in the column or do have a value in the column. 2. and then click the Or button on the Custom AutoFilter dialog box. respectively. Do one of the following: • • To match one criterion. To display rows that meet two conditions. Enter the comparison operator and value that you want. Turn AutoFilter on by clicking View > AutoFilter on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Click the down-arrow at the top of the column you want to filter values for. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. enter the comparison operator and value that you want.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor 1. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 61 . choose that criterion from the list that is displayed. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. enter the operator and value that you want. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. choose Custom from the list. enter the operator and value that you want.

page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. the first column can contain the item tag. you can choose the size of icon that is displayed in the view. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. For example. You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background color. but you want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the supplier. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command. and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are listed in. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. which allows you to specify various display options for the Engineering Data Editor. For instance. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Freeze Panes Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes Allows you to scroll through the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and columns constant. page 38 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 Display Settings Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings Opens the Display Settings dialog box. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.

Italic Bold . depending on Color whether you are specifying this property in the Row area or the Column area. these settings apply to individual items. Small . Large . . Active Drawing Stockpile. You can subsequently select another option from the Item list and define fonts and colors for those items and so on until you have specified the appearance for all locations in the Item list.Allows you to choose a background color for the table cells that you can edit in the Engineering Data Editor. Column . that is.Causes the font to be bold for items selected from the Item list. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Display Settings in the EDE. .Causes small icons to appear in the view. page 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 63 . these settings apply to item properties. Stockpile.Allows you to specify either the font or background color.Lists the different locations of items: Active Drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Settings Dialog Box Sets options for the display of icons and rows and columns in the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Display Settings Command.Allows you to choose a background color for read-only table cells. Item . Read/write properties . respectively. that is. Read-only properties .Contains settings that apply to columns in the view.Allows you to specify large or small icons for the display in the far left column of the view. the remaining options in the Row area then pertain to that location.Causes the font to be italicized for items selected from the Item list. When you select one of these options.Contains settings that apply to rows in the view. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.Causes large icons to appear in the view. or Other Drawings. Row . Icon size in table .Sets the font for the items selected from the Item list. Font .

• 5. To freeze the top horizontal pane. follow these steps: 1. Tip You can specify this display information for each of the four types of items in the Item list. 4. see Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. style. choose large or small icons. Specify a special background color for read-only properties. page 54 • • Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Specify a special background color for read/write properties. Notes • You can also customize the Engineering Data Editor by using the AutoFilter feature. click the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear. To do so. To freeze both the upper and left panes. and color that you want these items to be displayed in. 2. select the row below where you want the split to appear. 2. On the Display Settings dialog box. For more information. too. if you want. page 38 64 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear. And by clicking View > Edit View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Choose an item type in the Item list. To freeze the left vertical pane. Click View > Display Settings on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. you can totally redefine the content and layout of your Engineering Data Editor. For more information. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. see Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Click View > Freeze Panes on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. too. and the specify font.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor 1. page 61 You can use the Freeze Panes feature.

You can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to places throughout the catalog. page 80 • Create a Custom Catalog. you can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections. page 72 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list views to suit your work session. you see the contents of the opened node. You can browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks for important categories. you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the contents. Related Topics Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. page 65 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 65 . page 66 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In the Tree view. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the tree view. You also use the List view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 66 Catalog Explorer Command View > Display > Catalog Explorer Turns the display of Catalog Explorer on or off. Conceptually. Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. the Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant. page 75 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. In the List view. Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. page 66 • Rename a Catalog Node.

3. or PickQuick. 2. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. you can drag the required item from Catalog Explorer into the Drawing view. Find the catalog node in the Tree view. when you place items from the stockpile. page 65 Place an Item from Catalog Explorer 1. However. In the Catalog Explorer list view. to select the appropriate placement for the item. page 186 Place a Two-Point Label. items placed from the Catalog Explorer list view remain in that view. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by clicking the item. 4. click View > Toolbars and select Catalog. they disappear from the stockpile. Place a One-Point Label. whereas. Click View > Display > Catalog Explorer. Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. Select and place the item in the appropriate place in the drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off 1. Use Catalog Explorer to view the symbol catalog and its contents and manipulate catalog items. Click Esc to quit placement mode. You can place labels with one-point placement or two-point placement. you can use the Configuration tool. 2. depending on the label. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Tip Or. page 188 • • • 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Or. click the symbol that you want to place. and then selecting Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Tips • You can also right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Catalog from the shortcut menu. • Notes • The procedure for placing items from the Catalog Explorer list view is similar to that of placing items from a stockpile.

see Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Notes • You can import a spreadsheet in a recognized format into a stockpile to populate it. page 187 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 67 . For more information. page 238 • One-Point Label Placement. page 65 Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer 1. Tip Or you can double-click a node name in the Catalog Explorer tree view to expand the node. page 14 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. too. choose either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. depending on the stockpile that you want to place the item in. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. 4. page 267. page 150 • Two-Point Label Placement. For more information. page 184 • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. right-click the symbol that you want to add to the stockpile. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. Select the appropriate node in the symbol library in order to display catalog symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view. 2. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. Items remain in the stockpile until you place them in a drawing or delete them from the stockpile. page 146 • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. page 265. From the shortcut menu. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. • 3. click "+" by the node containing the appropriate symbol library. In the Catalog Explorer list view.

page 70 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. The Find dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a specific item or group of items. page 68 • Rename a Catalog Item. you can search for catalog items. and cancel the selection of the Catalog Explorer option. page 76 • Rename a Catalog Node. page 82 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Close the Catalog Explorer Window Right-click the main toolbar area. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. page 70 Find Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Find Displays the Find dialog box. page 75 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. Tips • Or use the menu command Close when you right-click in the tree view of Catalog Explorer. Note • The list of commands that are available on the Catalog menu depends on whether the Tree view or the List view is active. page 65 68 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Or toggle the display of Catalog Explorer back off by clicking the icon on the main toolbar: • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Also. page 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview Catalog Explorer > Catalog The Catalog menu in Catalog Explorer provides access to commands that allow you to manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer. page 82 • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

as a wildcard character to find multiple characters.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. as a wildcard character for a single character. "*". You can type an asterisk. New Search . or type a question mark. as a wildcard character for a single character.Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box. Related Topics Find Command. page 70 Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box.Specifies the class of item for which you want to search. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Find in the Catalog Explorer. or select a drive from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want.Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search.Ends the current search. or type a question mark. Browse . "?".Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box. page 70 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 69 .Lists the items that met the defined search criteria. Find Now . Stop . Look in . Class .Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want to search. Named . page 68 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in the Look In box. Results List .Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information. You can type a percent sign. You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer tree view. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. page 69 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. "?". "%".Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search. Related Topics • Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box. Look In .

fill in the Name & Class options. page 74 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. On the Catalog Explorer Catalog menu Tip The Tree view must be the active view in Catalog Explorer for the Find command to be available on the File menu. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria. On the Find dialog box. Related Topics Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. Tip You can use the asterisk. *. click Find. Clicking the File menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the File menu. 2. page 65 • 70 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can select one or more items by using the Ctrl or Shift keys.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer 1. However. but you cannot place an item directly onto a design from this results window. Related Topics • Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box. you can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My Catalog folder or subfolder in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. page 69 • Catalog Menu: An Overview. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. page 82 • Delete a Catalog Item. page 68 New Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > New Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Catalog Explorer. • . • Note • Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Find dialog box. 3. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the File menu button accesses a list of the associated commands. as a wildcard in either the Named or Class options to broaden the scope of your search.

Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or user-level. You must have the proper permissions. you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars. Name the new toolbar. You can define up to two levels of toolbars. Tip • The new toolbar appears on the left side of the window. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in Catalog Explorer. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 71 . page 71 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar 1. 3. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. you create user-level toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID. 6.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Designing Symbol Toolbars Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently. For example. Click New on the shortcut menu. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window. 2. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. your symbol toolbars can streamline your work considerably. find symbols you want to place on your new symbol toolbar. right-click the tree view and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. Right-click the Toolbars node under My Catalog. instrumentation. and under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. or piping symbols. whereas. • • Related Topics • Designing Symbol Toolbars. open the My Catalog node. keeping them conveniently located for easy access. for example. to create symbol toolbars. 7. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree view. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. 5. With the most often used equipment. 4. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. When you add all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar. Notes • • You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window.

Tip The software adds a subcategory called New Category to the My Catalog node. page 68 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • 5. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Use the My Catalog folder only for shortcuts to symbols in the plant catalog. Type a name for the category. other users cannot view the symbols when they open that drawing on another workstation. Right-click the tree view. Select the items that you want to add to the custom catalog from the list view. You can drag selected items to a custom catalog from the Find dialog box. 2. click Rename. Caution • Do not move symbols to the My Catalog folder on your computer using Windows Explorer. 3. select it in the tree view and right-click. Navigate through the tree view to display in the list view a group of items that you want to add to the custom catalog. Type a new name for the node. If the symbols reside on your computer. which opens when you click Find on the Catalog Explorer File menu. Drag the selected items from the list view to the appropriate category or subcategory of the My Catalog portion of the tree view. • Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. From the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu. 6. New Category is selected so that you can rename it. Click the My Catalog node in the Catalog Explorer tree view. Notes • To rename a node. 4. click New. page 65 Open Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Open Opens the Catalog Explorer window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Create a Custom Catalog 1. 7. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clone Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Clone Creates a copy of the selected catalog item. When you create a new symbol. click Clone. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view. When you clone an existing symbol. page 73 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 73 . You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. On Catalog Explorer File menu. page 73 Clone a Catalog Item 1. Related Topics • Clone a Catalog Item. 2. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the new. Click the item you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. cloned symbol. you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol. Related Topics • Clone Command. you may or may not be able to clone items from certain catalogs. Note • Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols.

you are able to delete nodes in certain catalogs. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 74 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. Click the custom catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Delete Removes the selected item from the Catalog Explorer list view or catalog node from the tree view. 3. You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that populate a node before you can delete the node itself. Related Topics • Delete a Catalog Item. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. you are able to delete items from certain catalogs. 2. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected node. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. On the File menu . Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 74 Delete a Catalog Node 1. Note • You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that reside under a node before you can delete the node itself. click Delete.

Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. 3. you can rename nodes in certain catalogs. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. click the custom catalog item that you want to delete. click Rename. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. Type the new name for the custom catalog node. page 65 Rename Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Rename Allows you to type a new name for the item or node. In the Catalog Explorer List view. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. 2. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. On the File menu . Click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Catalog Explorer tree view. click Delete. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 75 . Important • Depending on your editing privileges. 3. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. 2. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete a Catalog Item 1. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected item. On the File menu . you can delete items from certain catalog. page 65 Rename a Catalog Node 1.

click Rename. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. page 65 Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Refresh Symbol Toolbar Activates plant. click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. 2.or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any modifications to a toolbar. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Rename a Catalog Item 1. Enter the new name for the catalog item. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. 3. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. On the File menu . page 65 • Close Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Close Closes the Catalog Explorer window. page 71 • Designing Symbol Toolbars. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. page 71 Activate Symbol Toolbars 1. page 68 76 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the shortcut menu. click the custom catalog item that you want to rename. you can rename items in Catalog Explorer. Related Topics Designing Symbol Toolbars. Right-click in the Catalog Explorer tree view.

page 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 77 . Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 78 Large Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Large Icons Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the list view and does not list details. page 213 Send to Drawing Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Drawing Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Send to Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Stockpile. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 213 View Menu Catalog Explorer > View The Catalog Explorer View menu provides commands that allow you to control the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 178 • Place a Package. page 178 • Place a Package.

Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format. page 78 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Options include • .Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format. page 77 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays the icon. page 65 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View 1. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. name. • • • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In Catalog Explorer click the down-arrow on the View menu 2. Large Icons . page 78 Details Command Catalog Explorer > View > Details Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the list view. and file location for an item. Choose the display of items in your list view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Small Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Small Icons Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the list view and does not list file locations.Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 65 • View Menu. page 78 List Command Catalog Explorer > View > List Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the list view and does not list details. Details . List . Small Icons .

you want to make a shortcut button to the Process Lines node. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. but you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. For example. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to open in the list view. Also. you can use the symbol toolbar. Then when you open Catalog Explorer and click this shortcut button. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular symbol that you use a lot. you open the node for the piping and all the piping types appear in the list view. shortcut buttons are shortcuts to catalog nodes only. page 81 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 79 . Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping. All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) Catalog Explorer > Navigation The Navigation menu in Catalog Explorer provides commands that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the Catalog Explorer. page 80 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create. These buttons reside on the navigation bar between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window.

For example. select the node that you want a shortcut to.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Add Button Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active tree view node. click Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the Navigation menu button above accesses a list of the associated commands. page 80 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Clicking on the Navigation menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the menu. page 81 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 80 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 91 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. Note • You can right-click any shortcut button to display options to add. On the Navigation menu. In the tree view. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views of Catalog Explorer by clicking the down-arrow on the Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is selected. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. you can add a shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears when you click the downarrow of the Navigation menu. page 65 Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar 1. 2. if you frequently select nozzles. 3. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. and show buttons. You must also select the Show Buttons option in the menu in order for your shortcut button to appear between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer. remove.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Remove Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Remove Button Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer. page 65 Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu . Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 81 . click Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button from the navigation bar. Tip • Or you can right-click any shortcut button and select Remove Button from its shortcut menu. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Show Buttons Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Show Buttons Causes shortcut buttons to appear on the navigation bar between the tree view and the list view of Catalog Explorer. Related Topics • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 82 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. 3. and Navigation menus. and that most recent command from the menu is carried out. see Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Note • You must first define a shortcut button in order to display it. View. For example. click Show Buttons. page 65 82 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. The software assigns the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button. The buttons appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu Tip • . For example. Click the toolbar button itself. page 80. 2. The commands on these menus allow you to customize the Catalog Explorer. for example. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. page 65 Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons access the Catalog Explorer File. click an available command. you can control the display of icons in the list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. For more information. On the menu. After customization you can control the content and display of components in the Catalog Explorer window. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated menu. the icon located next to the menu button. page 80 • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). the Find command on the File menu. click on the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is carried out again. page 82 Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button 1. A check mark next to the menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer.

Do not use the Edit > Copy. component types. the value box is blank. The active items always determine the content of the Properties window. This action can be particularly useful when correcting inconsistencies. You can only have one Properties window open. Edit > Paste. You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar. If your select set contains components of different types. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. If only one component is selected. use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V. then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items in the set. • • • Related Topics Copy Bulk Properties. as well as by selecting an item in the Design window. If the selected items have different values for their common properties. An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is created in Catalog Manager. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. You can display and edit relationships that involve components. or when you must apply changes to more than one item. for instance. then only the common properties appear. or Edit > Cut to modify property values in this grid. If more than one item is selected in the Design window. giving the name of the button. If you copy or paste values in the grid area. You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties from one item to another. page 90 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 83 . You can display item properties by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list. or assemblies. or all components are of the same type. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. a ToolTip appears.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Properties Window: An Overview The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of the current selection in the active Design window. Notes • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list. which itemizes all of the selected objects individually and as a select set. all the properties of that type of component appear. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window.

temperatures. page 87 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Note • You can display the Properties window by clicking View > Display > Properties Window. which are displayed for equipment. according to relevance. Categorized . To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. For more information. look in Data Dictionary Manager. Show Brief Properties . 84 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . too. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. The properties are then available to paste onto other items.Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or items.Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no value. for example. see Paste Bulk Properties. Show Case Data . Case data includes both process cases and control cases. pressures. page 144 Properties Window Toolbar You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties window toolbar buttons: Alphabetic .Displays properties grouped by specific categories. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Window Command View > Display > Properties Opens the Properties window and displays characteristics for a selected item or a select set. Copy Bulk Properties . You can review and edit the properties. Paste Bulk Properties .Lists properties in alphabetical order. and so forth.Copies the bulk properties of a selected item.Displays those properties that have been previously specified as brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. see Copy Bulk Properties. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties.Displays a list of case conditions. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. The applicable properties of an item are defined when it is created in Catalog Manager. For more information. pipe runs or instruments. Display Null .

page 83 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 85 . Click View > Display > Properties Window. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. The item characteristics appear in the Properties window. Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. 2. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. but you can change those properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Tip • Another method for displaying the Properties window is to right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. • Related Topics Properties Window Toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties. and select Properties. Or right-click an item. page 90 Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off 1. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window.

Click to display properties alphabetically. click to display properties by categories. use the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window choose a single item or the select set of all listed items. Display case data by clicking Show Case Data . Consequently. empty property values for a select set do not necessarily mean that no value has been assigned for any of the items in the set. If more than one item is selected in the Drawing view or in the Engineering Data Editor. Tip For more information on opening the Properties window. page 85. For the select set. only that either no value has been assigned or that the different items have different values for the property. Display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties 5. Display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display mode button on the Properties window toolbar. a ToolTip displays the name of the corresponding command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Properties Window 1. and only common values are displayed for those properties. 6. • 4. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. Display a null character in empty property cells by clicking Display Null Note • . only properties that all items have in common appear. • Tips • The properties that are subsequently displayed in the window belong to the chosen item or the select set. When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it. page 83 86 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. . Whenever you have constructed a select set. 2. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. see Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. Open the Properties window.

For formatted properties. • Tips • You can review and edit item properties in the Engineering Data Editor. Click Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. and select Properties from the shortcut menu. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Review and Edit Item Properties 1. at the beginning of your entry. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. such as estimated length or maximum operating temperature. you can enter free text into a formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned. In this way. Tips • You can also display the Properties window by right-clicking the empty area of the main toolbar and then selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. page 144 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. page 271 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 87 . or you can select an item by clicking the icon in the left-most column and then edit its properties in the Properties window. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property. '. Or you can click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar. Or you can right-click an item. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. • • Or you can click View > Toolbars and select Properties. Select the item or items whose properties you want to review. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. you can enter a value without a format. too. 2. Use a single quote.

but you want simply to associate it with a different unit. In the Properties window. Select the item that you want to associate with a different plant group. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. For more information. In the Design window or Engineering Data Editor. Click Copy Bulk Properties Tip • . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 89. select the item whose bulk properties you want to copy. 2. Tips • The default plant group is the node in the plant hierarchy immediately under which the drawing resides. page 258 • Copy Bulk Properties 1. your item can already be associated with the plant group type of unit. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. 3. page 83 88 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 215 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Then modify the plant group name in the Plant Group Name property box. Go to the last step if this is the case.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Associate an Item with a Plant Group 1. Not all item types support the plant group property. select the plant group type in the Plant Group Type property box. You can now paste these properties onto another item. For instance. • Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. • Tip It is possible that you do not want to modify the plant group type. see Paste Bulk Properties.

Null means that the property is not defined. Click the null button Note • to display a null value in blank properties. page 88. 2. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. page 84 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste them onto your current selection. or is empty. page 15 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. click Paste Bulk Properties Tip • . For more information. Select the item or items that you want to paste bulk properties onto.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Null Values in the Properties Window 1. 3. On the Properties window toolbar. Select an item in your drawing. see Copy Bulk Properties. page 86 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Right-click and select Properties. but you can change bulk properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and is not the same as a zero value. page 144 Paste Bulk Properties 1. 2. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 89 . Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties.

page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 83 90 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can select an item and click Edit > Properties. which are displayed for equipment. • Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. page 90 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. look in Data Dictionary Manager. according to relevance. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. The software includes a default set of brief properties. Once you display case data in the Properties window. Notes • If the Properties window is not displayed. case data remains displayed for the current design session. page 83 Show Case Data • On the Properties window toolbar. page 86 • Show Brief Properties. click the Show Case Data button Tip • . page 86 • Properties Window Toolbar. or instruments. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. click the Show Brief Properties button Note • . but you can change that set on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Brief Properties On the Properties window toolbar. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. pipe runs.

To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu. properties. you can start by clicking View > Toolbars. you click Tools > Customize.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Software: An Overview Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. but you can also create your own macros and add them to menus and toolbars in the same manner. you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware. Some macros also are delivered with the software. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 91 . From there. Or. such as Microsoft® Visual Basic®. Visual C++ Delphi. and methods available with the product. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. which contains all the objects. For example. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. which provides a complete reference to the objects. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications. The Previous View button is listed on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. Customizing with Macros Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software. you can run the macros directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the macro. The software includes a type library. Several ways to customize the software are available: Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. you could add the Previous View button to the main toolbar. see a list by using the Tools > Custom Commands command. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID to access the SmartPlant P&ID Programming User's Guide. methods. and so forth. Visual Basic. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software. You can view the type library with the type library browser of Visual Basic or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. if you frequently use the View > Previous command. and properties. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. After you click OK.

page 86 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. page 27 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 95 • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Some customization options include displaying small or large icons. page 80 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 71 Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. which allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. page 138 Customize the Properties Window. You can add commands to toolbars or menus. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 80 • Create a New Menu. creating shortcut buttons to access your most commonly used items. or you can create new toolbars and menus. and so forth.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing Interface Elements You can customize many of the various ways of interfacing with the software. page 91 92 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 101 Customize Command Tools > Customize Opens the Customize dialog box. page 27 • Run a Macro. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. see these examples Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. creating filter tabs. Related Topics • Create a New Menu. For more information about some of these options.

When you select Macros in the Categories list. the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected.Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro from. Macros . you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box. Add Command . page 95 • Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. Description . you can click the title of a command in the Commands list. Menu Tree .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize Dialog Box Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs.Places a command on a menu. Or you can add a single command to the main menu bar. you can add commands to the new menu later. Add Menu . Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. you create a cascading menu. The Browse button appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list. After you click this button.Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Browse . When you add a menu with this option. Categories . If you select a macro.Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a menu.Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box. you can select a macro from the Macros list. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Commands . page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. This dialog box opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. you can click Browse to change the folder for macros. When you select a folder and click OK. To see all the commands on a menu. double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 93 . page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 95 • Create a New Menu.Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu.Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. If you add a menu to an existing menu.Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. Descriptions do not appear for macros.

page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from toolbars. Related Topics Add a Command to a Menu. commands. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. page 27 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Reset All . Categories . You can drag a button from this area onto a toolbar. Place Into Selected Menu .Lists the buttons available in the active category. Also. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 95 • Create a New Toolbar. page 95 • Create a New Menu.Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. you edit menu and command names in this view. Description . then the macros. Choose one and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area. page 28 • Toolbars Dialog Box. When you click Add Command. or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree.Describes the button selected in the Buttons area. page 95 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. Remove . Add Menu. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. or Remove. page 26 94 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the changes show up on the menu tree. Buttons .Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree.Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. If you do not set this option.Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize.Navigating in the Software: An Overview menu name.

In the menu tree. double-click the name of the existing menu that you want to add a command to. 3. In the Categories list on the Menu tab. Click Tools > Customize. In the Commands or Macros box. 2. Tip If you choose Macros from the Categories list. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the main menu bar or the existing menu. 4. which allows you to look for an icon on your local computer or on the network.Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box. • 4. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 Add a Command to a Menu 1. Assign . click the name of the command that you want to add. 2. select the command category that you want. otherwise. Click Tools > Customize. page 28 • Create a New Toolbar. then the Macros box is displayed. Tip The menu tree expands to show the commands on the existing menu. This dialog box opens when you drag a macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar. Click Remove.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Button Dialog Box Allows you to assign an toolbar button icon to a macro.Displays the available icons. double-click a menu in the menu tree. 3. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. Buttons . On the Menu tab. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 95 . page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu 1.Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box. Browse . the view contains the Commands box.

• 6. page 91 Create a New Menu 1. Notes • If you remove Customize from the Tools menu. 4. 7. On the menu tree. Click the Add Menu button. click the Reset All button. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. In the Categories box on the Menu tab. clear the Place Into Selected Menu option. Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and click Customize on the shortcut menu in order to open the Customize dialog box. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. Tips • The new menu is added after the existing menu that you selected in step 3. 5.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip The menu tree nodes expand to show the commands on the existing menus. 2. The software places the new command on the main menu bar after the existing menu that you select in the menu tree. On the Menu tab. page 91 Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings 1. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click Add Command. Select the Place Into Selected Menu option. 3. Tip If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar. 96 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. click the command category that you want. Click Tools > Customize. Click Tools > Customize. click the name of an existing menu. you can restore the command.

page 91 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. page 91 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 13 • Run a Macro. Note • After you create a new menu. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 101 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 97 . see Add a Command to a Menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview If you want to add a menu to an existing menu. To enter the new menu. For more information. type the name of the menu. Some macros are delivered with the software. On the menu tree. select the Place Into Selected Menu option before you click the Add Menu button. • 6. click anywhere away from the name. 5. page 93 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to. page 95. you can add commands to it. thereby creating a cascading menu. page 96 Custom Commands Command Tools > Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands dialog box. You can choose a macro and run it. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory.

You can choose OPCs to repair or delete from the plant database. page 100 98 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . OPC Types .Cleans orphaned records from the plant database.Opens the Repair OPCs dialog box. which allows you to fix or delete OPC pairs with incomplete reference information. OPCs . see Related Topics. Fix .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clean Data Dialog Box This utility opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run the DelOrpModItems. Model Items . Gaps .Deletes the non-repairable OPC pair that you have chosen in the OPC list. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. Delete . This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. Clean DB .dll. You use this utility to delete obsolete model items from the database. page 100 Repair OPCs Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands to run DelOrpModItems. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility.Corrects gaps with the wrong representation in the database. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.Fixes the reference to the mated OPC that you have selected in the OPC list.Opens the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.dll and click OPCs. For more information.Allows you to choose to list either the repairable or the non-repairable OPC pairs that have lost links to their partner OPCs either one-way or both ways. which allows you to delete obsolete model items.

Piping Component. Equipment: Other. Instrument. Find and repair off-page connectors (OPCs) that have lost their associations with the OPC that they were originally paired with. you can select any or all of the items and choose to delete them. this dialog box can be used to accomplish the following tasks. Nozzle. You need to perform this operation if you have gapping problems in your drawings. Exchanger. Once the orphan model items for an item type are found. Mechanical.Allows you to choose the type of orphaned model items that you want to display in the Item list. Part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility.Removes the orphan items selected in the Item list from the plant database. then the OPCs are considered non-repairable. You can choose the orphan model items that you want to delete from the plant database. but the mated OPC still has the identity of the first OPC. the utility updates the identity information for the first OPC. Signal Run. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 99 . then the OPC is considered repairable. However. Delete . The utility works on an item type basis and repairs the following model item types: Vessel. This need occurs only in rare instances. Pipe Run. • • Clean orphaned records from the plant database. if both the OPC and its mated OPC have lost the identities of each other. Update gaps in the representation record with the proper item type. Equipment Component. and OPC. If one OPC has lost the identity of its mated OPC. Find and delete any model item in the database that does not have a corresponding entry in the T_Representation table. To repair the OPC. • • Item Type Names .dll and then click Model Items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Orphan Model Items Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run DelOrpModItems. Area Break. and you are given the option to delete them.

• 2. It is very important that you perform the steps in the sequence that they are presented. Click Gaps to find and repair gaps that do not have the correct representation in the database.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete All . On the Clean Data dialog box. select the model orphan items to delete and click Delete. 100 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Open a drawing. Tip Repairable OPC pairs retain one link out of two between the mates. On the Repair OPCs dialog box. refer to your database documentation. T_Representation and T_ModelItem. choose either repairable or non-repairable from the OPC Type list. 7. Click OPCs. Click Model Items. click Clean DB. Browse the drawing software program directory and open DelOrpModItems. 5. • 8.dll.Selects and deletes all the orphan model items of the type specified in the Item Type Names list. choose the model item type from the Item Type Names list. 3. • 4. page 100 Delete Orphan Model Items Important • Verify that the plant user has full permissions to the tables. Tip You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. 9. and click Tools > Custom Commands to open the Custom Commands dialog box. 1. The buttons on the utility are arranged appropriately. On the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box. For information on setting table permissions. In the list view. 6. and click Fix if it is a repairable pair or Delete if it is non-repairable. • 10. Choose the OPC pair that you are interested in from the OPC list. Non-repairable OPC pairs retain neither link. Tip You can also click Delete All to select and delete all the items in the list view. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.

Click Run. • • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. The log file contains information about deleted items including the item type and sp_id. Note • You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation. Click Tools > Custom Commands. such as Visual Basic.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip Follow the prompts on message boxes if you see any. Log messages generated when orphaned records are deleted from the plant database are written to the DBCleanup.txt file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. select the macro that you want to run. 3. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 101 . Click Close to return to the design software. 2. • Notes • The Delete Orphan Model Item Utility must be run from within the drawing environment. Log messages are placed in SPDelOrpModItems. 11. page 127 Run a Macro 1.log file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. On the Custom Commands dialog box.

changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. the drawing is displayed in a Drawing view in the Design window. dimensions. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. Your plant administrator can edit the property set of the template to include default values for some of the properties. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change.Working with Drawings: An Overview Working with Drawings: An Overview An administrator uses Drawing Manager to create a new drawing on a pre-formatted template. A template is a file that provides tools such as text. or other item used to create a plant model. and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your drawing. Using Templates as a Starting Point You use a template as a starting point for creating the drawing. The only way to use a template is to have a plant administrator select a template at drawing creation in Drawing Manager. You cannot save a drawing as a template. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. Drawings are graphical representations of plant models using standard symbols and conventions.cgm for CGM Metafile. Any changes that you make to the drawing data are automatically saved in the database. including . When you create and open a drawing. instead of embedding it. you enter appropriate values into the database for each property of the component.dgn for MicroStation®. and styles used to produce a new drawing. . If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates.dxf for AutoCAD®. Symbols represent components in Catalog Explorer and Engineering Data Editor.dwg and . piping. You select symbols from Catalog Explorer and then select the appropriate placement location in the drawing. The template that your plant administrator selects depends on the type of information that is wanted in the drawing. 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . use Intergraph SmartSketch. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your drawing. A plant model consists of components. units of measurement. Several standard templates are delivered with SmartPlant P&ID. A component is any piece of equipment. as well as the additional custom properties that you need to manage your drawings. . You can save drawings in different formats. and . If you link a border file. geometry. In the Properties window. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. formats.pid for SmartPlant. instrumentation. and you can create new templates in SmartPlant P&ID.

These drawings appear at the bottom of the File menu. You can also change databases by using this command so that you can open drawings in other plants. Note • Renaming a drawing file in Windows allows the drawing to be opened with all graphics pointing to the database. renaming a drawing file in Windows does not update the drawing table in the plant schema where the drawing name is stored. The drawing information is stored in a database associated with the drawings in a plant. and you can change the name of a drawing in Drawing Manager. and save properties for a drawing. Setting Up Properties for a Drawing An administrator sets up drawing properties such as units of measure in Options Manager and Format Manager. To open one of these drawings. page 111 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 103 . The software keeps track of the drawings that you worked on last. Related Topics • Embed a New Object. page 277 • Open an Existing Drawing. and Paste commands to move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. page 108 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Each drawing can have more than one view. These properties include drawing statistics. page 116 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. the software updates statistics automatically. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings and views so that you can see them easily. too. The Options command on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries displayed in that list. edit. you can view. However. page 87 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. With the Properties command on the File menu. you can select it from that list.Working with Drawings: An Overview Opening Existing Drawings The Open command on the File menu opens existing drawings. such as drawing size and the date that a drawing was created and last modified. Drawing properties can include the title. page 125 • Set Document Properties. You can change the size of a drawing by using the Page Setup command on the File menu. You can use the Cut. and keywords that identify important information. the author. Copy. Working with Several Open Drawings Several drawings can remain open in the same session but only if they all belong to the same plant.

and allows you to open a drawing and to choose the database that you access. The list view only displays one property for each drawing. Details . This dialog box appears when you click File > Open on the main menu bar. page 102 • Open Dialog Box Displays the active plant hierarchy and lists its drawings.Displays a detailed view in the right-hand window.Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box. Pause over a toolbar button in order to display a ToolTip. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. 104 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics Customize the Open Dialog Box.Opens the Filter dialog box. which allows you to specify a different SmartPlant initialization file so that you can work in a different database.Deactivates any ad hoc filter you have applied to the list of drawings that appears in the list view of the Open dialog box. see Filter . List . Include Subnodes . which lists existing plants and their drawings. An administrator creates the hierarchy of plants and projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Open Database . Cancel Filter . page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open Command File > Open Opens the Open dialog box. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. page 108 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. For more information on the toolbar commands.Displays the list view in the right-hand window. which names the corresponding command. which allows you to specify the drawings that are displayed in the list or detailed view. You cannot open two drawings from different databases at the same time.Displays in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view.

allowing you to select a SmartPlant initialization file from local and network directories. Site Server . page 72 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 108 • Open Command.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize View . The Open command also checks to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 105 . Plant structures that correspond to the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant structures. You can select only one item from this list view at a time. Related Topics • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. Application Type . page 111 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to the application.Allows you to specify the application that you want to associate with this plant structure. Open .Lists those plant structures found on the network. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box.Opens the Open Site Server dialog box. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing.Opens the Customize Current View dialog box.Connects you to the selected database. This dialog box opens when you click Open Database on the Open dialog box. Available plant structure . page 108 • Open Command. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. which allows you to specify the information about each drawing that is displayed in the report or list view of the Open dialog box.

=. Match all . Delete . an operator. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. Examples of properties include revision number and name. Property . page 108 • Open Command. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Match any is the default matching method. >. and a value. Relationships include. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. and so forth. greater than. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. not equal to. Operator .Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. for example. This dialog box opens when you click Filter Add . Match any . Do not use an asterisk. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. you must type a value. as a wildcard character for a single character. in the Value box. which can be free text. equal to.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Edit . box. Value . You can type a percent sign.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. or type a question mark.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Dialog Box Sets options for the display of drawings in the list or report view of the Open dialog on the Open dialog box. %. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. *. <>. page 72 106 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or choose null. To add to or modify the definition list. ?. Definition .

which changes the order of display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 107 . Selected properties .Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize Current View Dialog Box Allows you to specify what drawing property or properties are displayed in the list view of the Open dialog box. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box.Moves the selected items in the Drawing properties list into the Selected properties list so that those properties are available in the detailed view of the Open dialog box.Displays the properties that are currently available for the detailed view in the Open dialog box. which changes the order of the display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. page 108 • Open Command.Moves the selected property up in order in the list.Lists the properties that are available to be displayed in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Add . Move Down . Remove .Moves the selected property down in order in the list. page 110 • Open a Drawing in a Different Database.Moves the chosen items in the Selected properties list back into the Drawing properties list so that they are no longer available in the detailed view. This dialog box opens when you click Customize View on the Open dialog box. Drawing properties . page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing. Move Up .

For more information. Your plant administrator has set the plant hierarchy and has identified user names and tasks for those plants and related drawings. Double-click the drawing that you want to open. page 102 108 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. On the main toolbar. You need to have the correct permissions to open or save certain drawings. You can change the database you are working in. Notes • You can open one of the last edited drawings by selecting it from the list of recently opened files at the bottom of the File menu on the main menu bar. Tip • If you do not see the drawing that you want to open. 2. page 109.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open an Existing Drawing 1. User roles are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. confirm that the plant hierarchy is correct. click Open .

Navigate to the correct drawing in the Open dialog box and double-click it.ini initialization file and click OK.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open a Drawing in a Different Database 1. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box. click Open Database Tip The Open Database command is not available if you already have a drawing open because you cannot open drawings from different databases during the same P&ID session. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 109 . On the Open dialog box. select the correct SmartPlant . 5. page 141 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 2. On the main menu bar. click File > Open. 3. • . On the Open Site Server dialog box. 6. 4. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open. click Site Server. • Related Topics • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview. Tip The Open command checks to make sure that you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software.

To display a list view in the right-hand window. you can see Drawing Manager Help for more information. 2. click Include Subnodes . page 102 110 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Tip • On the Customize Current View dialog box. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize the Open Dialog Box 1. define your ad hoc filter criteria. click Customize View . Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. On the Filter dialog box. 8. click Include Subnodes again. . Note • Because the Open dialog box is similar in nature to the Drawing Manager interface. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. To further manipulate the properties that are available to view in the right-hand window. click Details Tip • . click Filter . 5. To cancel a filter that you have already applied to the Open dialog box. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. To apply a filter to the drawings displayed in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box. click List Tip The list view displays only one property for each drawing. To display all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. To cancel the display of subnodes. 6. 7. 4. and you can change the order that drawing properties appear in. 3. you can add and remove drawing properties from the display. To display a detailed view in the right-hand window. click Clear Filter .

page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 111 . page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Select the drawing from the list of recently opened drawings. select the view that you want to work in from the list. page 102 Access a Recently Open Drawing 1.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recent Drawings File > Recent Drawings Opens one of the drawings that you worked on most recently. Click File on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Access a Recently Open Drawing. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by using the Tools > Options command. Or. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. click its window. on the Window menu. if you cannot see any portion of the drawing or view. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 2. The view then appears on top of other open views. page 102 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View If you can see a portion of the drawing or view that you want to switch to. The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu.

Related Topics • Set Document Properties. and megabytes. Size . 112 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 116 • View Document Properties.Displays the size of the document in bytes. MS-DOS Name . page 115 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Modified . which displays general information about the current drawing.Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file naming system.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Related Topics • File Properties Command. Location . Note • You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box.Displays the type of document.Displays the directory containing the document. page 102 File Properties Dialog Box Tracks information about the properties of a drawing. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Properties on the main menu bar. Type . page 115 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document.Displays the date and time that the document was last modified. You can review and edit the drawing summary and statistics.Working with Drawings: An Overview File Properties Command File > Properties Opens the File Properties dialog box.Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied. page 116 • View Document Properties. The type is based on the application used to create the document. Accessed . Created . kilobytes. page 112 • Set Document Properties.

page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 113 . Archive . if available.Specifies comments about the current document. Keywords . the dialog box displays Unknown.Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. You can edit these properties.Working with Drawings: An Overview Attributes .Displays the properties of the current document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. Template .Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer. save. Read-Only .Specifies the title of the current document.Indicates that the document is read-only. Title . You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. Author . Note • If some of the above information is not available. These settings are readonly. You cannot open a read-only file for writing. System . or print the document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. unless the document is write-protected.Indicates that the document is a hidden document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. along with keywords and comments for the current document.Shows that the document is an archive document. with the exception of the template. Subject . page 115 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.Displays the name of the person who created the document.Specifies the current drawing template. Comments . The software generates the author and template information when you create. Hidden . page 116 • View Document Properties.Gives a general description of the current document. You usually cannot see this document in the Windows.

Modified . then the line value length is rounded up to 2. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear.Displays the name of the person who has the document open. page 115 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length. page 116 • View Document Properties.106 inches. For example.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document.Displays the name of the application that created the document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. The software automatically generates these properties when you create. 114 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Creating Application .123 and you draw a line that is 2. Last Saved By . area.Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. or print the document. or angle values in a drawing. only the display of the numbers.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. if the precision readout is .Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document. It represents the accuracy of the unit readout value.Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.Displays the name of the person who last saved the document. Saving Application . Length Readout . Area Readout . save. Angle Readout .Displays the date and time the document was last modified.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Created .Working with Drawings: An Overview Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document. Accessed . The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into a property. Currently Opened By . Values ending in 5 are rounded up.1056 inches long.

On the File Properties dialog box. SmartPlant supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. you must save the document to update the property information. click the tab that contains the information that you want. page 116 • View Document Properties. which are defined in the Options Manager. you can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of centimeters with no round-off loss. Note • The File Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. that is. • • Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. All delivered labels use plant default units. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 115 . Change the Unit definition in the SmartText Editor dialog box in Catalog Manager to see a different unit of measure in a label. increase the precision. page 115 View Document Properties 1. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window.Working with Drawings: An Overview Notes • To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a particular unit. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. page 112 • Set Document Properties. increase decimal places. That is. 2. Tip • You must save the document before you can view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. If the document has unsaved changes. Click File > Properties. of the larger unit through Format Manager.

Click File > Properties. see Set up a Page Layout. you must save the document . On the File Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Set Document Properties 1. For more information. You can also change the size for an existing drawing. such as summary information or keywords. 2. page 102 116 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 370 • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Notes • Before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. set the options that you want.

page 102 Close an Active Drawing Click File > Close. page 117 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The software saves your changes automatically. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 117 . page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Close Command File > Close Closes the active drawing. Related Topics • Close an Active Drawing. Note • Any changes are automatically saved upon closing. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.

Any changes are automatically saved. The software checks for unsaved changes when you close the software. Note • The software saves any changes since the last time you saved your changes. page 102 Close the Program Click File > Exit. page 124 118 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Close the Program. page 118 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Exit Command File > Exit Closes the active drawing and the program.

igr A2 Wide (594mm x 420mm) A3border. use Intergraph SmartSketch.pid A4-Size. If you create a new template. If you create a new template. it is possible to customize a drawing template to meet your particular needs.Working with Drawings: An Overview Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview The software includes several standard drawing templates. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. You create labels in Catalog Manager. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch.pid A2-Size. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing.pid A1-Size. you can also create a new title block label that fits the title block of your template correctly and that contains the appropriate information.pid D-Size.igr C-Wide. If you link a border file. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. This task is accomplished inside the design software by using commands on the File menu.pid A-Wide. The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.igr A5 Wide (210mm x 148mm) Template file Border file Page size A-Size.igr E-Wide.pid B-Size. You usually create a new drawing based on one of these existing templates.igr A4 Wide (297mm x 210mm) A5border. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID.pid E-Size.pid Page size A0border. Standard Template Size Information Template file Border file A0-Size.igr A3 Wide (420mm x 297mm) A4border.pid A5-Size.pid A3-Size. The pre-defined size choices for a new template are extensive.igr B Wide (17in x 11in) C Wide (22in x 17in) E Wide (44in x 34in) D-Wide. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. The software also includes a set of title block labels that fit the delivered drawing templates. however. instead of embedding it.pid C-Size.igr A1 Wide (841mm x 594mm) A2border.igr A Wide (11in x 8.igr D Wide (34in x 225in) SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 119 . save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation.5in) B-Wide.igr A0 Wide (1189mm x 841mm) A1border.

page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. page 102 120 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with Drawings: An Overview Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. For more information about creating new drawings. To create new drawings. Caution • Templates created at the user level instead of the plant level are not available to other users or to Drawing Manager for creating subsequent drawings. Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 121 • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. page 121 • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. You can specify properties for the new template and embed border files. page 125 • Set Document Properties. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. page 122 • Embed a New Object. page 370 New Template Command File > New Template Creates a new blank template. page 278 • Set up a Page Layout. see Drawing Manager Help. The path to the plant-level drawing templates is defined in Options Manager.

5. Click File > Properties. Type the path to the border file. make sure that the Link option is selected. use Intergraph SmartSketch. Quit the design software. 7. in the Create from file box. You can also add general identifying information on the Summary tab.igr file. Click File > Save As and specify a name for your template on the Save As dialog box. and Area readout boxes in order to define default units of measurement. Click OK. On the Units tab of the File Properties dialog box. Click Edit > Insert > Object. Tip If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. or click Browse. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 121 . 9. 8. 10. 1. find the border file. Click OK.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Drawing Template Important • Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. choose a standard size or define a custom size for this template. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. page 109. 12. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. For more information about connecting to a database. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. Click File > Page Setup. . click New Template 2. In the Sheet size box on the Page Setup dialog box. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. 14. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. 3. a . 6. 11. Click OK. • Notes • To create a new drawing using a plant template. 4. and click Open. specify the unit in the Length. On the Insert Object dialog box. Angle. On the main toolbar. • 13.

• Tip You can do this by opening the product from the Start menu or by closing all open documents in the design software if it is already running. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. • Tip Be sure to select a template that matches not only the page size requirements for drawings but also the units of measurement. Open the design application. 2. for the plant. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. page 119 • Embed a New Object. but do not open a drawing. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. in the Create from file box. Click Edit > Insert > Object. make sure that the Link option is selected. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. Tip • If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates.Working with Drawings: An Overview • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. Select the existing border file and click Delete while the pointer is in the Drawing view. a . 122 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . use Intergraph SmartSketch. 1. page 102 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border Important Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software.igr file. Type the path to the border file. • 4. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. page 109. and click Open. 5. For more information about connecting to a database. 6. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. find the border file. find the template you want to edit and drag it into the Design window. If you link a border file. On the Insert Object dialog box. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. In Windows Explorer. metric or English. instead of embedding it. 3. or click Browse. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview.

For more information about editing other properties of a drawing template or creating a new template. Click OK. Click File > Save. page 121 • Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 123 . 9. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. page 119 • Embed a New Object. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. If you link a border file. 8. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. Quit the design software. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. instead of embedding it. • Notes • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to.Working with Drawings: An Overview 7. see Create a Drawing Template. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

However.Working with Drawings: An Overview Saving Drawings: An Overview Whenever you save a drawing using File > Save. If you want to save the drawing in a format other than . you probably feel more comfortable saving it at least once yourself. or you can use File > Exit to close the drawing and quit the software. After you have saved a drawing. You can retrieve assemblies from Catalog Explorer to place in a drawing.pid.cgm) format provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. Then. You can use the Save As command to save drawings in . When you open an existing drawing.cgm Format The Computer Graphics Metafile (. These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks. Assemblies are saved in a specific folder specified in Options Manager. Saving Drawings to . you can place the graphics on a Web page and view them with a browser. use the Save As command. Closing Drawings You can close a drawing without saving your work. renders quickly. the software uses the name and folder location specified in Drawing Manager during drawing creation. page 125 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. These changes are saved in the database automatically. it remains displayed on the screen. As you work. You can use File > Close to close the drawing and clear it from your screen. allowing quick access to information outside the drawing. the software copies the drawing from the disk or network and displays it on the screen. page 126 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. You can save your drawing by clicking Save on the toolbar. Saving Assemblies You can save a group of items in a drawing as an assembly. CGM is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it uses little storage space. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. the changes that you make to the drawing appear on your screen. and has the ability to zoom and achieve more detail. because changes to the drawing post to the database as you make them.cgm format. page 111 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

• If you have not named a template before clicking Save.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save Command File > Save Stores the active drawing or template. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. your parametric symbols should not be scaled. You can save the active document to a new format. page 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 125 . page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. • Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. The graphics will display incorrectly. You can type a name and choose a format and location for your template. page 126 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. You cannot open an existing drawing and then decide to save it as a template. If you have not already named a template. page 102 Save As Command File > Save As Opens the Save As dialog box. Note When using AutoCAD. the Save As dialog box appears. the Save As dialog box opens. An administrator must click File > New Template to create a new template. page 124 Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template • Click Save Notes on the main toolbar. Plant location and paths are set in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Options Manager.

Tip When the macro finishes running. In Microsoft Excel.dll macro. 3. page 125 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. In the Save As Type box. Tips • You can choose more filters for the Filter column of this worksheet from filters in Filter Manager. In the design software click Tools > Custom Commands. Click File > Save As. page 124 126 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Save As dialog box. Assign level or layer numbers between 10 and 63 to ensure that graphics appear in the designated levels or layers. This macro is delivered in \Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID Workstation\Program. type a new name for the drawing. When the Custom Commands dialog box opens. Save ExportLayer. 8.xls. run the ExportLayer. In the File Name box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save a Drawing in a Different Format 1. • 7. Related Topics • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. select the drive and folder for the new drawing. 2. The location of this Microsoft Excel workbook is specified in Options Manager. If you save your drawing to the AutoCAD format.xls. you can name layers with any combination of alphanumeric characters. open ExportLayer. 6. You can edit the Microsoft Excel workbook again if you need to add filters and layers. a message appears that tells you if all items were assigned layers successfully or if any items lacked the appropriate layer specification. • 4. select the document format that you want to use. 9. 5.

is created in your Temp folder. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (for example. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. Caution • Do not interfere with the re-create process once started because the drawing can become unusable. When you re-open the drawing. the software reinitializes your drawing and displays the message Re-create drawing is complete. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 127 . Occasionally. Recreate-DrawingName. the software can end in an abnormal way (for example.Working with Drawings: An Overview Re-creating Drawings: An Overview The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. After the re-create process is completed. You can check this file for irregularities that occur during the re-create process. a log file. the status bar at the bottom of the main window keeps you informed about the particular elements currently reconciling with the database. due to power outage). The software displays a message box that states One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. As a result. Also. when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). however. During the re-create process.

page 129 128 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with Drawings: An Overview If a section of the drawing could not re-create successfully an error condition appears on your drawing. Delete the heavy orange line segment and components connected directly to it. This portion of the drawing must be updated manually. Then re-route your runs and replace connections and components as required. The heavy orange line segment is the error condition. Error conditions are always associated with a pipe or signal run. and the symbology is a heavy orange line segment. Related Topics • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition.

page 127 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition 1. open the drawing that you opened in step 1. For more information about recreating drawings. 9. Notes • Normally SmartPlant P&ID recreates drawings automatically when it detects a discrepancy between the drawing and the database. Tip Keep property breaks in mind as you re-route your lines. Replace connectors and components that you deleted in step 1. 7. Click End Process. 4. Place an item in the drawing. 4. • Note • Error conditions are not required items and therefore do not move to the stockpile when you delete them. 3. 6. Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. When the software prompts you that a recreate is necessary. Delete all connectors and components that are directly connected to the error condition. 5. In the list. 2.exe. Right-click an empty space on your Windows taskbar. 8. and then click Task Manager. In SmartPlant P&ID. Delete the heavy orange lines that make up the error itself. click draft. Open the drawing that you want to recreate. page 127 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 129 . Save the drawing.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recreate a Drawing 1. click OK to recreate the drawing from the database. 10. Re-route your pipe or signal run. 3. • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Click the Processes tab. 2. Delete the item that you placed in step 2. see the Re-creating Drawings section in the SmartPlant P&ID Installation and Upgrade Guide.

You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a report. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. You can apply filters to either Drawing views or the Engineering Data Editor. you can use a filter to display an operational design. you want to delete items of a certain type. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a view. That same filter applied to the Engineering Data Editor displays a list of pumps and their characteristics in a tabular format. you could filter all pumps in a Drawing view. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager or Select Filter dialog box environment. These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager. do not create Project Filters at a satellite site.Working with Drawings: An Overview Using Filters: An Overview You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone applications and utilities. but the methods of creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager. Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. for example. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. After applying the filter. you see all pumps in the drawing as graphical symbols. You can show all items added after a certain date or after a certain revision number. Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your workflow more efficient. or an under construction design. For example. However. You can use filters if. where you can edit the properties of the pumps also. And you can use filters to find and replace items. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 357 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. For example. page 52 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. You can then select all the pumps and edit their properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager.

Displays the New Filter dialog box. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. This command displays the Select Filter dialog box. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. page 230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 131 . Properties . page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. which contains a subset of the commands in Filter Manager. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. Using this dialog box. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. page 15 Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. to choose item types for tables. • • New . depending on your selection in the filter list. If you create a compound filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Command View > Add Filter Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. page 138 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type.

You can name the new filter appropriately. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. page 138 New Filter Dialog Box Allows you to specify compound or simple filter when you create a new filter. Color . Compound filter . Filter Name . page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Scroll down the list to choose a line width.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Width . This dialog box allows you to specify a filter for your drawing. Filter . Alternate symbology . In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Properties .Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view.Returns a collection of items based on the filter definition and criteria of a single filter. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. Simple filter . You can activate this dialog box by clicking New on the Select Filter dialog box. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. Scroll down the list to choose a color. page 52 132 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. This information is read-only.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Tab Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Add Filter from the shortcut menu. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box.Combines two or more simple filters to return a collection of items based on the criteria of the combination of simple filters. Browse .Opens the Select Filter dialog box.

the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select. To add to or modify the definition list. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Match all . =. and Estimated Length. Description . not equal to.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. respectively. Add . equal to. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Examples of item types are Equipment. Name . Relationships include. Match any . This button is active only when you select a criterion in the definition list. and the other properties that you want to filter for.Specifies the filter name.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. greater than. Edit . Delete .Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Properties Dialog Box Specifies properties of a filter. an operator.Loop Item Tag.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. Filter names within a project must be unique. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Examples of properties include revision number and name. Specifies available properties in the Definition grid. and examples of properties for these item types are Equipment Type. Instrument. and PipeRun. >. Filter for . If you are defining the Engineering Data Editor. <>. description. Each item type owns a set of properties.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. for example.A phrase or sentence about the filter. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Instr. and so forth. Match any is the default matching method.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. including the name. Definition .Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary. Property . Operator .Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. and a value. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 133 .

For example. you must type a value.Allows you to choose the correct year. You can type a percent sign. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. you can view only pumps whose Revision Approval Timestamp is after a particular date. in the Value box. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. or choose null. %. page 136 • 134 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Month . ?. Year . which can be free text. Do not use an asterisk.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column.Allows you to choose the correct month. *. page 138 Calendar Dialog Box Use this dialog box to specify a date in Value on the Filter Properties dialog box. The option of choosing a date for Value is available only for those properties that are date formatted.Working with Drawings: An Overview Value . Select the date you want and click OK. Dates .Allows you to specify the date of the month. which is specified in Data Dictionary Manager. as a wildcard character for a single character. or type a question mark.

description.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Filter names within a plant must be unique. including the name.Allows you to choose either Match all or Match any. Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types. Name . Filter Method . Description . This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. Match all . The simple filters are added to the compound filter by dragging the simple filter or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy. Match any is the default matching method. This dialog box specifies properties of a compound filter. Match any .Specifies the filter name. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 135 . The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.Working with Drawings: An Overview Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.

select Simple filter. 6. Tip When you point to the name of a filter in the tree view on the Select Filter dialog box. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. type a name for the new filter. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. page 130 136 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can specify a date for that property. Click the ellipses in the Value box in the Edit group and select a date on the calendar. • Related Topics • Create a Compound Filter. and click New. Type a description in the Description box. select the filter property. 5. and repeat step 6. In the Definition area. if needed. Notes • If you select a date-formatted property. Click the Filter for drop-down list and specify the item type for the new filter. In the Edit area. page 137 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. On the New Filter dialog box. • Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. operator. this filter description displays as a ToolTip. click either Match all or Match any. • Tip The type in the Filter for box determines the properties that are available in the Edit area. and corresponding value for the first filter criterion. On the Filter Properties dialog box. 7. • 8. 2. Tip • You can click Delete to remove a filter definition if it is currently selected. 4. 3. Open the Select Filter dialog box. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass. and click OK.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Simple Filter 1. Click Add to add a line for another filter definition.

and click OK. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. Match Any is the default.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Compound Filter 1. To add filter criteria to the compound filter. 5. if wanted. On the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. • Note • When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter Manager. all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be of type Equipment: Mechanical. if you create a new filter under that compound filter. the Filter for property is specified and you cannot change it. page 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 137 . You set the filter description in the Description box in the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. • Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. the filter description displays in a ToolTip. This is. of course. 2. 3. which displays in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog box. 4. Open the Select Filter dialog box. select Compound filter. 6. Or you can select the compound filter and create a new simple filter under it. and click New. Type a description in the Description box. drag one or more simple filters into the compound filter. page 136 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria return. For example. • 7. On the New Filter dialog box. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type. because all of the simple filters under one compound filter must be of the same item type. Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria specified are returned. Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter. Select either Match all or Match any. Click OK. Tips • All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same item type. type a name for the new compound filter in the Name box.

In order for your alternate symbology to affect the Drawing view. • Notes • To define a new filter. 4. you can choose a filter from the Select Filter dialog box. From the shortcut menu. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View 1. page 83 Filter Tab Cut Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Click OK. page 137. As long as the cut filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. 2. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. see Create a Simple Filter. select Add Filter. You can see the properties of a filter by selecting it in the Select Filter dialog box and clicking Properties. you must right-click the filter tab area and select Use Alternate Symbology. Right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view. On the Add Filter Tab dialog box. Click OK to apply the filter to the Drawing view. the Cut command allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view and place it on the Clipboard. page 136 or Create a Compound Filter. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. You can create and then select that filter for the view. too. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. type a filter name. page 138 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. 3. For more information. click New on the Select Filter dialog box. Tips • If you click Browse. You can choose alternate symbology on this dialog box.

As long as the copied filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. the Paste command allows you to place a filter tab from the Clipboard onto the Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Paste Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. You must have placed a filter tab on the Clipboard in order for this command to be available. the Copy command allows you to place a filter tab from the Drawing view onto the Clipboard.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Copy Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 139 . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 Filter Tab Delete Command Allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view. You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available.

page 138 140 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. which allows you to edit the options for the selected drawing filter. this command opens the Properties dialog box. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Properties Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command Applies any alternate symbology you defined for a filter tab on the Add Filter or Properties dialog box.

Also. Format Manager. Options Manager or Rules Manager. a table. and the error message in SPError. A view can be a schematic drawing. In the Properties window. As you work on your drawing. unified data structure that represents the plant model. too. you can save the group of items as an assembly. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. piping. you can generate order lists for the components in the drawing. You can place components such as equipment. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model. You can print the drawing. If you repeatedly place particular groups of items. you can easily perform the tasks required to create a detailed plant model. you can annotate your drawing with labels as you design the drawing.ini. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 141 . By manipulating model views.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview With SmartPlant® P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. Note • When SmartPlant P&ID or any associated stand-alone application. and instrumentation from Catalog Explorer or the stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the drawing. you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by reviewing the inconsistency indicators. you can add values for various properties of each item after you place it in your drawing. you can generate reports to help you keep track of information in the drawing.log is Error Problem:Common::GetDatabasePathAndServerLocS:\SmartPid\bin\ SmartPlant. for example Filter Manager. solve the error by making sure your internet options are set to allow internet access using a proxy server and also to bypass the proxy server for intranet addresses. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. cannot establish a connection with the database on the server. Also. or a report. including all plant components and their relationships. You can resolve inconsistencies using solutions from the Consistency Check dialog box. for example. The standard modeling environment lets you place items from the catalog into the appropriate model views. After you finish the drawing. One key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components within the plant model. These indicators appear in your drawing as soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Create an Assembly. page 35 • Print a Drawing. page 51 • Generate a Report. page 286 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 317 142 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 365 • Review an Inconsistency. page 334 • Open a New Drawing View.

Enforce all subclass and one-toone relationships. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 143 . but not both of them.Used for more complex data integrity controls. Since the relationship. such as monitoring conditions on multiple items. Either of these objects can be null. Foreign Key in conjunction with Not Null .Enforces group relationships. Another candidate for a Check constraint is the enforcement of certain values for one or more items. • Check . but does not allow null values to persist and requires that all values be unique. exists in the table referenced by the foreign key. For example. already exists in the database or is created during your transaction. For example. Foreign Key with Not Null and Unique . such as the plant item to plant group relationship. but does not allow null values to persist. • Foreign Key .Insures that the corresponding value. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. • • The constraints so far described serve to enforce relationship integrity. History records can pertain to either a drawing or the model.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Understanding Database Constraints The following database constraints improve the integrity of the data associated with your design. invalid null or zeroes assigned to properties are tested against Check constraints. such as the case to model item relationship. This type of constraint is used to enforce logical relationships. such as the pairing of OPCs. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. the object and the foreign key it points to. unless it is null. the constraints are satisfied without changing the scope of your transaction. A Check constraint is defined to enforce this condition by using comparisons and exclusions.

like Delete. the items appear in the indicator at the end: highlight color.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview To select an item. equipment. and Rotate. or embedded or linked objects. You can select pipe routes. such as end points and center points. and you can select item groups. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in the active drawing. you can click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items. When an item is highlighted. You can construct a select set using the Engineering Data Editor in this way. the following things happen: • The item changes to the selection color. valves. selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. Although you can select more than one item at a time. such as dragging a handle to change the shape of the item. and so forth. The handles of the item appear if the item has handles. the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone . if they reside there. you can use the Select Tool on the main toolbar. these items are also selected in the active drawing. can act upon all items in the select set. the items change to the selection color. you can click to select it. If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor. When you select an individual item. Selecting Single Items To select an item. Or. You can change the selection color with the Options command on the Tools menu. Move. You can use the Select Tool ribbon to choose if you want to select only items completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence. Copy. only one item can have handles at a time. 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Selecting Multiple Items and then You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool holding Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. Handles allow you to directly modify the item. click the Select Tool on the main toolbar. assemblies. When you click the Select Tool. labels. Many manipulation commands. • • When you select multiple items or grouped items. If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing. You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data Editor. As you pause on items in a drawing. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected item.

A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. modify. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. Or. Canceling the Selection of Items To cancel selection of an item or group of items. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 145 . page 147 Select Tool Command Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select. After placement. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Whenever you have constructed a select set. You cannot select more than one item for placement in a drawing at a time. you can click any empty point on the drawing. page 218 • Select an Item. you select it in Catalog Explorer or the stockpile. Selecting Items for Placement To place an item in a drawing. While the Select Tool is active. Related Topics • Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 218 • Select an Item. Then you click to select the position in the drawing to place the item. you can select another item or press Esc to quit placement mode. and manipulate items. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. the Select Tool ribbon is displayed. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.

which make up symbols. page 149 146 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Inside . page 264 • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to individual elements in a symbol. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile.Specifies that individual elements. Bottom Up . page 147 • Select Tool Command. when you are placing them. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Tool Ribbon Appears when nothing is selected. Top Down . you can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items. such as check valves or flow arrows or other inline items. pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. Related Topics • Place a Flow Arrow. page 145 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it. Note • To find out the name of an option on the ribbon. page 218 • Select an Item. After you select an item.Specifies that items inside the fence are selected. if it is available for the selected item. are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol. the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the selected item. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. Pausing after you drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool. Overlapping . and allows you to select the proper orientation for the item. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. page 194 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer.Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the fence are selected.

To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected. click it. To select one item. To select more than one item at once. You can build up a select set using this method. To select all items in a drawing. To select more than one item. you can select items in the Engineering Data Editor. selectable items are highlighted as you pass the pointer over them. they are selected in the Engineering Data Editor. 3. page 144 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 147 . Do one of the following: • • • • . use PickQuick. If they reside in the active drawing. To clear the selection of an item or items. Right-click in an empty portion of the drawing. To select one of several overlapping items. click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl. Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl. do one of the following: • • • • Click in an empty portion of the drawing. press Ctrl + A or click Edit > Select All. • • • Related Topics Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. or. right-click a blank area in the drawing and click Select All on the shortcut menu. to accomplish the same thing. drag to fence the objects. click the Select Tool: 2. click to select it. Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and locate and break-away tolerances. Also. too. Notes • When the Select Tool is active. page 148 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item 1. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. On the main toolbar. hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item.

On the PickQuick toolbar. Note • PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other. The second item is highlighted. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. The first item is highlighted. When the pointer appears with ellipses. click. 4. page 149 Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select. PickQuick also helps you place items when multiple possible placement configurations exist. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. which appears near the pointer. For more information. without clicking. page 144 148 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . move the pointer over the numbered PickQuick buttons.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. to highlight the corresponding items. 2. click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar. 3.

2. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line or equipment. Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer: .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. click the corresponding button on the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation. page 146 • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. page 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 149 . When the appropriate orientation is displayed. Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations. 4. Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. or you can close it by clicking X in the upper right corner of the toolbar. 5. Note • You can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing or press Esc to close the Configuration toolbar. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer. 3.

page 33 Show Grid Command View > Show Grid Displays a grid so that you can place items with precision. You can use the grid if you want the items to line up at regular intervals in the drawing. The grid is an set of imaginary lines in the drawing. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine. Note • You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. When you click View > Snap grid. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. To view grid lines at a finer level. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. or coarse levels. page 115 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . solid grid lines. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. The grid lines for a dynamic grid move as you zoom in or out in a view. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. page 116 • View Document Properties. they do not appear when you print the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview The grid and its grid lines allow you to place items in the drawing by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. which opens when you click View > Properties. medium. Note • You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. page 150 • Set Document Properties. You can view the grid by clicking View > Show grid. You can specify the increment settings on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. set the style to dynamic and adjust the density.

To view grid lines at a finer level.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Snap Grid Command View > Snap Grid Aligns items with the grid. page 116 • View Document Properties. Note • You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 151 . set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid line width with the Density control. which opens when you click View > Properties. The grid is a set of lines in the drawing background that helps you align items. Grid lines do not print. When you set the Snap grid option. page 150 • Set Document Properties.

Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment. and reactors. The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component symbols. Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component. you can only associate an equipment component with a single piece of equipment. such as towers. As a group. As you place equipment components. and nozzles can be flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. creating an equipment group. such as nozzles and trays. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. page 153 • Place Multiple Representations. you can have limits to the possible placements for the equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Equipment: An Overview You can place various types of equipment in your drawing. For example. page 154 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . heat exchangers. boilers. However. However. When you place an equipment component. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. page 164 • Place Equipment. the components move when you move the equipment. You also place equipment components in drawings. the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of equipment. you or your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as needed for your plant.

2. Notes • After you place items. rotate. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tip In addition. or move most items using their component handles. In the Catalog Explorer list view. page 242 Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. 3. the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you approach the tank during placement. you can display it by selecting the item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all be placed internally (for example. • Tip • You can assign heat tracing to equipment. For more information. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 244 Move an Item Using the Move Button. Flanged Nozzle-Internal. you can mirror. see Assign Heat Tracing. click the equipment that you want to place. 4. For internal placement of equipment. Position the item and release to place it. In the Properties window. In other words.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place Equipment 1. page 219 • If the Properties window is not displayed. you drag the nozzle to the interior of a tank and place it. For more information. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the right. in a tank). approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 153 . Or. see Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. Nozzle-Internal. You can use the same steps for placing equipment. enter values for the equipment properties in the appropriate rows in the table. you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item.

you can do the following. 3. Be sure the drawing used in step 1 is closed. 2. 3. Select the nozzle.Vessels). page 215 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. 1. Tip A multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. drag the nozzle an arbitrary distance away from the equipment. Select a filter that best describes the type of item you want to represent (for example. You can think of a multiple representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in another drawing. Attach the nozzle to the equipment that you want it related to. Related Topics Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. 2. Open a drawing and place an item of equipment. You can choose a filter from the list using the Engineering Data Editor. • Tips • You can find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other Drawings button . page 408 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Display the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor. Open the drawing that is a target for your multiple representation (parent-child representations) of an item. While holding down the Alt key. 4. Save your work and exit the drawing. Equipment . page 152 • Place Multiple Representations 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If you need to place a nozzle so that it is associated with equipment but not attached to it. 154 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Notes • You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. 7. Click the location in the drawing where you need to place the multiple representation. • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. be aware that multiple representations are constrained because of claiming and moving drawings between projects and the Plant. and Equipment Type. • 6. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu. If you are working in a project. You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any one drawing. page 152 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. right-click the icon at the far left of the parent item. Equipment SubClass. 5. The definition attributes are Equipment Class.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can also open a tabular view of your target drawing in the Design window by clicking Window > New > Engineering Data Editor. In the Engineering Data Editor. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 155 .

Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are aggressively joined up with the pipe runs they attach to. 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . then the pipe run must be broken. the Join Runs command is still available for this purpose. the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run. After you select a type of line route from the Catalog Explorer list view. too. Right-click a line and choose from several commands. the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with the existing connector. The pipe run created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols. Lines consist of a series of line segments. the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match. Of course when two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and modification of connectors. At the time that the connection is made. You can add vertices to add segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon. If they pass the property criteria. you can manipulate all lines by using the same basic procedures. Line Connectivity When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either end.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Routing Lines: An Overview Whether you are routing pipe or signal lines. they are automatically joined together. You can use these vertex handles to move. if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe run. The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing pipe run. they are not automatically joined together. or connect lines. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing connector. represented by black squares or dots. You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs. The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component. the properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are lost. You use this menu to break runs or join runs. reroute. The software places handles. The Break Run command is still available for this purpose. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an existing pipe run. If you want them joined together. If two pipe runs have different properties. those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same properties. Similarly. at each segment vertex along the line route. use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or modify the line. The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines.

You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar. page 160 • Start a Line in Free Space. Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does not cause them to be joined together. This procedure is usually popular with signal and utility lines. Note • All of the above information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs. page 161 • Move a Line.Causes the software to insert line segments instead of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines. it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again. page 162 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does not cause the pipe runs to be joined. page 162 • Break a Pipe Run.Allows you to route lines in any direction.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never include any branches. page 164 • Branch to an Existing Line. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. page 159 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 157 . page 165 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. page 220 • Start a Line from a Connect Point. Insert Segment . page 159 Line Routing Ribbon Appears when you select a line element from the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing line in a drawing. page 220 • Start a Line in Free Space. Related Topics Branch from an Existing Line. instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing. Alter Segment . page 161 • Move a Line. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe run and never in the middle. but you can use it for any line routing.

too. When the line is complete.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Route a Line 1. 5. 3. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing. Tip • You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times. Click a connect point on an item in the drawing. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Tips • This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement mode. right-click to confirm the placement. page 156 158 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • 4. 2. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place. • Tip You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line.

you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. including the termination point. click the connect point of the appropriate item to place the line. click the starting point for the line route. • 3. Tip Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction. Notes • You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. 2. If the Properties window does not appear. In the drawing. When you complete the line route. 4. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 159 . click the line that you want to place. Click the location for each vertex of the line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line in Free Space 1. right-click to place the line. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Tip • If you want to route the line to a connect point of an existing item. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line from a Connect Point 1. 4. click the connect point from which you want to start routing your line. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. click the type of line that you want to place. In the drawing. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Click the location for each vertex of the line route. If the Properties window is not displayed. Notes • To stop placing lines in the drawing. right-click to place the line. press Esc to quit line placement mode. 3. When you complete the line route. 2. page 156 160 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Or.

you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into. On the Line Routing ribbon. For more information. you can hold Shift while moving a line to insert segments. • . Notes • The line remains selected until you click another item or command. Press Esc to stop adding segments. press Alt and drag the new vertex You can also insert line segments into an existing line. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 2. page 165. Drag the selected line to the new position. You can change values for properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line 1. page 156 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line 1. page 161. 3. click Insert Segment Tip Instead of clicking Insert Segment. 2. Select the line that you want to add a vertex to. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 161 . Notes • . You can also break a line at a point. see Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. If the Properties window is not displayed. You can join two pipe runs that have different property values. Point near the center of the line where you want the new vertex. The resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. For more information. In the drawing. 3. When the pointer turns into a double arrow to the appropriate location. see Break a Pipe Run.

Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. click the starting point for the branch. press Esc to quit line placement mode. • • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. click the type of line that you want to place. To complete the line route. In the drawing. You can extend a line to an existing line to create another branch point. press Esc to quit line placement mode. Notes • Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. or a connect point on an item in the drawing. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. To stop placing lines in the drawing. To stop placing lines in the drawing. 4. page 156 Branch to an Existing Line 1. Or.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Branch from an Existing Line 1. Or. click a point on an existing line route to begin placing the branch. click the type of line that you want to place. • • 162 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4. you can display it by selecting the line and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. If the Properties window is not displayed. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Notes • The starting point for a branch can be a point in free space. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the last step above. a point on an existing line. 3. 2. 2. click a point on the existing line where you want to end the branch. When you complete the line. In the drawing. right-click to place it.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Then on the same line. On the line. 3. page 156 Add a Manual Gap to a Line 1. For more information on resizing parametric symbols. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. If the Properties window is not displayed. You can resize the gap by dragging the parametric handles. 2. click the position for one side of the gap. see Scale a Parametric Item. click the position for the other side of the gap. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 163 . Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Note • Gaps are parametric symbols. page 239.

page 156 • 164 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 164 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. or instrument that you want to specify heat tracing for. In the Properties window. page 258 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. HT Medium Temp. then you cannot subsequently assign heat tracing properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign Heat Tracing 1. You choose the units for the HT Medium Temp property when you assign the temperature value. Tips • If you have already specified insulation properties for the item. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. and HT Requirement properties. If you assign heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. page 152 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. specify values for the HT Medium. Format Manager contains definitions for temperature units. Select the equipment. pipe run. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. • • Related Topics Assign Heat Tracing. 2. piping component. You choose the HT Medium and HT Requirement properties from select lists. Select list values are defined in Data Dictionary Manager.

Notes • You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking it and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. right-click the pipe run that you want to break. 3. In the drawing. then you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. click the line at the point you want the break it. page 165 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 • Break a Pipe Run 1. Related Topics Break a Pipe Run. If the Properties window is not displayed. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. • Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. click Break Runs. On the shortcut menu. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break Run Command Line Shortcut Menu > Break Run Enables you to break a pipe run at an arbitrary location. In the drawing. 2. Tip • The software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the selected point. click the point where you want to break the run. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 165 .

click the second pipe run to join the two runs. In the drawing. click Join Runs. On the shortcut menu. see Break a Pipe Run. click on the line that you want to join to the selected line. page 156 Join Pipe Runs 1. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. For information about breaking runs. If the Properties window does not appear. page 156 166 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. 3. Notes • If you join two pipe runs with different properties. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Join Runs Command Line Shortcut Menu > Join Runs Enables you to join two lines together into one pipe run. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. 2. right-click the first pipe run that you want to join. In the drawing. page 165.

to review the possible placements for the component and select a final orientation for the item. Tip • If the Properties window does not appear. Position the item and release. 2. Generally. piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them near an existing pipe segment. Piping components include valves. reducers. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. piping components are connected with lines. page 164 • Place a Piping Component. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. enter values for the properties of the piping component in the appropriate rows in the table. flanges. Drag the item to the appropriate pipe run in the drawing. the software automatically creates a relationship between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Piping Components: An Overview Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. you can use the Configuration tool. click the piping component that you want to place. the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. or PickQuick. and strainers. If several possible orientations exist for the piping component. In drawings. As you place piping components. In the Properties window. For example. the valve automatically orients itself vertically. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as needed. However. you can display it by selecting the component and then selecting Edit > Properties. 4. Your plant administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in Rule Manager. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 167 . When you move the pipe run. if you drag a horizontal valve to a vertical pipe. page 167 Place a Piping Component 1. The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing.

the pipe run is highlighted. the piping component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action. do the following. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. page 156 • Using Piping Components: An Overview. While holding down the Alt key. Place the first component in the line. drag one component along the line away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two. If you place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted. Then even if you drag the component away from the line. 2. or PickQuick to select the appropriate placement for the item. you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect it and then move it back to get the connect points attached. regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager. If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance apart.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • As you drag piping components over a pipe run. you can use the Configuration tool. • If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the pipe run. If the components are already close to each other but not connected at coincident connect points. page 167 168 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. You can see that the connect points are actually joined by the black rectangle in the Drawing view: • • 3. 1. or the pointer passes over runs while you are in placement mode. Place the second component into the line and connected to the connect point of the first component on the end that you want to attach to. the line routes itself so as to preserve its connection to the component. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.

For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings.l. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 169 . see Data Dictionary Manager Help. a warning displays the appropriate pairs.r. In Data Dictionary Manager.ForeignCalc program ID. which is activated by assigned settings in Options Manager. pressures. the ValidateNomDiam.l. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete temperature-pressure pair from among design. alternate design.us_pjstb.pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables library files . For more information about assigning program IDs.dll files . and diameters assigned to the pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping components. us_pjstb. This warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of the PMC.dll. The service limits validation and automatic commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options Manager. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source information for the validation and search.dll Performing Service Limits Validation The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping Materials Class.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the piping materials class with the temperatures. which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property. and ValidateServiceLimits. see Options Manager Help.dll. and us_pjstb. starts the Piping Specification utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a nominal diameter is changed. pdpjsx.t .dll. PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec • • • • pd schema . and alternate operating cases.pdtable_102 table ra schema . In continuous validation mode. operating. pdpjs.l. this verification occurs each time that you modify either the Piping Materials Class or a temperature – pressure pair in the process case data of the pipe run. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits of the selected Piping Materials Class.PipeSpec.

this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max temperatures (Design. then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides. If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified. and Alternate Operating) are modified on the pipe run. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. then the Commodity Code property displays an error message. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in Catalog Manager. but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits. a value of -9999 for maximum temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value. an error is recorded in the error-log file with the appropriate message. and the process case temperatures on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with service limits.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication Category properties of inline piping components. If the modification occurs on a property of a piping component. then the lookup encompasses every piping component on that run. If a maximum temperature exists for that component. A relationship between the fabrication category and the commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. Note • The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in Options Manager. then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have the same code value. in PDS 3D. The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed property in SmartPlant P&ID. The Commodity Name is a unique name for every symbol. If multiple records are obtained in the lookup. If not. and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be specified. then a value of zero Deg-K is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. In PDS 3D. The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit value in the 3D database. For example. 170 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Operating. Alternate Design. then the lookup is restricted to that particular component. this unique name is the AABBCC Code property. The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be in a pipe run. In the continuous validation mode.

you can refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide by clicking Help > Printable Guides. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS 3D database tables. For example. This functionality is not available unless the proper settings are defined in Options Manager and the applicable Program IDs are assigned in Data Dictionary Manager. the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant P&ID. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. Short Value for the Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. Choose one. and allows you to choose a PMC from a piping specification.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Similarly. while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. the missing properties are listed in the log file. Piping materials class . page 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 171 .Lists the PMCs in your piping specification. property validation for piping segments and inline components is run. This can include checking service limits. Error messages help you identify the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected. Note • Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError. if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. and depending on the settings in Options Manager. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec.log file in the directory assigned to the TEMP environment variable. For more information about Piping Specification configuration. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. page 172 Piping Specifications Dialog Box Opens when you click the Calc button for the Piping Materials Class property (PMC) for a pipe run in the Properties window.

such as Nominal Diameter. including inline components. For more information. for instance. If you choose a diameter. page 169 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information. then the commodity code property becomes Not In Spec.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. Maximum Design Temperature. page 173. Notes • If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other components. the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the entire run. you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components. see Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the specifications in your 3D databases. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties window. Maximum Design Pressure. choose the appropriate PMC from the list and click OK. 4. On the Piping Specifications dialog box. Tip • Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties. 3. Click the Calc button . respectively. Select the pipe run. that does not exist for the assigned PMC. • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. then the error Service Limits Error is added to the PMC for the run. If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree with the assigned PMC. 1. • 2. and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the assignment. and so forth. see those Help files.

click Related Topics. For more information on assigning a PMC. but so it the Fabrication Category property for the inline components. Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code. Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class has been defined. For more information about the error log. then a pipe run with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component. page 169 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 173 . or you can open the error log. if the relationship is defined in your 3D database. see Options Manager Help. define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the component. respectively.log. If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned. given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases. PipeSpecError. • • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. 1. see those Help files. you can still click the Calc button for the Commodity Code property and choose a code. Tip • You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category have been assigned in the Properties window. if properties have not been assigned as expected. In the Properties window. page 172. With continuous validation.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. Notes • If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility. For more information. not only is the commodity code defined automatically. • 2. For information about the settings required for continuous service limits validation. see Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. However this does not verify that the component agrees with a piping specification.

Instruments can be items such as flow control elements. flow controllers. The software includes a standard group of instrument and instrument loop symbols. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. computing devices. such as flow or temperature. page 178 • Assign Heat Tracing. the instrument is placed in free space. Instrument Loops You can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. or electrical switches. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as your plant requires. and pressure regulators. Offline Instruments Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment. Instruments are devices used directly or indirectly to measure or control a variable. and system functions such as digital control stations or computers. Offline instruments include flow controllers. Signal lines are intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. such as orifice plates. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe segment. page 164 • Place an Inline Instrument. page 180 • 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Inline Instruments Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. flow indicators. Inline instruments include instrument valves. the pipe segment appears selected.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Instrumentation: An Overview You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing. Typically. inline instruments. such as pressure regulator valves. such as orifice plates. Related Topics Add Instruments to a Loop. in a plant process. level gauges. Instruments loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a process variable. however. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. flow controllers. and other instrument components. and piping. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window) Allows you to search for and specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. %..Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the Search for box. the instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such a placement. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. you can use the Configuration tool. specify properties of the inline instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 175 . Tip • If the Properties window is not visible. limited by parameters that you enter here. Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing. If you want to display all available loop tags. page 178 • Place an Inline Instrument. 3.) button next to the loop tag cell. For example. page 180 Place an Inline Instrument 1.. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. The percent character. Search Now . you could type %F% in the Search for box. is a wildcard. you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. 4. Notes • As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run. to select the appropriate placement for the item. This dialog box opens when you click the ellipses (. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. or PickQuick. the pipe run appears selected. If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. Position the item and release it. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. simply type %.Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop tags. click the inline instrument that you want to place. Search for . In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile. In the Properties window. 2. if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter F.

It has the one involved in the pipe spec access. CoatingReqmts. You can use Data Dictionary Manager to sort the properties by Validation ID using the Piperun table. page 156 176 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . then the heat tracing appears above the instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the piping. and it was previously equivalent to the value on the inline component. MaterialOfConstClass. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing. • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. if the pointer is below the pipe run. This copying behavior is based upon the pipe run properties that should have their values copied to the in-line components. When a value for one of the affected attributes changes on the pipe run. and ScheduleOrThickness. Also. They are CleaningReqmts. This is configurable by adding the ProgID called UpdInlineCompProp. Notice the only attributes that are delivered with this validation ID. The way this works with the attributes that have that ID is that the software is watching the pipe run and the inline components. then an update to the pipe run will update the inline component. you can decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at placement time. updating the pipe run will not affect the inline component. You may determine which properties should be copied. Nominal diameter is also included although it does not have that particular Validation ID specified. You must specify that particular validation id in order to use the functionality. If the values were different. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping. Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied from the pipe run to the inline component.ForeignCalc is not delivered as part of our sample validation. the routine UpdInlineCompProp.ForeignCalc in the Validation ID field for the PipeRun Property.

or move them. 2. the software inserts the offline instrument in the signal line. page 164. you can escape placement mode by rightclicking. Or. You can assign heat tracing to offline instruments. After you place offline instruments. rotate. click the offline instrument that you want to place. • Tips • If the Properties window is not visible. Tip You can click an item from Catalog Explorer and then place it by clicking the appropriate location in your drawing. • Notes • If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line. page 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 177 . see Assign Heat Tracing. After you place items. too. enter values for the properties of the instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. 4. Position the item and release to place it. you can mirror. Press Esc to quit placement mode.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Offline Instrument 1. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. you can connect them to piping segments or inline instruments using signal lines. In the Catalog Explorer list view. just as piping components are inserted into pipe runs. 3. then you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 215 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. For more information. In the Properties window. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing.

you do not need to place the loop symbol in the drawing itself to create an occurrence. • • • • • • 178 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 265. 4. The software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop. You can assign the Loop Tag qualifier to instruments that you have already placed in your drawing or that reside in the stockpile. Select the item tag of the loop from the Loop Tag select list in the Properties window. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. 5. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. Instead. right-click the instrument loop that you want to place. 2. 6. or you can click the Calculation button next to the Loop Tag box in the Properties window. 8. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list. you can create a customized loop report to generate lists of items in specific loops in your drawing or plant. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor to display elements of the loop. Notes • Selecting the item tag of the loop for an instrument triggers the Item Tag Validation program. Moving the instrument loop itself to another stockpile has special limitations. Click Search Now. clear selection of the instrument and then select it again. and you can either place instruments then create the loop or create the loop and assign instruments to it as you place them. Instrument loops normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. enter characters in the Search for box in order to display the available loop tags.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Add Instruments to a Loop 1. If you need to refresh the instrument Loop Tag Suffix display in the Properties window. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node. 3. 7. After you create instrument loops. You can assign a group of instruments and other elements to a loop by creating a select set of them and assigning the correct loop tag for the set. placing the loop in the stockpile adds the loop to the model. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. On the Loop Tag dialog box. Since loops are logical collections of instruments rather than physical groupings. The software automatically generates a unique item tag for the instrument. Select Send to Drawing Stockpile or Send to Stockpile from the shortcut menu.

page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). 2. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Click OK. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 179 . you can display it by selecting the instrument or loop and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Click in a checkbox to select and update the instrument associated to the displayed loop. page 83 • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) 1. page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If the Properties window is not visible. Related Topics Generating Reports: An Overview.

• • • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop. select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing. validation automatically creates an instrument item tag.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Remove an Instrument from a Loop 1. First. page 174 180 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the model. In the Properties window. If you remove the loop tag property. too. remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the selection. If the Properties window is not visible. the instrument item tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop. 2. Notes • When an instrument is assigned to a loop. In the drawing. The Delete command is not carried out if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. you can display it by selecting the item and then clicking Edit > Properties.

At label creation time. The following table identifies some of the label properties that are defined during label creation in Catalog Manager. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called driven labels. Nonetheless. Since only the label properties appear when the label is selected. you can place free text in an item note.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Labeling: An Overview Your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a label is the Properties window. Whenever you select a label. the plant administrator can define text content inside the label with the SmartText editor in Catalog Manager. A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. these properties dictate label placement behavior. The same properties appear in the long list of properties when you select the item itself. you cannot edit text such as OLL= on the OLL Elevation Equipment label. By adding or editing text. Break Labeled Item Type Placement Type Leader Line Terminator Type Offset Distance Offset Source Behavior Area Break Title Block Yes 1-Point Flow Arrow Yes 1-Point Component Yes 1. After the creation of a label. you are entering data into the database. these properties perform their function in the background and are invisible to you. the predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the item that it labels. You do not see label properties while using the design software. the software parses the UOM and ignores the double-quotes (or tick marks). When placing a label later. Labels that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. the corresponding labeled properties for its item appear in the Properties window. you have an easier method to find to the label properties. Different labels have different label properties. In other words.or 2-Point Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Yes Fit Graphics to Text Yes SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 181 . Note If you enter text with a recognized unit of measure using a quotes or double-quotes.

component. Afterwards. like 1. Some labels have no symbology associated with them. 182 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing Leader line display. page 211 Placing Labels: An Overview You can place a label in a few basic steps.Point for one-point placement. If you place a leader line with the label. you select the label that you want from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to label. the first click also identifies the end of the leader. that is. Special notes. Not applicable indicates that the property does not apply to that type of label. they contain text only (for example. it would be essentially invisible on the drawing. Yes indicates that the property applies to that type of label. Label properties appear in rows. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the drawing. • • • Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. empty labels display a question mark so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work. page 188 • Place an Annotation. but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet. You use one-point placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the location of the label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. and break) appear in columns. the Short Description label for Equipment). If you place such a label.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Table notes: • The four types of labels (title block. You use two-point placement when you need one click to identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the label. flow arrow. indicate that the property applies under certain conditions. Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label. However. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. First. you cannot change the placement type in the design software. you have an empty label. Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the center of the label.

page 188 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 183 . for example).Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Changing default label formats in Options Manager (for example. the software automatically creates and stores a matching connector in either a plant or project stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. When you recalculate a line. From Drawing 123. for example. changing temperature from K to °C) does not change labels that are already placed in drawings. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. you break the pipe run. In other words. • • • • Related Topics Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. Change units in the SmartText Editor dialog in Catalog Manager to specify a different unit of measure in a label. A label and its assigned leader line follow when you move a line. for example. A line label follows a line when you change its angle. You must replace those labels individually to see the change whether those labels use the plant default setting or have the value set uniquely. the software does not delete the label but repositions it in an associated location on the line. The matching connector receives the value. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. which are defined in Options Manager. the software stops the sharing of data between segments of pipe. All delivered labels use plant default units. where the number corresponds to the drawing. When you place an off-page connector (OPC). After you place the matching connector from the stockpile into the related drawing. changing from horizontal to vertical. When you place a property break label. the software automatically updates the matching connector in the original drawing (To Drawing 122.

page 187 One-Point Label Placement To illustrate placing a label with this placement method. Click the item in the drawing that you want to label. An example of twopoint placement is placing an equipment label on a pump. click again to place the label where you want it in relation to other items in the drawing. If the label is designed for two-point placement. a Cursor Location value of above midpoint. This valve received a label with one-point placement. These properties are set in Catalog Manager during label creation. Notes • Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. • Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement. If the properties of the label require two-point placement. You point to the valve. 2. When you click the valve. Select the label that you want from the Catalog Explorer list view. no leader line. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. You can edit the database properties for the labeled item after you have placed the label.5 inch.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Label from Catalog Explorer 1. An example of onepoint placement is placing an ID label on a valve. and it is highlighted indicating that you can place a label. you must use item placement mode instead of the drag method. you place labels with one-point or two-point placement. and an Offset Source value of local. Properties include an Offset Distance value of . 3. the software places the component label. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. consider placement of a Tag ID label on a valve. 184 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Depending on the definition of the label.

if a label offset is designated for the label during creation in Catalog Manager. page 188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 185 . If the pointer appears above the center (that is. the software uses the default offset distance. The label remains in dynamics (you can move the label to a different location before you place it) so you can confirm correct placement. Pointer position determines if you place the label above or below the component. the software aligns the center of the label at the center of the item receiving the label. designated in Options Manager. The center of the bounding box is (0. the y coordinate is a negative value) you are placing the label below the item. The tolerance for the Select command determines the distance above and below the pipe run. In this example.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The dots on the valve and label are not part of these drawing items. the local origin. A value of Zero offset distance aligns the bounding boxes. The dots represent the center of the bounding box. Offset is always a positive value. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. however. Midpoints align at the y-axis of the local coordinate system of the symbol with the label. This action allows you to place labels on a line and at the center of symbols.0). The property for offset source also affects label placement. the center is the point where the pointer touches the line. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. page 21 • Manipulate a Leader Line. When you point to locations in the drawing and locate a valid target. These midpoints always align when you place a label with one-point placement. For a pipe run. that value overrides the Options Manager setting. If the pointer appears below the center (that is. the label immediately moves to this position. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. the y coordinate is a positive value) you are placing the label above the item. The alignment axis is perpendicular to the line at this point. Label Offset options can be universally applied by inputting a value in the Distances option in Options Manager. If the value for offset source is None. This y-axis alignment line crosses the center of the labeled item. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a One-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. Drag the label to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3. Release the label when the target is highlighted. Tips

When you drag a label over an appropriate target, the target is highlighted.

The pointer position, in relation to the item when you place the label, determines if you place the label above or below the item in the drawing. 4. In the Properties window, select or type values for the properties of the label in the appropriate rows in the table, if needed.

Notes

Title blocks, flow arrows, off-page connectors, and some component labels use one-point placement. A label display always reflects the values of the item with which it is associated. Labels that populate the item values at placement time are called driving labels. In other words, the predefined properties in the label overwrite current item properties when the label is placed. Labels that do not overwrite the item properties are called driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. If you place flow arrow labels on a pipe run, the direction of the arrow changes depending on the flow direction of the pipe run. If the pipe run has no direction defined for it, the direction of the flow arrow label defines the flow direction of the pipe run. You can use the Configuration Tool, or PickQuick, to select the direction of a flow arrow as you place it. If you place an off-page connector on a pipe in the drawing, the software fills in the connector number and automatically adds a second off-page connector to either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place the second connector in a drawing, the software automatically updates the number and name of the drawings in both offpage connectors. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then select Leader line display on the shortcut menu. If the Properties window is not visible, you can display it by selecting a label and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

186 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool, page 146 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Two-Point Label Placement
To illustrate placing a label with this placement method consider placement of an Equipment ID label on a pump. When you point to the pump, it is highlighted, indicating that you can place the label. When you click the pump, the software recognizes the pump as a target for the label. That action is the first point of two-point placement. At the location on the drawing that you want actually to place the label, click again. That action is the second point of two-point placement. After the first click, the pointer changes from a northwest arrow, , to a four-headed arrow, , until you place the label with your second click. During the time between the first and second clicks, the label is attached to the pointer.

This pump received a label by using two-point placement. (1) and (2) illustrate the two pointer positions and clicks required to place this label. Properties include a Rotation value of false and a Leader line value of true. These properties are set through Catalog Manager during label creation. With two-point placement, the software does not use properties for offset distance or pointer location. You can place the first point anywhere on the item to receive the label. The leader line points to this location. Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 187

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Two-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. In the drawing click the item that you want to label. Tip As the pointer passes over an appropriate target item for the label, the software highlights the item. To label the item, click the item when the software highlights it. 3. Click the location in the drawing for the label.

4. Quit label placement mode by pressing Esc. Tip Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. 5. In the Properties window, specify the properties of the label in the appropriate rows.

Tip

If the Properties window is not displayed, you can display it by selecting the label and then clicking Edit > Properties.

Notes

After you place a label, you can move it and manipulate its leader line. For more information, see Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190

Property break labels and various types of component labels require twopoint placement.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a Break Label, page 196 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement, page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Copy Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu. 3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new item by highlighting the item and clicking. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Align Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align. Tip In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing Ctrl and clicking the item. 2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:
• • • • • • •

Align labels so that their bottom lines match Align labels so that their center points agree on a vertical line Align labels so that their center points agree on a horizontal line Align labels so that their left-most lines match Align labels so that their right-most lines match Align labels so that their top lines match

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 189

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Manipulate a Leader Line
1. Display the handles of the leader line by clicking the label that it belongs to. Tip In order to manipulate a leader line, you must display it. Right-click the label and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu. 2. Click a handle and drag the line to a new location.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Update Label Settings
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, double-click UpdateLabelsCmd.dll. Tip

You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

Note

The UpdateLabelsCmd.dll refreshes the value of the currently placed label properties as displayed on the drawing. The command does not update the label based on modifications made to the label using Catalog Manager. To update the label if changes have been made using Catalog Manager, the label must be replaced in the drawing using Edit > Replace.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181

190 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. As defined in Rule Manager, rules apply when you are placing a label. The following four types of labels are Title Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break. Title Block The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information about a drawing. After you select the label in the list view, you can drag it to the location in the drawing where you want to assign the label. You cannot modify label properties for a title block. The different template files, which create new drawing files, contain different title blocks. Therefore, you can automatically place standard title blocks in standard drawings, which are built on standard templates. Or, you can create custom title block labels to fit your custom templates.

Flow Arrow You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction. If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label). As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 191

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior. Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

192 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break. Break labels do not set properties but note that a value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks with one point on the drawing.

You place property break labels, in the Segment Breaks node of Catalog Explorer, with two-point placement. Notes

You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label, you can right-click the label, and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. You can place several break labels at one point, and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 193

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Title Block
1. Find the title block that corresponds to your drawing template in the Catalog Explorer List view. 2. Click the label and position it over the pre-defined title area on the drawing so that the elements of the label fall within the cells of the title area. 3. Click to place the title block. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tips

You can review the properties of the title block label in the Properties window, but for title blocks, you cannot modify those properties. If you want to modify drawing properties, which are displayed in the title block label, you can do so in Drawing Manager. For more information, see Drawing Manager Help. You can move the title block if you need to position it more carefully within the title area of the drawing. For more information, see Move an Item With the Select Tool, page 218.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Place a Flow Arrow
1. Find the flow arrow in the list view of Catalog Explorer and select it. 2. Position your pointer over the process line that you want to label. 3. If a flow direction has not been specified, then choose an orientation for the arrow so that it reflects the correct direction. Tips

If a flow direction has already been specified for the line, then the flow arrow orients itself so that it reflects that property.

If you pause over a line whose flow direction has not been defined, you can use PickQuick to position the flow arrow. 4. Click to place the flow arrow on the process line.

5. Continue placing flow arrows, or click Esc to quit placement mode. Note

You must change the flow direction of a line by changing the property in the Properties window. Do not rotate a flow arrow by using the Rotate command or the rotate handle in order to change the flow direction; flow direction is a property.

194 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

page 188. depending on the label. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. 3. For more information. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. Continue placing the same label or click Esc to quit placement mode. page 191 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 195 . page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. page 186 and Place a Two-Point Label. page 191 Place a Component Label 1. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. 4. Place the label using either one-point or two-point placement methods. choose the label that you want to place. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 182 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. see Place a One-Point Label. Place the pointer over the component that you want to label. 2. From the list view in Catalog Explorer. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview.

You can place several break labels at one point. page 191 196 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or press Esc to quit placement mode. and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. Use care when you assign leader lines. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. and multiple leader lines can be confusing. Continue placing the same break label at other junctions in the drawing. Tip The Catalog Explorer Tree view node where break labels are located is called Segment Breaks. select the break label that you want to place. From the List view in Catalog Explorer. Notes • You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. 2. the second click (2) designates the location for the break label itself. • 3. After you place the label. you can right-click the label. page 313 • Placing Labels: An Overview. Place the break label using two-point placement. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Break Label 1. The first click (1) specifies the junction in the process line.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Label Properties: An Overview
The following label properties are available for specifying your labels.

Labeled Item Type
This property defines the type of item that your label is used with. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you must specify this property; you cannot change it in the design software. The property must be defined correctly to allow you to place labels. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you choose the labeled item type from the Item list in the SmartText Editor. That list is defined in Data Dictionary Manager, where all the valid item types are defined and stored. Examples of labeled item types include pipe run, instrument, piping component, equipment, and so forth. If you specify that the labeled item type is a pipe run, then you can place your label on a pipe run and not on any other type of item in your drawing. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Distance
This property defines the distance from the labeled item to the label. Offset distance applies for labels that are defined with one-point placement. This property also applies for two-point label placement if the property for offset source is set to Local. The property must be defined correctly in Catalog Manager to allow you to place your label. The actual plant-wide offset distance is specified in Options Manager. The software measures the distance from the bounding box of the item to receive the label and the bounding box of the label itself. Consider the offset as the clearance distance between the bounding boxes. Notes

The bounding box in SmartPlant P&ID differs from the SmartSketch definition of range. SmartSketch (A) uses the x-y coordinate range around an item. SmartPlant P&ID (B) uses a rectangular area.

For a line segment, the bounding box is the line itself.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 197

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Source
This property specifies the origin for the offset distance. The possible values for offset sources are None - The label does not have an offset. This value indicates placement at the center of the labeled item. Project Settings - Plant-level parameters determine the offset distance. You can use Options Manager to define the plant settings distance. Local - The label does have an offset, and the value for the Offset Distance property, which is specified in Catalog Manager, defines the offset to use. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the offset source property in the drawing software. Likewise, you set the local offset distance when you create a label, and you cannot change the property in the drawing software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Mirrorable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can mirror the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot create a reverse image. You define this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Disable Flip Text
This value allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would effect the readability of the text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Using Catalog Manager, you can disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed. Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview, page 83

198 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Is Rotatable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can rotate the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot change the angular orientation. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Fit To Text
The value of this property is set to True if the label graphics must fit around the text when you place the label. The value of this property is set to False if the label graphics do not need to fit around text. You can change the designation in Catalog Manager. You can set the value to True only for enclosures that are circles, ellipses, rectangles, or parametrics. You set the Is Fit To Text property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. The following illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to False. The rectangle appears at the same size when you created it:

This illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to True. The rectangle resizes to fit around the text:

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188 • Place an Annotation, page 211

Is Leader Visible
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that the label includes a leader line. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that the label does not include a leader line. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. You can turn on or off the display of the leader line after you place the label.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 199

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note

To turn on or turn off the display of the leader line, right-click the label, and click Leader line display.

Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Label Terminator Styles
The Terminator Style property specifies the terminator, if any, to place at the end of a leader line. Choices include None, Arrow, Solid Dot, and so forth. This property applies only to labels whose value of the Leader Line property is set to True. You specify these properties when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the terminator type property in the design software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

200 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
A connector is not actually a label but more like a component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components are inserted into a line. The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector represents continuation, not connectivity or flow. During document creation, when you place the first connector of the pair, the software places the partner in either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default placement for the partner is into the Stockpile. When you create a connector and place it in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid match. OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this differentiation.

1. The OPC is a to connector if its connected point appears at the finish end of the connector. 2. The OPC is a from connector if its connected point appears at the start end of the connector. In order to switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the correct orientation.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 201

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can delete a connector from the drawing, and the software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner. To delete a connector from a stockpile, both must reside there, and you delete both from a stockpile. After you delete a connector, you cannot reuse the same number. You cannot change the connector number or drawing name in these labels. However, you can change other properties. If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add a partner to a stockpile. The property for drawing name changes to Null or Undefined for the copy. These properties exist for connectors:
• • •

Offset source is set to None. Rotation is set to True. Leader line is set to False.

In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Place an OPC or Utility Connector
1. From the list view in Catalog Explorer or from a stockpile, select the connector that you want to place. Tip In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology (for example, line weight and color) differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. 2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

Tips

You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it, or you can place it at the end of a line that already is drawn. If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

202 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation. 3. Modify the properties of the connector in the Properties window.

Tip

If you placed a new connector from Catalog Explorer, you can display and select the partner in the Engineering Data Editor and modify its properties, too.

Notes

Utility connectors support only one-to-one relationships. In other words, they come in pairs only. When you place a utility connector and its partner goes to a stockpile, that partner connector is of the same type as the first connector you placed. In order to change the partner connector to the other type of utility connector, you must place the partner in its drawing and then replace the symbol. For more information on replacing symbols, see Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

ToFromText Dialog Box (Properties Window)
Opens when you click To / From in the Properties window when an OPC or other connector is selected, and allows you to enter a text value to be displayed in the connector. Click the ellipses to open the ToFromText dialog box. Description - Allows you to enter to or from information for the connector. You can enter drawing names or numbers or other pertinent information about the connected drawing or the direction of flow. Related Topics Properties Window Command, page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties, page 87

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 203

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. Go to the Placement tab. 3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option. Note

If the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option is not selected, the Set Stockpile Location for Partner OPC dialog box appears whenever you place a connector. This dialog box allows you to place each partner OPC in the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Related Topics Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Store a Partner Connector
1. Place a connector in a drawing. 2. On the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box, choose the stockpile in which you want the partner stored. Tip

If you have not deactivated the default storage for connectors, this dialog box does not appear because the partner connector is placed directly into the Stockpile. However, you can change the default storage location. For more information, see Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204

Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move a Connector to Another Stockpile
1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select the connector that you want to move. 2. On the Engineering Data Editor toolbar, click File > Move to Different Stockpile. Tip

If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for, then the Move to Different Stockpile command is not available. That is, you cannot move a connector that belongs to a different drawing, for instance.

204 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview 3. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box, select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing, you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. 4. In the Drawing list area, select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to.

Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Move Partner OPC Opens the Move Partner OPC dialog box, from which you can move the selected connector to the stockpile of any drawing in the active plant. This command is available only when the partner connector is located in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Dialog Box
Opens when you click Move Partner OPC on the Connector shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to move a partner connector from the Stockpile into the stockpile of a specific drawing, or vice versa. Plant Hierarchy - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in Drawing list. Drawing list - Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Related Topics Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Move Partner OPC Command, page 205

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 205

In the Drawing view. 2. you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. page 204. select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to. In the Drawing list area. Tip If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. page 201 206 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is not available if the partner connector is not located in the drawing stockpile. right-click the connector whose partner you want to move. On the Move Partner OPC dialog box. From the shortcut menu. click Move Partner OPC. 4. 3. see Open a Continuation Drawing. For more information about opening the partner drawing. you can use the Open Partner Drawing command on the shortcut menu to open the other drawing and move the connector from its stockpile. you can move it from there. • Note • If the partner connector is in a stockpile and is displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. However. if the partner connector belongs to another drawing. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. then the Move Partner OPC command is not available. page 207.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile 1. you cannot move it. page 201 Open Continuation Drawing Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Open Continuation Drawing Opens the connected drawing when the partner of the selected off-page or utility connector is in a drawing or a drawing stockpile. for instance. That is. select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Related Topics • Open a Continuation Drawing. • Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information. see Move a Connector to Another Stockpile.

click Delete From Model. the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile. 2. if you are deleting a connector. page 201 Delete a Connector From the Model 1. From the shortcut menu. If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it completely from the database. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. Notes • Unlike the standard Delete command. Tips • This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector is stored in the Stockpile. 2. Select the OPC or utility connector whose connected drawing you want to open. page 201 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 207 . 3. click Open Continuation Drawing. then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. which moves the selected item to the Stockpile. click Delete on the shortcut menu. In the case of the connector. Right-click the connector. page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. From the shortcut menu.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Open a Continuation Drawing 1. Related Topics • Open Continuation Drawing Command. this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. • Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model. page 201 Delete From Model Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database. • Note • The selected connector and its partner in the Stockpile are removed from the model. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview.

and vessels). instruments. This project disregards all other item types. but can be generated automatically. This project generates unique Item Tag values and maintains consistency between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation. Instrument Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix (Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag Sequence Number) Loop Tag Suffix(Tag Suffix) Instrument Loop Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Pipe Run Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code (Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid Code) 208 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . mechanical equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Calling Item Tag Validation The ItemTag project performs calculations and validations for unique tag checking. equipment components. pipe runs. and tag reformatting. Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value is added or modified. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any of the items shown in the tables below. The ItemTag project deals specifically with the following item types: instrument loops. Legend Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness. and so forth). signal runs with a plant item type pipe run (hydraulic. connect to process. and equipment (other equipment. exchangers. and the database tables and column names where modifications trigger calculation and validation. The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag project. automatic tag generation. Bold Italics: Required for the item tag.

page 13 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. and Item Tag properties for instruments are not read-only so that implied instruments can have item tags that are assigned manually. including item tag formats. • • Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. For information on customizing the software. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 209 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Equipment Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Equipment Component Item Tag Structure Format Nozzle Item Tag Structure Item Tag Signal Runs (Plant Item Type Pipe Run) Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag Suffix Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Notes • To refresh the instrument loop tag suffix in the Properties window. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide or click Related Topics. page 178 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 268 • Review and Edit Item Properties. clear the selection of the instrument and then select it again. Item Tag cells for these item types are read-only except for those of signal runs.

When you place an annotation. notes. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. however. and other information to your drawing. Note • Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. Opening and saving a . often you can resize them to fit your needs. Because annotations are frequently parametric. on a drawing. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. Annotations include everything from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines. Item note Related Topics • Place a Revision Cloud. you can then place a label on the item note. These labels allow you to enter the remarks. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node.pid file in SmartSketch can corrupt the file. Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. and other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings. and it looks like this: 1. Caution • You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding dumb graphics to the drawing. remarks. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously inserted into a drawing using primitive commands.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview Annotations are model items used to add notes. It is called Item Note & Label. page 214 • Place an Annotation. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. page 211 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which has an item type of item note. making the drawing unusable. Annotation point 2.

Tip • You can also assign text to the graphic in the Note Text property box for the graphic. Click to place the annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing. it automatically displays that text. To add text to the annotation. 4. Annotation point 2. The symbol is called Item Note & Label. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Annotation 1. page 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 211 . page 188 and Place a One-Point Label. and it looks like this: • 1. see Place a Two-Point Label. 5. In the Catalog Explorer list view. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. as in the procedure above. Press Esc to quit placement mode. 2. select the annotation that you want to place from the Graphics folder. Assign text to the annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties window. Item note Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview. however. For more information. 3. see Scale a Parametric Item. and when you add a label. For more information. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. page 239. place a design label on the annotation. page 186. page 182 • Using Annotations: An Overview. Note • You can resize annotations by dragging their parametric handles. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it.

page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. you can designate a portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By Owner. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. 5. You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area break. specify the properties for the select set. In the Properties window. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area break applies. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. For example. including the area break shape itself. Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point and then clicking for each vertex of the shape. You can place area breaks that do not have common properties within or overlapping other area breaks. Notes • • An area break is a logical grouping of design items. Tips • You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the Drawing view. • 4. for a group of items. 2. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Area Break 1. 3. page 83 212 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the outside area. like fencing items with the Select Tool.

• Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Moving the package itself to another stockpile has special limitations. Press Esc to quit placement mode. If the Properties window is not visible. 7. select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. 6. select items to be part of the package. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. whichever is appropriate. Tip • Some catalog items do not possess the Pkg Item Tag property. Select the package in the stockpile. 2. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 213 . page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. From the shortcut menu. 4. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. In the Properties window. Do not include those items in your select set because the package item tag does not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does not possess that property. 8. Notes • Packages normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. click in the Pkg Item Tag box and select the appropriate value displayed list. In the Properties window. In the Drawing view. In the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Package 1. 5. choose Select Set from the Properties box. enter a value for the Item Tag property. 3. page 265.

select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud nodes. 4.Small. the line width and line style using the Symbology option in Options Manager. Related Topics • Using Annotations: An Overview. 3. 5.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Revision Cloud 1. Notes • You can change the symbology. Right-click to complete the revision cloud. 2.Large or Cloud . In a clockwise direction. continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud. Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud . page 210 214 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Using the Catalog Explorer tree. Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area.

you can modify the items in several ways. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside a piece of equipment. it disappears from the drawing completely. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them. If the Properties window is not open. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. The fluid code list displays only codes beginning with the first letter of any previously selected fluid code for that line. For example. Many items are now scalable. If the plant model requires the deleted item. you can mirror and rotate most items. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values. and can be resized by using their scale handles. If you want to change the orientation of items. such as angles between elements of the symbol. limits exist for possible placements. If the plant model does not require the item. such as the length of its sides. you can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. Resizing parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item. you can delete the item. delete the property for the fluid system. while it allows modification of other characteristics of the item. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using the Delete from Model command. You can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy. Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing. and then the complete list of fluid code values appears. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties. If you want to remove an item from a drawing. You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles. Obviously. as well as as you place them. and you can only move these inside the equipment. you select a fluid code from the select list.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview After you place items in a drawing. too. Also you can edit some item properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. You can select a entire row by clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the properties in the Properties window and editing them there. the item appears in the stockpile for later placement. Notes • When modifying the fluid code properties of a line. You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing individual properties in the Properties window. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 215 .

page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. page 219 • Review and Edit Item Properties. This definition of an action holds true for select sets. page 241 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. page 223 • Move an Item Using the Move Button. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the following actions: • Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog box Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View > Show Inconsistencies Add a filter tab to the Drawing view Click File > Save Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE) Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu. and for multiple items selected in the EDE. The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. Modifying item properties is an action. page 217 216 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . however. move a connector to another drawing stockpile Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects • • • • • • • An undoable action is defined in several ways. Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list. That is. and you can undo them by repeated use of the Undo command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 239 Undo Command Edit > Undo Allows you to reject the last action that you completed. Running a command is usually an action. page 87 • Scale a Drawing Item. and the action ends when another item is selected. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. not one action for each member of the set. page 215 • Undo Your Last Action. too. modifying the properties of a select set is one action in and of itself.

the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. and you can move select sets. Note • • The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. When you finish manipulating the view. however. For example. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. If the Undo button is not available. You can use other view manipulation commands. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. Notes • If you want to move an item to another drawing. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. move it to the Stockpile. and you can no longer undo your last action. while you are using the Move command. Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. then the undo list has been cleared. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main toolbar. and Pan. The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command available repeatedly.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Undo Your Last Action Click Undo Tips • • . page 216 Move Command Edit > Move Moves items from one location to another. Fit. page 144 • Undo Command. the owned items move also. If you move an item that owns other items. open the second drawing and place the item from the stockpile. • • Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. page 219 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 217 . You can move one or multiple items at a time. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. such as Zoom.

3. Drag the item to its new position. Y . Tip The pointer snaps to the keypoint thereby making it easier for you to control the exact locus of the move. 2.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the distance in discrete steps. page 219 • Move Command. Position the pointer over the item that you want to move. page 217 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. at a location where the software recognizes a keypoint . On the main toolbar.Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes. typing a step value of 0. For example. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Drag the item to its new position. click the Select Tool . click Select Tool. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item. X . Step Distance .Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate. from 0. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate. 2.Copies the items in the select set when you move them. 0. page 144 218 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .5. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. and so forth.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move Ribbon Specifies the from point and to point when you move items. • Move an item with precision 1.25 to 0. On the main toolbar. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. page 144 Move an Item With the Select Tool 1. Copy . Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button.75. Tip Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it. 3.

If you want to copy the items. 4. and place the item from the stockpile. You can drag an item without using Move. 2. Tip • . You can use the Move ribbon to specify the to point. and you must click in the appropriate portion of the drawing to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the item or items. Select one or more items. If you want to move an item to another drawing. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. move it to the Stockpile. Click to define the to point. Click to define the from point. page 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 219 . press Ctrl while you drag. while you are using the Move command. For example. Notes • If you move an item that owns other items. such as Zoom. • • • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. You can use other view manipulation commands. press Ctrl when you place the item. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. and Pan.and y-axis. open the second drawing. click Move 3. If you want to copy the item. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. When you finish manipulating the view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move an Item Using the Move Button 1. the owned items move also. Select the item and then drag it to its new location. On the main toolbar. Fit. The values are relative distances along the x.

press Shift as you move the line. page 156 220 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the Drawing view. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Point near the center of the appropriate line. drag the segment to the new The software applies geometrical line routing rules as you move a line. the software changes the length of attached line segments to accommodate the move. If you want to override those rules. page 221 • Routing Lines: An Overview. 2. or press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then selecting or typing the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. • • • Related Topics • Move a Line Using Vertex Handles.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line 1. When you move a line segment. When the pointer turns into a double arrow location and release. select the line that you want to move. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. If the Properties window is not open. 3. Notes • .

page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 221 . If the Properties window is not open. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then specifying the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line Using Vertex Handles 1. 2. Notes • While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow the line segments to move freely at any angle. Click an existing line in the drawing. Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. 3. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release.

The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. these labels are automatically added to the select set. or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in the select set. equipment component. If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select set. If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle. or item note) in the select set. Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set. The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the selected items are appropriate items to move. These conditions must be met in order for this command to be available: • The source and destination drawing must be open. page 223 • 222 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . that label is removed. actuator. actuator. these objects are automatically added to the select set. You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. • • • If more than one possible destination drawing is open. If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle. Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. equipment component. and if the parent object that it is dependent upon is not in the select set. The command removes these objects from the select set: • • • Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set. and you can select the appropriate destination drawing. • OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. it is removed. the Move To Drawing dialog box appears. page 215 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. • The command expands the select set to include the following objects: • If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the select set.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Command Edit > Move To Drawing Allows you to move a select set of drawing items into another open drawing. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected.

then select the desired destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing dialog box. Then. The Move to Drawing dialog box displays. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 223 . 5. page 223 • Move To Drawing Command. Tips • For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. 3. page 222 Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing 1. click Edit > Move To Drawing and click in the drawing to define the Select from point. and open assemblies.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to choose the destination drawing that you want to place a item(s) into. • 6. click the to point. Select the drawing and click OK. Related Topics • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Those drawings that are not included in the list are the source drawing. open read-only drawings. If more than one possible destination drawing is open. the from point becomes the origin of the select set. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. 4. This dialog box displays only when you have more than one possible destination drawing open. open drawing templates. While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing). Click Edit > Move To Drawing. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open. In the Drawing view of the destination drawing. click the from point. the following conditions must be met: The source and destination drawing must be open. Available drawings . 2. the pointer is a crosshair. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing. Notes • In order for the Move To Drawing command to be available.Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination for the Move To Drawing command. In the Drawing view. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved to. You must also have the item(s) selected that you want to move.

loop or package relationships or plant group relationships). page 215 224 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Logical relationships are preserved (for example. Also. the Undo command is not available for moving a select set to another drawing. whose members are all moved to the new drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. • • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Since you have to switch to a different drawing. if a logical group such as an instrument loop. resides in the source drawing stockpile. OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. then that logical group moves to the stockpile of the destination drawing.

page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your drawing. page 226 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. the selected items are added to a select set. The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor. which allows you to search a drawing for items by using catalog items or a filter or to find inconsistencies in your drawing. Or. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. they are added to a select set. page 231 Find Command Edit > Find Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items. You can replace items by using the options on this dialog box. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can review and correct inconsistencies systematically. you can define criteria based on a delivered filter or on a user-defined filter. and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them if appropriate. replace many items one-by-one. too. page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item. Replacing drawing items is straightforward. Having found all drawing items of a certain type. or even replace all items of one type at the same time. You have the capability to replace a single drawing item with a comparable item. As drawing items are found. When you find or replace drawing items. You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type already in place in your drawing. Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. too. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. you can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a compatible type. page 225 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 225 .

4. Select an option from the Search in list. 5.. Leave the Consistency Check dialog box open. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. select a filter to locate your drawing items. 2. 4. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. Click Edit > Find. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box. and click Find on the Find and Replace dialog box to display information on the next drawing inconsistency. page 225 Find an Item by Using a Filter 1. select <Filter.. select <Inconsistency> from the Find what list. Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when an inconsistency is selected. Notes • For detailed information about all your drawing inconsistencies one-byone. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Click Find to select the first inconsistency. Click Edit > Find. Click Find to search for and select the next item match in your drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing items that meet the selected filter. page 313 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. • 5. On the Find and Replace dialog box. • 226 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. Continue clicking Find to advance through the drawing inconsistencies.> from the Find what list. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. Choose an option from the Search in list.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Find Drawing Inconsistencies 1. right-click the selected inconsistency and click Properties. 3. and click OK.

• Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. • Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Select an option from Search in. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. 5. Click Edit > Find 2. All the items are in the select set. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. and you can view the common properties of the set in the Properties window. and click OK. select the catalog item type to search for. 4. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Click Find to select the first match in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. page 225 Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item 1. page 225 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 227 . Use the Direction options to change the order in which single drawing items are found. select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item
1. Select an item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Find. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select an option from the Search in list. Tips

On the dialog box, the Find what option is automatically defined according to the drawing item you selected in the first step.

Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 4. Click Find to search for and select the next matching item in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing.

Notes

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Replace Command
Edit > Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box, which allows you to replace some or all of the drawing items that match the search criteria defined by the options on the Find tab. Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

228 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace a Single Drawing Item
1. Select an existing item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Replace. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 4. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the catalog item to replace the selected drawing item, and click OK. 5. Choose an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 6. Click Find to search for and select the first matching drawing item. If the selected item can be replaced with the item specified in Replace with, the Replace command is available.

7. Click Replace to replace the selected drawing item and to find and select the next matching item. Tip

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item specified in the Replace with box.

Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is replaced.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 229

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Filter> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box, choose the filter that you want to use to find drawing items, and click OK. 4. Select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, choose the catalog item that you want to replace the drawing items you find with your filter, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to make the Replace All button available.

8. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item defined in the Replace with box. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231

230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type from the catalog that you want to find in your drawing, and click OK. 4. On the Replace with list select <Browse>. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type that you want to replace the found item type with, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to enable the Replace All command.

8. Click Replace All to find and replace all matching items. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 231

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Mode Command
Tools > Replace Mode Controls whether catalog items are placed as substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active, the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item. When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. The replace mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box. The Replace Mode command copies properties of the current item onto the new item. You cannot use the replace mode for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233

232 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode
1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar. 2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing. Tip You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. 3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Tips

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace is displayed, and the drawing item is selected. icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the

4. When the replace icon selected catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press Esc to quit placement mode. 6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off. Notes

You cannot use the Replace Mode option for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. The Replace Mode command also copies properties of the current item onto the new item.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 233

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find and Replace Dialog Box
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This dialog box opens when you click either Edit > Find or Edit > Replace. Depending on your command choice, you access one of the following tabs. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228

Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Allows you to search the drawing for specified items. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. 234 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter, page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item, page 228 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace Command, page 228

Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This tab is on the Find and Replace dialog box. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with option is not available. Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 235

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. As each drawing item is found, the active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated depending on the Scroll mode setting. Related Topics Find Command, page 68 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

236 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. Tree View . Using this dialog box. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. This dialog box is constructed much the same as the Catalog Explorer window. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. click the plus sign to the left of the node name. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 237 . If the selected node contains any drawing symbols.Allows you to see and use Catalog Explorer shortcut buttons to navigate to catalog items more quickly. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. click the minus sign to the left of the node name. • • New .Displays the symbols that are associated with the active node in the tree view. depending on your selection in the filter list. If you create a compound filter. the software displays them in the list view. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. You can navigate through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. To close a node. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. List View . Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. to choose item types for tables. Navigation Bar . To open a node.Displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. Properties . page 230 • Select Catalog Item Dialog Box Allows you to select a catalog item type for the search criteria when you use the Find or Replace commands. Only the contents of one node appear. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter.Displays the New Filter dialog box. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters.

You can scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. left center. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the appropriate direction. • The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate the item correctly. Items can have several different types of component handles. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item correctly. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. or scaled. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to an item. and right center of the range of an item. A scalable symbol displays four solid square scale handles. The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin. rotated. and the symbol scales either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle. • • • Not all drawing items in can be mirrored. bottom center.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. 238 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 226 • Replace Command. Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items. Note also that select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing. You can drag any one of the handles. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes. defined in relation to the origin of the item. page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly. page 228 • Find Command. Catalog Manager defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created. The Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top center. page 228 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component handles.

2. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. 2. Tips • A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles . Drag one of the parametric handles change the size of the item. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. Note • Certain properties of the parametric item. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 215 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 239 . in the middle of each side of the item to 3. such as angle values. page 239 Scale a Parametric Item 1. Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize. page 241 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. Select your scalable item in the Drawing view. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. remain the same when you resize it. page 215 Scale a Drawing Item 1. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol to True in Catalog Manager. page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. page 244 • Scale a Drawing Item. depending on the direction that you drag the handle. Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.

Position Angle . Setting the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen. or mirror and copy. The origin of the angle measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. pause over an option and read the ToolTip. The software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. dragging a mirror handle across an x. Note • To determine the option name on the ribbon.Copies the item or items when you mirror them. page 241 • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element.or y-axis causes the item to appear mirrored about its center. To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis.Sets the angle of the mirror axis. and allows you to either specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options. You can also use mirror handles. Copy . You can mirror the item itself. page 240 240 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror Command Edit > Mirror Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. For example. click Mirror on the main toolbar. Related Topics • Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define. and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom. or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position. 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left. 90 extends the axis vertically to the top. The mirror handle appears at the upper right of the item. Mirroring is displayed dynamically so that you can see the result of your action before you release the item to place it. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 241 • Mirror Command. You can mirror without copying. Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 241 Mirror Ribbon Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active.

while you are using the Mirror command. When you finish manipulating the view. you can use the Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon. Select an item in the drawing. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle 1. Select one or more items. then use Rotate or Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. page 215 Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define 1. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items dynamically (that is. and then click. Notes • Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically. You can use other view manipulation commands. 2. as you move your pointer). Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing or by clicking a keypoint . Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. 2. page 253 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. 3. On the main toolbar. 4. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 241 . Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. the software returns you to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. such as Zoom and Pan. Click the mirror handle or click Mirror on the main toolbar. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. hold Ctrl when you click to place your items. click Mirror .

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element 1. Angles are always displayed as a positive value. For example. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new position. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation. the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. 4. you can use Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. that is. The mirrored items are displayed dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis. By dragging the pointer over the item. Second Click . • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation.Defines the rotation handle. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. When you finish manipulating the view. if the box is set to 30. while you are using Mirror. On the main toolbar. click Mirror . To rotate and item. locate a mirror axis. 2.Defines the rotation point. you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing. such as Zoom and Pan. To define the rotation axis. Notes • You can use other view manipulation commands. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. and then click. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. First Click . it can take on any value. Select one or more items. the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. select the item and then click Rotate. you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon.0. page 215 Rotate Command Edit > Rotate Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. 242 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . hold down Ctrl when you click to place your items. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments of the rotation. 3.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item. Also, you can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle . Keeping the rotate component handle close to the center of an item causes the item to rotate at 90 degree increments. Dragging the rotate component handle further away from the center of the item causes the item to rotate at smaller angles. The angle increments become smaller the farther away your pointer is from the center of rotation. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options. Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating. Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 243

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated item. The value is always positive. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244 • Rotate Command, page 242

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle
1. Select an item in the drawing. 2. Click the rotate handle . 3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item. Notes

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to change the step angle for the rotation. You can rotate items using the Rotate button on the main toolbar, too.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define
1. Select one or more items. 2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate 3. Click at the center of rotation. 4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis. Tip The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point. 5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

.

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

244 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate ribbon. In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main toolbar or by pressing Delete on the keyboard. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. The data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item, it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. Notes

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 245

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing, page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model, page 251

Cut Command
Edit > Cut Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items replace the previous contents of the Clipboard. When you cut items, they go to the Stockpile, given appropriate stockpile settings. Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cut an Item from the Drawing
1. Select the item. 2. Click Cut Notes

.

After you cut an item and its associated properties, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste or Paste Special to paste the item and its properties into the current drawing or into other drawings or documents. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

246 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview, page 273 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

Paste Command
Edit > Paste Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location that the items occupied in the source document or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Paste an Item With a Different Format, page 280 • Paste an Item, page 247

Paste an Item
1. Open the drawing in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the main toolbar, click Paste then select Paste. Notes

or right-click a blank area in the drawing and

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Copy or Cut command again. Equipment components cannot be pasted back into the drawing after they have been removed using the Cut command. You cannot paste items if the Clipboard is empty (that is, if you have not previously used the Copy or Cut commands). Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste command.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 247

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Select All Command
Edit > Select All Selects all visible items in a view. Note

You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a drawing or table, too. On the shortcut menu click Select All.

Related Topics • Select an Item, page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Modify an Item With the Select Tool
1. Click the Select Tool 2. Select an item. 3. Position the pointer over one of the item handles. 4. Drag the item handle to modify the item. For example, you can rotate an item with its rotate handle, mirror an item with its mirror handle, scale an item with its scale handle, or resize an item with its parametric handle. Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview, page 238 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144 .

Delete Command
Edit > Delete Removes the selected item. You cannot paste items that you delete; however, if the item moves to the Stockpile on deletion, then you can place that item again from the stockpile. Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.

248 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Also, you can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items in a fence from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Delete an Item from the Drawing
1. Select an item. Tip To delete a large group of similar items, use a filter to display items to delete, then select the items displayed by your filter. For more information on using display filters, see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View, page 138. 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.

Tip

When you use the Delete key on the keyboard to remove an item or items from the drawing, you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view.

Notes

If you want to delete the item, its location in the drawing, and its properties in the database, right-click the item and select Delete From Model from the shortcut menu. The item is not placed in the stockpile regardless of its settings or properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 249

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Remove an Item from a Drawing
1. Right-click the item that you want to remove. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete. Tips

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing, too. First, select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must place the pointer in the Drawing view and press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Or you can select Edit > Delete on the main menu bar after you select the items. You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor.

Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. For more information on deleting items from the model, see Remove an Item from the Model, page 251. When you delete inline components, the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. A stockpile item that is deleted automatically goes to the Stockpile. You can move it to a drawing stockpile from the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

250 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Delete From Model Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database; if you are deleting a connector, then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Notes

Unlike the standard Delete command, which moves the selected item to the Stockpile, this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. In the case of the connector, the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model, page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Remove an Item from the Model
1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to display the shortcut menu. Tips

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile, and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the database.

Notes

You can only remove items from the plant model that do not share a relationship with another drawing. You can permanently remove items that are not flagged as required for the model by selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 251

However. the data associated with the item remains in the database. page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. which you set in Options Manager. page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. When you delete inline components. and is included in the StockpileItems group. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. If the TagReqdFlag property is False. which you set in Catalog Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 265. cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. page 250 252 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True. the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Pant Stockpile.

Select an item.too. This command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. To see the pasted item. Then you can use Paste to place it on the current drawing. page 245 Copy an Item 1. After you copy an item. page 254 • Copy an Item. You can copy an item with the Move command. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 253 . it is placed on the Clipboard. page 244 Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies selected items to the Clipboard. and press Ctrl as you place the item in the drawing. mirror. 2. Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new location. page 254 • Copy an Item. Several methods exist for doing this. such as using the Copy button on the main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move. or rotate a drawing item. page 280 • Paste an Item. for instance. page 253 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. page 253 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. without removing the current item from the drawing. click Move on the toolbar. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. the software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. Select the item. click Copy Notes • . just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from Catalog Explorer. When you paste the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Copying Items: An Overview Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a starting point for placing a new item. drag it to its new location in the drawing. page 247 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment. On the main toolbar. You can do the same with a select set.

but not over any of the handles of the item. page 256 • Customize the Properties Window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. 3. Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location. page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Placement rules are in effect. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. Once the items are selected in the drawing. Selecting Connected Items: An Overview You can use the Select Connected Items command to navigate the line connectivity from a selected line segment to add components and other runs to a select set based on matching properties. Position the pointer over the item. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the Properties window and continuing editing properties for not only runs. page 273 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. for example. In cases where you want the software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line. a nozzle. this command makes it possible to accomplish that goal. but also lines and networks and all runs included in the drawing. page 147 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. page 144 Copy an Item With the Select Tool 1. Click Select Tool 2. page 144 on the main toolbar. This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and components on an entire drawing that have a common property value. Note • The properties that define a run are specified in Options Manager. and so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item. page 86 • Select an Item. Select an item.

and the Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open drawing.Provides options for defining the extent of your select set. Notes • The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected. The default value for this list is Line. Scope . is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected. Scope List . which allows you to create a select set that includes the active line and disconnected lines and inline components in any network. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 255 . once the dialog box is open. Drawing. Line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Connected Items Command Edit > Select Connected Items Opens the Select Connected Items dialog box. which appears both on the Edit menu and on the Line Shortcut menu. and you can highlight items in the drawing and manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active. Include Runs . that is. The Network option adds branches. page 256 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.Allows you to choose from Run. The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points. even if there are breaks in a network. Related Topics Create a Select Set From a Line. page 144 • Select Connected Items Dialog Box Allows you to construct a select set from lines and inline components. This dialog box remains open until you dismiss it. Include Components . you can change the selected item in the drawing and change the scope of the select set freely. The Scope List allows you to choose extent. This command is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected on the drawing. and the Include Runs and Include Components buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. Network.Adds inline components into the select set. however. The Select Connected Items command.Incorporates lines into the select set. page 148 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. including components. page 254 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. one or the other or both is always active. At no time can neither the Include Runs nor Include Components buttons be selected.

Properties List . page 255 Create a Select Set From a Line 1.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines. • 256 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Tips • You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property value. too. 3.Displays options for defining the select set according to common properties. You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion. If you want to construct a select set based on common properties. The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by default. By default the properties are displayed categorically. 2. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. too.Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box. 4. Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing. Tip The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select Connected Items dialog box. At any time. Click Edit > Select Connected Items. page 147 • Select Connected Items Command. you can change the scope of the select set by changing the display in the Scope list. by using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons. page 256 • Select an Item. select those properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog box. 5. Categorized . Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Matching Properties .Lists properties in alphabetical order. Alphabetic . You can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. 6. Preview . On the Select Connected Items dialog box. but the display of the Properties window itself is not updated until you click OK. you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box.Allows you to choose common properties for your select set.

Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching criteria chosen in the previous step.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If no properties are displayed in the dialog box. click OK. For more information. and the original item is selected in the drawing. Related Topics • Select an Item. page 86. 9. page 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 257 . the Select Connected Items dialog box closes. The matching items are highlighted in the Drawing view. Notes • If you click Cancel. 7. Once you have selected the items you want for your select set. see Customize the Properties Window. select a line segment or component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you are interested in. Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common properties for the select set. page 147 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. The selected items are centered in the Drawing view. • 8.

items that belong to another drawing cannot be edited. run reports that display the items and their properties. for instance. In the Engineering Data Editor. cut. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor of the drawing data and edit properties in the cells of the table.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying Item Properties: An Overview When you use the design software to produce drawings. page 329 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. or create filters and control Drawing views so that only items with specified properties are displayed. Once you have populated the properties of an item you can. page 248 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. with the same restriction. page 54 • Paste Bulk Properties. or label items so that their properties are displayed graphically. In the Properties window you are also constrained to edit only those properties that are not read-only. page 88 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. page 89 • Review and Edit Item Properties. it is important to be able to specify and change the properties of the items that you place in your diagram. page 87 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. too. you can copy. and paste properties. You can review and edit the properties of an item in the Properties window. page 83 258 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation.

extension. formatted like this: http://www.com. page 87 Hold Status Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Hold Text calculation button text value.intergraph.intergraph.Allows you to type a description for the item. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in labels.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Description Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Description property in the Properties window. This box can contain a link to a Web address. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.com. This box can contain a link to a Web address. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. allowing you to enter long text descriptions for items. and allows you to enter a Description . You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. reports. Description .Allows you to type a description for the item.extension. formatted like this http://www. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 259 . and so forth.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety. All .Lists all the insulation specifications in the plant insulation specification file. Related Topics • Assign an Insulation Specification. Any modifications to insulation specifications are carried out in Insulation Specification Manager. You can choose a specification from either of the following lists. Note • The path to the plant insulation specification file is defined in Options Manager. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 261 260 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 87 Insulation Spec Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses for the Insulation Spec property in the Properties window. Related Topics • Properties Window Command.Lists all insulation specifications that match any already chosen values. allowing you to specify an insulation specification for the selected item or items. such as Insulation Type or Insulation Purpose. Matching .

you can choose a specification from the All list.extension. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.intergraph. then the Matching list contains only those insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 261 .com. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in design labels. or purpose. This box can contain a link to a Web address. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. 2. 3. choose a specification from either the Matching or the All lists.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign an Insulation Specification 1. formatted like this: http://www. page 144 Note Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Note Text calculation button and allows you to enter a text value in an item note. Select the item that you want to add an insulation specification to. On the InsulationSpec dialog box. 4. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Tip • If you have already specified other insulation properties. such as the insulation temperature. type. Description . Note • If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties.Allows you to type a description for the item. Click the Insulation Spec property box in the Properties window. nonetheless. in the Properties window. Click the Calculation button . Related Topics • Properties Window Command. page 258 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted.

Specifies the file from which stream data is imported.Allows you to type a description for the item. page 87 Stream Number Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Stream Number property in the Properties window. Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety. Stream ID List . page 267 • 262 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .intergraph.extension. This box can contain a link to a Web address.Lists the values found in the text file specified in the File Name box. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. You can click Browse to find the file on your computer or the network. Related Topics Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. formatted like this: http://www.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Revision Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Revision Text calculation button enter a text value. allowing you to specify the stream number for your pipe run. Browse . and allows you to Description . Stream data is generally imported from an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. page 175 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Allows you to search for a file on your computer or network. File Name . You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.com. Related Topics • Place an Inline Instrument.

or drawing stockpiles) from one stockpile to another. page 154 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Be sure that the other item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is. page 265 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. or click Active Drawing Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. In particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile. which opens when you right-click in the EDE. too. or you can place them in a drawing or delete them from the model altogether. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open drawing. You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor shortcut menu.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Stockpile. page 264 • Place Multiple Representations. You can import items into the Stockpile. which belongs to the Plant or the active project. the Stockpile menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile items. the Active Drawing or Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items alone. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 263 . You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE. In the EDE. by importing reports with the File > Import > Data File command on the main toolbar. You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE).

List view . you can use the Configuration tool to select the appropriate placement for the item. not a drawing item. • • Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. and then clicking Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Tree view . page 149. page 146 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 2.Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile item. click the icon in the left most column for the stockpile item that you want to place. For more information. Click the appropriate position in the drawing for the item. page 204 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. You can move your selected stockpile item into the drawing stockpile of another drawing. page 265 Place an Item from the Stockpile 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor and select Move to Different Stockpile. page 38 264 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can enter values for properties of the placed item by selecting the item. • Notes • If the item you place has multiple orientations in relation to other items. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. In the Engineering Data Editor. You cannot use Replace Mode mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile.Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item.

packages. • • • Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager. Valid reports are Equipment List. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special limitations: From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile . Also. and Pipe Run List. choose a drawing from the list and click OK. From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile . From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile . select Move to Different Stockpile. safety classes. 2. you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the database. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box. right-click the icon of the stockpile item that you want to move. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 265 . From the shortcut menu. this action is allowed. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. such as instrument loops. • 3. The property values for the items are updated.Same constraint as above applies. page 38 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the stockpile. This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet exist in the database. Note • Plant item groups. add or edit property values for the items returned in the report. and then import the items back into the drawing. and so forth. Equipment Nozzle List. not a drawing item. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key information that is necessary for importing this information.No constraints apply. frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. You must first run the report. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor.If the plant item group contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain items in any drawing. In the left-most column of the Engineering Data Editor. This action can occur at anytime.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing 1.

For examples of importing pumps into the database using the Equipment List. page 334 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. even for select-listed values. Indicates the beginning of the list of properties to be imported for the item type Imported property for the item type: AttributeName Derived from the Data Dictionary Manager property name. and must be a valid format. click Related Topics. </Identification> <ContextSpecificIdentifier ContextId <Item Attributes> <Item Attribute> Notes • The log file for import activities is called SPImport. Attribute Value .must be one of the properties listed. page 329 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. page 267 266 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Specify if the property has units of measure. and must have corresponding </Items> tag Defines Classification and Symbol File: Classification .Database Item Type. not the display name. ITEMTAG .log and is saved to your local Temp directory. not the index number. and must be in double quotes.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview XML Tags and Descriptions Tag <?xml version="1.Path to symbol to be created in stockpile Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID. Symbol File . • Related Topics • Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. and specify the actual value. page 67 • Generate a Report.Must be in double quotes.0"?> <Preamble> <Items> Description Identifies the XML file and the version used Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID Indicates beginning of the list of all item types and properties to be imported. AttributeUnits . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet.

On the Import Log dialog box. Tips • The status bar at the bottom of the SmartPlant P&ID window displays the progress of the import activity. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID. Equipment. select it. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or modification of properties. too. Notes • Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. Pipe Run List. or you can click Close. Previously imported items. • • • • Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. Pumps. All three reports. these reports can create occurrences of items in the stockpile. • Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet 1. are updated with data from the newly imported file. 2. Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily updated by re-importing a data file. and Heat Exchanger Equipment. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet. and Equipment Nozzle List Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the drawing. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports. 3. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. you can click Report in order to open the log file and view notes on the import process. you must make modifications the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the software. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. You can use the Equipment List. In addition. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 267 . and Exchangers. and click Open. Click File > Import > Data File. Pump Equipment List. See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more information on import code and other importing parameters.

In this example. see Generate a Report. Z. respectively. Click Open.fluid code.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile 1. then clicking Format > Column > Unhide. 6. click File > Import > Data file. 2. In SmartPlant P&ID. but you must be careful with row copy and paste because the layout is a little different. Notes • Importing new pipe runs using the Pipe Run List report is a little different because it also includes SP_ID and Fluid Code columns. 7. respectively. Click File > Save. • Related Topics • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data.tag sequence number . page 334. 8. The path name of the associated symbol is available in column T. 3. change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example. 101. these should be updated to P. Columns Y. The delivered Item Tag format for pipe runs is unit code . and D. for example. Run the Equipment List report.tag suffix . page 329 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. The method above is valid. and Tag Suffix properties. In the resulting report. Additionally. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag. P-100A. and AA display the Tag Prefix. 5. For more information on generating reports. Click File > Close. 4. change P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column right next to it. you must clear the SP_ID value. page 265 268 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified. Tag Sequence Number.

and the software gaps your lines automatically as you route them. Related Topics • Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now. page 270 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. the software does not automatically gap drawings. Using the Gap Now command. page 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 269 . or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your drawing by using the Gap Now command. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. instead of leaving AutoGap on. or when you save a file. This procedure can improve the clarity of your drawing considerably. the software automatically gaps drawings during the working session each time that you modify an item. A progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Gapping Lines: An Overview A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing but not physically in the plant. instead of turning on auto-gapping. You can either turn auto-gapping on. In order to portray this condition. The Gap Now command does not affect the setting for AutoGap. Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager. when you print. improves the performance of the software. The toolbar contains an AutoGap button off. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. page 270 AutoGap Command Tools > AutoGap Turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing. for turning AutoGap on and • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. automatic gapping is off. can increase the efficiency of your design session. By default. When AutoGap is off. When AutoGap is on. Notes • Using Gap Now. you can specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections.

gaps appear automatically. Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. on the entire drawing. Notes • Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Turn AutoGap On or Off Click Tools > AutoGap. that is. Notes on • • When you route lines and AutoGap is on. • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Using Gap Now instead of leaving AutoGap on improves the performance of the software. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. too. page 270 Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now Click Tools > Gap Now. page 156 Gap Now Command Tools > Gap Now Performs gapping on the current drawing. Tip • You can turn the automatic gapping on or off by clicking AutoGap the main toolbar. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. The status bar at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. page 156 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

The ApplySettingsCmd macro also updates the line settings. However. page 272 • Update Symbology. page 272 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. so that the current values in Options Manager are reflected in the drawing. Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing. check your permissions. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. page 138 • Update Label Settings. by using the Update Symbology command. regardless of when the drawing was created. the drawing. page 190 • Update Line Settings.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview You can force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data. which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics Update Symbology. to find out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options Manager. However. You can force changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options Manager settings. you cannot revert to previous definitions. The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. Notes • Any user can update drawings using these commands. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. page 272 Update Symbology Command Tools > Update Symbology Updates the line width and color symbology for your active drawing. page 271 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 271 . • Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. This command refreshes the graphic symbology of symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager.

2. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. Notes • The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the most recent symbology defined in Options Manager. You can change these settings in Options Manager. Click Tools > Update Symbology.dll. in Options Manager control the behavior of pipe and signal runs when they are placed in a drawing or when an inline component is placed on a run. However. Note • Two settings. page 130 • Update Line Settings 1. You do not have to update symbology for this drawing again. unless Options Manager symbology changes again. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. page 271 • Using Filters: An Overview. Related Topics • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. The ApplySettingsCmd. see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. double-click ApplySettingsCmd.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Update Symbology 1. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. but the new values only affect lines placed after the change. On the Custom Commands dialog box. page 138. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. page 271 272 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information.dll macro applies the latest settings to all runs on the current drawing. 2. • • Related Topics Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your drawing. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. You must run this macro for every drawing individually. Click Tools > Custom Commands. even if you end your design session. you cannot revert to previous definitions. Open a drawing.

If you change the embedded object. When you paste the information in the destination document with the Paste Link option. or images between drawings or documents that were created with this software and other OLE applications. • • • Linking or Embedding An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can transfer text. This box displays the information that you pasted. You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods: • You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to another location. Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another document. and vice versa. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location. For example. or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a drawing. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. The linked data is stored in the source document itself. the original information does not change and vice versa. You can edit the linked information by opening the source document. You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location. You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another location. You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing. the original information does not change. numbers. you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the comment in your drawing. the pasted data is updated either automatically or manually. If you change the copied data. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 273 . Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document that was created in a different application. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can link or embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this software and OLE software. notes from Microsoft Word. The information that you move is an object. You can move whole documents around or just parts of a document that you select. a reference point or box is inserted into the destination document. the copy can be updated either automatically or manually. When you change the original data. and an Excel worksheet. When you change the original data.

you could embed each drawing into a Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer. Or if you want to link the object. Notes • If you want to embed the existing object. and Pasting The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut. then use embedding. Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need updating. For example. select the Create From File option and then enter the name. Embedding by Cutting or Copying. Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed image. too. make sure you have not selected Link on the dialog box. On the dialog box. you can use Edit > Insert > Object. Copy. the information appears as a static picture.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you want to keep the document size small. The person can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. you could link the drawing inside the documents that contained the reports. press Ctrl while dragging. Notes • If you want to copy the information. On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste Link. Linking is also useful when you want to share information in many different places and set that information to update automatically. The entire document is embedded into the drawing. and Paste commands on the Edit menu in any OLE software. If you copy or paste information into an application in which you cannot edit the information. For example. Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded information does not have access to the software that created the object. and not remove it from its original location. select Link on the dialog box. select Paste Link on the dialog box. • • Linking or Embedding an Object If you want to insert an existing document. you could update the drawing by editing it in this software. the software automatically embeds the information in the document. not by the size of the data itself. if you wanted to send out several drawings for review. If you cannot edit the information. • 274 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. If document size is not an important factor. If you want to link the existing object. later. Then. then link the data to another document. or browse to the document. Embedded objects make the file size larger. if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you created in Microsoft Word.

Related Topics • Break a Link. page 282 • Embed a New Object.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Editing a Linked or Embedded Object To edit an object. page 283 • Change a Link. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. If you do not have the source software installed. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. Symbols in drawings usually point to the catalog associated with the current plant. page 278 Image Command Edit > Insert > Image Opens the Insert Image dialog box. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 282 • Check Symbol Paths. you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. page 283 • Change a Link. You can type an URL with http syntax in the Description dialog box to link World Wide Web documents to an item. Important • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by workshare. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. See Related Topics for more information. you can correct this problem by using the CheckFilePathsCmd macro. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. where you can embed an image into a drawing. you cannot edit the object. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. right-click the embedded object. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 275 . page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. You must transfer those files manually. Notes • You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. To get the shortcut menu. If items inadvertently point to the wrong catalog. You can edit the embedded image by double-clicking it.

When you change an embedded object. • When you link an object to a drawing. Click Edit > Insert > Image. The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and updating data. • The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. 3. such as a . page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the software updates only the copy of the object stored in the drawing. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. On the Insert Image dialog box. page 273 276 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can edit a linked object by clicking Edit > Links and selecting Open Source.avi document. Move the pointer to the location in the drawing where you want to place your image and click to place it. Click OK. where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or embedding. page 273 Object Command Edit > Insert > Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box. browse to the folder and image file that you want to embed in your drawing. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing. 2. such as a Microsoft Word file. When you embed an object in a drawing. the drawing stores information about the location of the object. . You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking it. or CAD drawing. 4. When you change a linked object. but the object itself is not stored in the drawing.dwg drawing. all drawings that have links to that object are updated. Related Topics • Break a Link.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed an Image 1. Tip A box that is the size of the image appears at the end of the pointer so that you know where the image fits in the drawing.

6. If you insert a document into the drawing. With this procedure. Caution • Do not use these procedures to create a symbol file. • 5. Notes • You can move the embedded object again at any later time. click anywhere outside the embedded object. you cannot embed a selection in a document. click the Create New option. 2. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. choose the software in which you want to create the object and then click OK. For more information. click File > Exit or File > Update in the source application. Tip You can insert an object that already exists also. serious problems result in the drawing. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document. change. If you attempt to create a symbol source file. 4. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. Click the pointer. For more information. Use Catalog Manager to create. Click Edit > Insert > Object. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. or update symbols. On the Insert Object dialog box. page 278. If the software temporarily replaces some of the menus and toolbars. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. you embed an entire document. After you create the object in its separate window. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. page 219. see Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. • Tip The contents of the list depend on the applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding. 3. text. the terminators. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. page 280. click the Yes button. For more information.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed a New Object 1. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 277 . spaces. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. In Object Type.

change. select the Link box. The software updates manual links only at the time that you indicate. You must transfer those files manually. 2. Click Edit > Insert > Object. If you attempt to update. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. type the name and directory path of the document that you want to include in your drawing. Click OK. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. Important • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. or click Browse to find and choose the file. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. If you want to embed the object. 3. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. page 121. For more information about creating drawing templates. see Create a Drawing Template.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The software creates automatic links by default. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the File box. 5. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. Click the pointer. serious problems result in the drawing. In the Description box in the Properties window. do not select this option. click Create From File. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. 4. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. 6. If you want to link this object to your drawing. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. On the Insert Object dialog box. To change the way the software updates links. page 273 Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object 1. or open the symbol source file. • Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. break. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview.

The software updates manual links only at the time you indicate. you can create a link only to an entire document.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • You can move the object at any time later. With this procedure. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 219. In the Description box in the Properties window. To change the way the software updates links. by dragging the file from Windows into a drawing. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. such as a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 279 . Important • • • • • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. the terminators. For more information. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. the information is embedded. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. For more information. text. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. You must press the Ctrl + Shift keys while dragging to link the information. page 280. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. You must transfer those files manually. The software creates automatic links by default. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. You can link an OLE by dragging a document from the Windows environment onto the drawing also. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. too. If you insert a document into the drawing. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. you cannot link to a selection in a document. You can embed an OLE object. spaces. If you do not press these keys.

Tip You cannot paste an item unless you have previously placed it on the Clipboard with the Copy or Cut commands. Notes • The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Cut or Copy command again. Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste Special command until you select another item or click Esc. Depending on the type of information. 2. • 3. • • Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. page 280 Paste an Item With a Different Format 1. select the format that you want to use to paste the information from the list of available options. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 • 280 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Paste Special Command Edit > Paste Special Inserts the Clipboard contents into a drawing with the format that you select in the Paste Special dialog box. In the As list. If you select an item for the insertion point and that item cannot be replaced. page 273 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. both options can be available. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the Clipboard contents are not pasted over the selected item. Click Edit > Paste Special. Related Topics • Copy an Item. Choose the Paste command to embed the information or the Paste Link command to link the information. Tip • The Results box gives an explanation of the outcome of your selection.

Note • The software does not translate OLE objects that you have linked to your document when you export a .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Links Command Edit > Links Edits or updates links to objects in another document. page 281 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. Caution • Do not use this command to change a symbol file. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Related Topics • Edit a Linked Object. 4. Click Edit > Links on the main menu bar. page 273 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.pid file to a MicroStation® or AutoCAD® file. On the Links dialog box. page 273 Edit a Linked Object 1. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. and other OLE objects. serious problems result in the drawing. The Links dialog box opens. break or open the source file. 2. 3. change. • 5. You can change links for Microsoft Word documents. Excel workbooks. This command lets you manipulate Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 281 . Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. select the link that you want to edit. Click the Open Source button. If you attempt to update. Make the changes that you want in the source file.

specify the file that you want to change the link to. In the Links dialog box. change. Edit the object. browse to a different drive or folder. Do one of the following: • • If you are editing the object in a separate application window. make sure you update all links to the new source file. Double-click the embedded object. serious problems result in the drawing. page 273 Change a Link 1. Select Edit > Links. click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to the design software. click the link that you want to change. Note • If you have other links to the same source file. 4. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces menus and toolbars. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. page 273 282 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the design software. 3. In the File Name box. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click Change Source. or open the symbol source file. 3. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Edit an Embedded Object 1. Tip • If you do not see the file that you want to link to. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. 2. If you attempt to update. break.

5. 2. double-click CheckFilePathCmd.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break a Link 1. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. break. Click Tools > Custom Commands. serious problems result in the drawing. 4. change. click Yes. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 283 . Select the link or links that you want to break. If you attempt to update.log. 2. and it creates a log file that reports all symbols missing from the current catalog. page 273 Check Symbol Paths 1.dll. Click Break Link. Caution • Do not use this command to edit a symbol file. The log resides in your Temp directory and is named CheckFilePathsFor_yourplant. Click Close. Notes • The CheckFilePathCmd macro checks the directory paths in the file names of all symbols used in the plant. 3. or open the symbol file. When the software asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. On the Custom Commands dialog box. • Related Topics Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click Edit > Links. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

you can place the group of items: the assembly. page 287 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which is specified in Options Manager. An example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides. page 286 • Place an Assembly. You must place the assembly first and then route piping to it. Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a drawing at several locations. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an assembly. You can delete just one item without concern that the software deletes the entire assembly. Or.pid. If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree view. The file extension for an assembly is . you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. Assemblies cannot be placed inline. the items in the assembly are treated as separate items. The information in each label remains intact when you place the assembly.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Working With Assemblies: An Overview An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time. you can drag the assembly into the drawing. the file structure and symbols must be identical. Note • Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing. After you have placed an assembly. Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a drawing. The Save As Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory. and a piping bypass around the valve. which is the same file extension as a drawing. Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonlyoccurring groups of items. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. an instrument loop that controls the valve. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. you select the assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. The assembly placement quits. if required. However.

it does not appear as a step available for the Undo command. Note • The Save As Assembly command does not constitute an undoable action. therefore. you cannot use labels. A red target appears at the end of your pointer. This command is available only when items are selected in the drawing. pipe runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Save As Assembly Command File > Save As Assembly Saves selected items as an assembly. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 285 . page 287 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. For example. and you can name the assembly and place it in the proper directory.pid file extension. Assemblies are saved with the . you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. The Save Assembly dialog box opens after you specify the origin. however. or child items. You use this target to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. signal runs. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. page 286 • Place an Assembly.

Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. however. enter the file name. Tips • You can select more than one item at once by dragging the pointer to fence objects. • 3. page 287 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. For example.pid. • • • Related Topics • Place an Assembly. 4. the file structure and symbols must be identical. To remove an item from the selection. • 5. Click File > Save As Assembly. Tip You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. page 144 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. The assembly placement quits. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. click it while pressing Ctrl. In order to save assemblies. or child items. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Create an Assembly 1. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. However. pipe runs. you cannot use labels. page 284 286 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The file extension for assemblies is . 2. signal runs. Notes • Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior to using this command. Select several components in the drawing. If you use the default folder. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. On the Save Assembly dialog box. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. Click Save. you must have write permissions to the folder defined in Options Manager.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Assembly 1. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. 4. click the assembly that you want to place. signal runs. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. or child items. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly appropriately. however. in the Catalog Explorer tree view. Press Esc to quit placement mode. • Move an Item Using the Move Button. For example. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. If you use the default folder. The assembly placement quits. pipe runs. page 244 Delete an Item from the Drawing. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly. However. Assemblies. Some assembly members also appear during placement to aid you. • • • Related Topics • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. page 219 Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 287 . 3. page 249 Notes • Assemblies are stored in a specific folder. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. or you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Tips • The red target is the origin of the assembly. • Tip You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed. 2. In the Catalog Explorer list view. you cannot use labels. page 242 Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. the file structure and symbols must be identical.

the Plant can no longer create drawings. You do not need to check out a drawing to claim items on it. Only the project can use the commands on the Project menu in Drawing Manager to fetch. actual design work is still accomplished in SmartPlant P&ID. Note • When you are using projects inside SmartPlant P&ID. All the modifications and claiming of objects is carried out in the design software. page 289 • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview. you can claim items on a fetched drawing. page 304 288 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . unless the drawing is either fetched or checked out to a project. When a project claims an object.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview After enabling and creating projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and using Drawing Manager to manipulate the drawings. All drawing versions in the Plant are read-only drawings when projects are enabled. A project cannot modify objects it has not claimed. any drawings that might have existed in the Plant before projects were enabled remain in the Plant. However. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. the project controls modifications to that object. and check out drawings. but the Plant can still delete these drawings. check in. drawings are created inside projects. You cannot change reference data. However. such as table layouts or formats or rules. Once projects are enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. but the claim states of objects inside drawings do have ramifications for drawing manipulation and for completing projects. remember that the reference data belongs to the Plant and is used by projects of the Plant. Projects and Claiming One of the main capabilities associated with using projects in SmartPlant is the ability for a project to claim a drawing object. at the project level. managing and meting out that work is largely controlled from the Drawing Manager interface.

if you break a pipe run. then those related items must also be claimed. the vessel. you can modify it using the same methods that you would use in a plant that is not project enabled. Properties of items that are not claimed by the active project cannot be changed. a symbol can be repositioned or the vertices of a connector can be moved. you can manipulate the Drawing view properties so that the claim state of items is visually apparent. Before you can modify or delete any of those items. If they are not claimed. If they are not claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claiming Items: An Overview A project in the Plant frequently deals with a subset of items within a drawing. However. labels can be added or removed without claiming anything. You cannot delete items that have not been claimed. the pipe run. the piping components and the instruments in that pipe run must all be claimed before you break it. nor are the mirror and rotate handles available when you select an item not claimed by your project. the nozzles and the pipe runs must all be claimed before you delete the vessel. No other explicit prompts let you know that you cannot edit an item that you have not claimed. Also. requires that the affected items be claimed. if you delete a vessel. The simplest way to create a new item is to drag a catalog item from the Catalog Explorer and drop it onto a drawing. For example. you must claim them. if the deletion of an item would result in related items being deleted or modified. The Claim functionality provided by SmartPlant P&ID allows you to grant control of an item to a project. none of the items on that drawing are initially claimed. Purely graphical modifications to drawing items are allowed without claiming those items. However. Since claiming makes it possible for a project to work on an itemby-item basis. However. For example. Therefore. For example. After you have claimed an item. Any modification that changes the meaning of the schematic design. The Properties window and the Engineering Data Editor do not allow editing of properties on items that are not claimed: the properties are read-only as if the drawing is in a read-only state. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 289 . claiming fosters an ability to define the scope of work as narrowly as necessary. A new item in a drawing is automatically claimed to the project. After you have claimed an item. some of the piping components and inline instruments in that pipe run will be reassigned to the new pipe run. the nozzles attached to it will be deleted and the pipe runs connected to the nozzles will be modified. however. when an existing drawing is fetched or checked out to a project. A new item is created in a project in the same ways it can be created in a green field plant. you can delete it using the same methods that you would use in a green field plant. Therefore. a error message will be displayed. a error message will be displayed.

only one project can claim an item at any given time. a drawing cannot be checked in if any objects that are not claimed differ from the Plant. You can also release a claim at any time. run Verify for Check In to resolve the situation. This process automatically sets the claim to valid and allows the check in to occur. Claims are automatically released on all drawing items when that drawing is checked into the Plant. and on the Edit menu. Invalid Claims When an item is claimed by a project. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. in the Engineering Data Editor. Shared mode allows concurrent projects to overlap at the object level. Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support Shared claiming of database items. Otherwise. Invalidly claimed items can not be modified. Conflict resolution at check in time will be more complex. With this setting. 290 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a single item can be claimed to more than one project. The Claim Mode controls how items are claimed by concurrent projects. the claims made by other projects to objects on that same drawing are now invalid if the project that checked in the drawing also changed an item claimed by a different project. If an invalid claim is found but the item in question matches the item in the Plant.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview You do not need to check out a drawing to claim objects. conflict resolution at check in time is simplified. You can determine the validity of a claim by using the Claim Status command. This setting may be required for plants that have overlapping projects. When the Plant uses Shared claim mode and a project checks in a drawing. Exclusive mode enforces the rule that concurrent projects do not overlap at the object level. you can fetch a drawing with read/write permissions and claim its objects. an invalid claim exists. Invalidly claimed items differ from the Plant items in that you cannot modify them and check a drawing into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. it must be consistent with the state of the item in the Plant. Claim commands appear on shortcut menus in the Drawing view. If the Claim Mode is set to Exclusive. Claim Mode The Claim Mode can be set to either Exclusive or Shared by using the Settings option in SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager. Releasing Claims From inside a project. If the Claim Mode is set to Shared. you can invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. however. but you cannot release the claim that is automatically created when your project creates a new item.

The Claim dialog box opens.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Notes • A list of claimed items is automatically published to The Engineering Framework. page 292 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. checking out. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Claiming of labels is ignored. For more information about setting user access permissions. not by a single user. Thus. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. claim is not an undoable command. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. You must have full control user access permissions for P&ID Objects before you can claim objects. Once a project claims an item. • • • • • • Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 303 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. Drawing Manager is the only tool for checking in. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. Claim commands are not available when you open a fetched drawing with read-only permissions. page 302 • Release a Claim. and fetching drawings. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 291 . allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. page 301 Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project.

In the Items to be claimed list. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Finally the command compares the selected items against the same items in the Plant and displays a warning if an object either differs from that item in the Plant or if the object does not exist in the Plant. this step can produce an error display on the Claim dialog box. 3. The Claim command checks first if your project already has a valid claim on a selected item. These are the items that you claim to your project when you click OK. Comments . select the item or items that you want to add comments to.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claim Dialog Box Opens when you select an item and click Edit > Claim on the main menu bar and displays details of the items that you select for claiming. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. and fill in the Comments box. not by a single user. 2. Items to be claimed . you can also see if a selected item is already claimed or has any other claim errors or warnings associated with it. Click Edit > Claim. page 292 • Claim Command. page 289 292 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. and if the Plant uses exclusive sharing. In this list. You can select multiple elements of this list and record comments for this claim operation. Thus. claim is not an undoable command.Allows you to record comments for the claim operation that you are currently undertaking. Notes • • A newly placed item is automatically claimed by the project that placed it. You can discover if the selected items are already claimed by your project or another project. record comments about this claim operation. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Lists the items that are selected in the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor and their details. select the items that you want to claim. Next it checks if the items are claimed by another project. page 44 Claim a Drawing Item 1. Once a project claims an item. On the Claim dialog box.

The following topics discuss some of the ways that claiming restricts your activities. the properties can be edited. such as when using the Delete command. When possible. the Properties window treats the whole group as read-only. If any of the selected items are not claimed. the properties are read-only.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Enforcing Claims Whether you are using shared or exclusive claiming mode. When you select multiple items. the Properties window allows the properties to be viewed but not modified. the Properties window displays the properties of the associated pipe or signal run. claiming objects to your project involves many special relationships. the Properties window allows the properties of that item to be viewed and modified. Note • Claim Mode is defined in Options Manager for the Plant and all its projects. you can edit its properties through the EDE. otherwise. The properties of unclaimed items are read-only. see the User Access chapter in SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. but an error message is displayed. commands simply do not allow the operation to proceed if you do not have the necessary permissions. Engineering Data Editor (EDE) If the item has been claimed. Modifying Properties Claiming impacts properties modifications in the following manner. If the run has been claimed. In some cases. if they are all claimed. When you claim an item. Controlling Access Each command in the software checks your permissions for the items that it modifies. Properties Window When you select a claimed item. the software cannot prevent you from initiating a command. You must have full control permissions on P&ID Objects before you can claim any drawing items. it is claimed to your active project. For more information. No items are ever claimed by the Plant. When you select an item that has not been claimed. The EDE behaves similarly to the Properties window. When you select a line segment. otherwise. the Properties window allows them to be modified. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 293 . the EDE treats the item properties as read-only.

" The target pipe run and all of its components must be claimed. but other times it does not have to be claimed. however. When a relationship to an unclaimed item is created. Implied Items When a drawing item is claimed. the Apply button is not available. The target of that zero-length line must be claimed. In some cases this results in resolving an inconsistency. Placing Piping Components or Instruments in Pipe or Signal Runs The target run must be claimed.A flow-oriented component sets the flow direction of the target pipe run. Placing and Moving Drawing Items Sometimes the target item must be claimed. see Placement Rules. and the properties are not copied. • • • 294 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If a model item is not claimed. the user cannot modify any of the implied items that the model item owns. The following list explains how the relationship between an object and its target effects claiming. For a description of how Reapply Rules can interact with claiming. Placing Flow-Oriented Components . such as when you place a nozzle on a vessel. The target pipe run must be claimed. An inconsistency indicator shows the inconsistency between the two related items. The Reapply Rules button executes the placement rules that copy property values across a relationship. if the rule calls for properties to be copied to an unclaimed item. Placing Reducers . or Instrument Components . Placement Rules When a new relationship is created. however. You can place a flow arrow label. if the destination item is not claimed. the action is not allowed.The target item does not need to be claimed. properties can be copied from that item without any problem. if the flow direction is already defined. placing a piping component or inline instrument causes a zero-length line segment to be created and automatic line connectivity causes it to be joined to an existing run. if it is not already set.A reducer is a "line-breaking component. page 294.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box The Solutions section of the Consistency Check dialog box allows you to copy property values from one item to another. the applicable rules copy property values across the relationship. In certain cases. Equipment Components. • Placing Nozzles. For the selected solution. it means that you can modify that model item and all of its implied items.

Here is a list of the cases where claiming plays a role: • • Routing Lines up to Nozzles .The nozzles do not have to be claimed. sometimes not.The target connector must be claimed. a mirroring. If the lines are not claimed. The target run must be claimed. when routing a line segment up to an existing inline component.The target run must be claimed. and your item will not "snap" into position. as if you pressed the Alt key. In most cases. you are not allowed to connect to the target. with the Alt key pressed where necessary. Rotation and Mirroring of Inline Components Rotations of 180 degrees and mirroring about the local y-axis for inline components are special geometric modifications cases because the lines are disconnected before and reconnected after the operations. Therefore. Placing and Modifying Lines Sometimes the target item must be claimed. Routing Lines up to Another Pipe or Signal Run . a rotation. freestanding placement is still allowed. If the required connected items are not all claimed. then you cannot place your item onto the target.The piping component or instrument must be claimed since it will be adopted by the new run. Routing Lines up to Freestanding Piping Components or Instruments .The OPC does not have to be claimed. the move operation can become a geometric move. None of the connected items have to be claimed either. must be claimed before these operations are allowed. Routing Lines up to OPCs .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Placing OPCs on Runs . Geometric Modifications Geometric operations include a geometric move. and a scale or parametric modification.The piping component or instrument does not have to be claimed. automatic line connectivity will cause an existing zero length run to be joined to the new run. Rule-Based Moves All connected items must be claimed. The black connection handle does not appear at the required point. In certain cases. the target will not highlight. • • • If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. The selected symbol does not have to be claimed to perform these operations. the standard claim violation message displays. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 295 . the lines. If no type of placement is allowed at that point. Routing Lines up to Owned Piping Components or Instruments . as described above. but not the selected symbol. the "no place" indicator is displayed. If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed.

3. then the piping or signal run that owns the selected segment does not have to be claimed. The target item may need to be claimed. Extreme End of a Run If you modify the start point of the first line segment in a run or the end point of the last line segment in a run. 2. Placing Labels on Area Breaks . However. you do not need to claim it. Internal Vertex of a Run Modification of an internal vertex can result in the run being split. For this to happen. unless the flow direction is already defined for the line. Breaking and Joining Runs The Break Run command allows you to split one piping or signal run into two pieces. Both of the runs and all components in both runs must be claimed. The selected run must be claimed.A driving label sets one or more properties on the labeled item. Placing and Modifying Labels The target item for a label usually does not need to be claimed. it does not need to be claimed. claiming plays a role in the following cases: • Placing Driving Labels .Placing a label on an area break causes a dynamic property to be added to the area break. The Join Runs command allows you to combine two connected piping or signal runs into a single run. 2. 4. 296 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the following stipulations apply: 1. modifying a driving label modifies the labeled item. This includes flow arrow labels. then the following stipulations apply: 1. The entire run and all components must be claimed. • If you modify a label. If the existing connected item is a branch point for the run. The run to be broken and all components within that run must be claimed. The target item must be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Geometric Modification If you move a line segment or a line vertex that is internal to a line. Therefore. If a component is connected to the endpoint. However. The target item may need to be claimed. the area break must be claimed. you must claim the item. consequently. then the run it belongs to must be claimed since the branch point is deleted and the adjacent line segments in the existing connected run are merged.

Placing Gaps Placing a gap symbol into a piping or signal line implies that the target line must be claimed. thus creating a multiple representation in the database. If the target line run is not claimed. page 154 Placing and Modifying Area Breaks The placement of an area break does not create any new relationships and therefore does not require any claiming. The Replace button is not available if an unclaimed item is selected. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 297 . Replacing Drawing Items The Replace and Replace Mode commands replace one item representation in the design with a different representation and change the value of the "type" attribute for the design item. To replace an item using these commands. the target is not highlighted as a valid replacement target. Related Topics • Place Multiple Representations. This is a purely geometric modification. Find and Replace Items that are not claimed can be found. and so no claiming is required. Replace Mode The claim status check takes place as you move the pointer over the target. but they cannot be replaced.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Placing Multiple Representations This stockpile command enables you to place an additional representation of an existing equipment item into the design in a different drawing. You must claim the selected equipment item before this command is made available on the Stockpile menu in the EDE. If the target is not claimed. Modifying an area break allows the shape to be changed. you must claim that item. it is not highlighted as a valid target when you move the pointer over it.

equipment components. Delete From Model. If any of the items or the dependent items are not claimed. and Cut. All of these commands check if the selected items and some dependent items are claimed. Item in Select Set Equipment • • Additional items that must be claimed for Delete All nozzles. If all of the selected items and all of the related items are claimed. The following table expands on this idea. All dependent items must be claimed. All lines that are attached to selected items or are dependent on those items must be claimed. That is. item type by item type. and so forth • Nozzle • • Equipment Component Line Segment • • • Branch Point • • Piping Component • • Instrument • 298 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . an error message appears. and item notes All item notes on those equipment components and nozzles All runs with lines attached to those nozzles All item notes All runs with lines attached to the nozzle All item notes The pipe or signal run that owns the segment All components in that run All runs with lines that attach to that branch point All item notes All item notes All runs with lines that attach to that piping component All instrument components – actuators.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Deleting Items Claiming impacts item deletion in the following manner. Drawing Items Drawing items are deleted from a design using three different commands: Delete. functions. then the delete operation proceeds normally. all items that are deleted along with a selected item must be claimed.

Refer to the Extending the Capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID and Logical Model Automation Reference topics. If the plant item group or any of its members is not claimed. If the item is not claimed. If the item is not claimed. select Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the stockpile and are deleted at the same time. for example loops. In a project context. it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC. packages. For these items. When an OPC is in the stockpile. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 299 . if the item is claimed. If the plant item group is claimed and all of its members are claimed. exist in the stockpile and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. Plant item groups. the property can not be changed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Item in Select Set Additional items that must be claimed for Delete • • All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the instrument All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the OPC The partner OPC must be claimed also OPC • • • Stockpile Items Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships. both OPCs in a pair must be claimed before they can be deleted. it can be deleted from the stockpile. and so forth. Moving Between Stockpiles The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. Validating Properties The software uses validation functions before setting properties on items. The selected model item must be claimed before you can use this command. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. then the plant item group can be deleted. The software checks the claim status before setting any values. If the item is claimed. the property can be changed. For more information about validating properties.

Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. page 298 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. Properties are copied from the primary pipe run to the other pipe runs. Correlate Items . The new item is claimed automatically as soon as it is created.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview To Do List and Correlating Items Claiming impacts the To Do List and other TEF commands in the following manner.The Framework > Correlate command correlates pipe runs to the same design basis as an existing pipe run that is already correlated. they cannot be correlated.Running an update task sets or changes some properties of an existing item. If they are not claimed.Running a create task creates a new item in the stockpile.Running a delete task causes the target item to be deleted. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. If all of the necessary items are not claimed. Create Task . the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. page 289 • Release a Claim. The item to be deleted and possibly other related items must be claimed before the task can do its work. Delete Task . Update Task . page 301 300 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. The item to be updated must be claimed before it can be updated. If it is not claimed. Related Topics • Deleting Items. You must claim the pipe runs to be modified.

page 302. A selected item in the list is highlighted in the design window. Claim . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 301 . page 302 Claim Status Dialog Box Opens when you select and item or items and click Edit > Claim Status on the main menu bar. choose Yes to release the claim. and discover other details of the claim status.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Release a Claim 1. If a selected item that appears in this dialog box does not have an item tag. then the SmartPlant ID. Notes • You cannot release the claim on an item that is claimed to your project if it is a new item that was created in your project. Release Claim . release the claims to items.Opens the Claim dialog box.Releases the claim from your project. SP_ID. select the items for which you want to release claims. Right-click the item or select set and click Release Claim. You can review the details of the claimed state of the selected items. The actual status is displayed in the Claims column of the list. select Yes on the confirmation dialog box that opens. A confirmation message is displayed. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. release the claims to items. and you can claim the item and record claim comments. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. You can also release claims on items when you display their claim status. and so forth. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. For more information. see Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. In order to complete the claim release operation. 2. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. claim items. is displayed in the Item Tag column. • Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. An item claimed by your active project is denoted by an item with an invalid claim on it is denoted by any other state remains blank.

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Details . page 301 Details Dialog Box Displays details about the claim status of the item that you selected in the Claim Status dialog box. 5. On the Claim Status dialog box.Opens the Details dialog box. To relinquish claims on those items by your project . select the items for which you want to display the claim status. The New Item entry is automatically added to the comments for an item that is new to the drawing. You can select all the items in the list by using Ctrl + A. page 292 • Claim Status Command. New items are automatically claimed to the project that created them. To claim the items to your project. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. and clicking Ctrl + C makes the selected items available to paste into another document. the user who claimed it. 3. 4. Click Edit > Claim Status. This dialog box opens when you click Details on the Claim Status dialog box. 6. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. select an element in the list and click Details. To see more detailed information about the claim status of that item. Related Topics • Claim Status Command. select elements in the list and click Claim. Since newly placed items are automatically claimed by the project that places them. 2. the project that has claimed the item. and any related comments. page 302 • Release a Claim. You can discover the project that has the claim. the user that claimed the item. review the information in the list of items. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. and any claim comments that were entered when it was claimed. and you can discover what project has claimed the selected item. their claim comments are always "New Item". and claim comments that were entered when the claim was made. select elements in the list and click Release Claim. page 302 Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item 1. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. 302 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the user that claimed it.

When an item tag is defined for an item. then when you print the drawing. not the line pattern. the software displays the item tag in the Claim Status dialog box.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Note • When you see the item tag listed for claimed items and an item tag is not defined for the selected items. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 303 . 2. Related Topics Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. Notes • You define the line color and weight used to designate claim status on the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. If you turn on the display of claim status in the drawing. the claim status will be plotted. page 289 Show Claims Command View > Show Claims Sets the appearance of drawing objects as it is specified in the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. Using the options on the Claims tab causes only the color and line weight to change. Click View > Show Claims. Click View > Show Claims again to turn off the display of claim status in the symbology of drawing items. GUIDs are automatically generated for every design item. page 303 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology 1. You can use this command to switch the claim symbology on and off. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. the software displays the GUID for that item.

addition.Indicates the selected group will be modified on the version displaying on the right. a change.The left-hand view is the older version. that is. described as left and right views. • Two versions are in the active database . that is. Modify . Values for the Change details include the following. which are listed on the Change groups area of the Compare and Refresh dialog box. Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical change groups. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another database. Differences display in the following two categories. or deletion of a property in the Properties window or Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID or through automation. they are displayed in time-order from left to right. you can view two versions side-byside and examine their differences by using the Tools > Compare and Refresh command. Data refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in both drawings. you cannot compare one drawing to another drawing. and if more than one category applies (for instance.Indicates the selected group will be removed from the version displaying on the right.Indicates that the selected group will be added to the version displaying on the right. • Graphic refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical representation in the design. that is. and the right-hand view is the newer version.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview When more than one version of a drawing exists. • Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category. if you move an item and change one of its properties). or you can compare a version in your database to a version in the Plant or another project database. Keep in mind that you can compare a drawing only against a version of itself. Change details displays information about selected groups in the Change groups area. then the highest priority category is displayed. • • The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views. 304 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can compare two versions from inside your own Plant or project database. Delete . That is. the item is moved or otherwise graphically manipulated in the drawing. • Add .

To refresh any differences between these two versions. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. Available Databases . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 305 .Lists all the different databases that currently have a version of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box. If you accept the changes. you use the drawing in the plant. and the left-hand view belongs to the version in another database because you cannot be assured that time-order is the logical order to display the versions. To refresh a project drawing. Change groups are marked if the changes affect items you have claimed. the drawing refreshes to display the changes.Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available Databases list. The differences display in what is known as a change group. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. History . Compare and Refresh Command Tools > Compare and Refresh Allows you to refresh the active drawing with data from another version of the drawing.The right-hand view is reserved for the version in your active Plant or project database. Compare With Dialog Box Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and active. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. Change groups are marked if it affects items you have claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Two versions exist in different databases . you must set the Action column to Refresh.

Reduces the display of the selected area where you click.Enlarges the selected area where you click.Displays the properties in either an alphabetic list or by specific category.Displays the number assigned to each change group. A listed item contains all the items this change effects. The report contains the details of the compared drawings. Find in Drawing . You can also specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select either Right View or Left View. Generate Report . Change groups . Zoom Out .Displays colors in the drawings as defined using Compare Options.Zooms to the selected item. Pan . Checkbox column . the Default items color displays. Action . You must first select an item in either the Change groups or Change details area.Allows you to move the display in any direction by dragging the pointer across the view. Print . Number .Enlarges the selected area by allowing you to draw a fence around the area.Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Compare Options . Zoom In . If not selected. Show Modified . Find in List .Displays modified properties. Allows you to customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawing being compared.Highlights the line in the Change groups and Change details areas. You must first select an item in a drawing.Displays a report in Microsoft Excel.Defines which action is to be taken involving the selected change. Select .Displays the Compare Options dialog box. Zoom Area . Alphabetic Categorized . Options include: 306 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Area that lists the changed items in groups.Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item.

Defines the results of the compare.Changes the listed item in the version on the right.indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example. Valid Claim .Indicates that the claimed item is a valid claim. a vessel has been moved). Graphic .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Validate . Refresh .Describes the type of item. Options include: • Data .Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example.Displays the category of the change.Displays the category of the change.Removes the listed item from the version on the right.Displays the specific type of item. Delete . and No Action . Modify .Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing version. a property value for a vessel). Change . • Claimed . Graphic .Area that lists the details of the item in each change group. Result . • Data . Actions include: • • • Add .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.performs no action on the selected drawing group. • Claimed . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 307 .Indicates if an item is a valid or invalid claim. a vessel has been moved).Describes what action is required to make the drawing in the right frame match the drawing in the left frame. Item Type .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example. Change details . Category .Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no drawing changes are applied).Indicates that the items in the group have been claimed. • Category . Specific Item Type . a property value for a vessel). The column indicates any differences in the two versions and which version contains the change.Adds the listed item to the version on the right.

Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are identical in the two views.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the right-hand Drawing view only.Toggles the display of only those properties that are different between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item. This button only applies to modified items that exist in both versions. for instance. 308 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . when an item is within your locate zone. Dark green is the default color for this option. Right-only . Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. Highlight items .Lists properties in alphabetical order. for added and deleted items. Left-only . Different items . The active color scheme is displayed in the Compare dialog box status bar. all properties are listed. Identical items . Blue is the default color for this option.Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is highlighted. Black is the default color for this option. Selected items .Displays properties grouped by specific categories.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Properties Window Toolbar Allows you to customize the properties that are displayed in the Properties window of the Compare dialog box.Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one or both of the Drawing views. Show Modified .Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the left-hand Drawing view only. Categorized . modified properties).Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example. Red is the default color for this option. Alphabetical . Compare Options Dialog Box Opens when you click Compare Options on the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are displayed in.

In the Change groups area. Your current drawing displays on the right side of the screen. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 309 . Click OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. select No Action. or Validate.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions 1. select the drawing you want to compare your current drawing with. select a database using the Available databases drop-down list box. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box. On the Compare With dialog box. 6. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left. click in the Action column. 2. 4. Click OK. Refresh. In the History list box. 8. review the information in the Change groups and Change details areas. Validate will display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim. 5. 7. Using the drop-down list. Click Tools > Compare. 3.

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Examples The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a data change was located. the property value will be modified as shown in the Change column. Change details indicates the compare located a different property value (Cleaning Requirement) in the current version. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property value). The current version contains the same jacketed tower but a change has been made to the Cleaning Requirements property. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . All items in the group are valid claims. Data Example In this example. a data change is found during the compare. If you Refresh the version. When the current version is compared to the selected version.

Change details indicates the compare located a graphic modification to a vessel (Jacketed Vessel) in the current version. the graphic modification will be accepted as shown in the Change column. a graphic change is found during the compare. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. If you Refresh the version. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was located. When the current version is compared to the selected version.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Graphic Example In this example. The setting are not applied to a version until you click OK. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but it has been moved to a new location. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 311 . All items in the group are valid claims. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the vessel).

If you select Refresh for any of the three groups. The current drawing appears on the right and the drawing it is compared to appears on the left. The original nozzle has been moved. Clicking in the Action column of any of the three Change groups allows you to select either No Action or Refresh.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Data and Graphic Example In this example. a jacketed tower with a nozzle exists in the version to be selected for the compare. When the current drawing is compared to the selected version. a data and graphic change is found during the compare. 312 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the action described in the Change column will be performed when you click OK. and a property for the jacketed tower has been changed. a new nozzle has been added. Change groups indicates there are three groups of differences. Change details indicates the compare located an existing nozzle was moved (Graphic) and a property value change (Data) in the current drawing. The current drawing contains the same jacketed tower and nozzle. All items in the groups are valid claims.

The software verifies. and offers hints. This illustration shows the inconsistency indicators that highlight incorrect relationships at a junction of items in a drawing. describes specific problems. you can decide the best method to resolve an inconsistency. Additional consistency checking and design propagation are defined in Rule Manager. Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add items to a drawing. Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. One solution is to approve a warning and thereby remove the inconsistency from the drawing. The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while creating the drawing. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. Another solution is to reapply placement rules that normally copy properties from one side of a junction to another at the time of item placement. The software displays all the inconsistencies. A warning appears at the point where the valve and pipe run intersect (B). page 317 • Show Inconsistencies. An error appears where the pipe run connects to the pump nozzle (A). pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles. Using these solutions. in real-time. An approved warning accompanies the off-page connector (C). page 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 313 . if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules that your company has defined.

The software does not mark consistent. Click View > Show Inconsistencies. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear. you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to display a shortcut menu. 2. page 313 • Show Inconsistencies. page 313 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . error-free relationships. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 314 Show Inconsistencies 1. Note • Also. inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing. When this option is selected.Consistency Checking: An Overview Show Inconsistencies Command View > Show Inconsistencies Turns on or off the display of indicators that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. click View > Show Inconsistencies again to clear the selection of the option. Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display of inconsistencies off and on.

As you create a drawing. you can correct the problems by reviewing them on the Consistency Check dialog box.Consistency Checking: An Overview Properties Command Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Properties to display the Consistency Check dialog box. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 315 . If a location in the drawing has only one or multiple inconsistencies. consistency checking monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.

When you select one of the inconsistencies in the list.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the second item. You cannot change the inconsistency description. regardless of severity. the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions box. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. Inconsistencies . When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. normal operating temperature.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the first item. Description . the software automatically selects the first item in the list.Lists all inconsistencies that exist at the selected junction. You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. When this dialog box first appears. which is provided for information only. and solutions for resolving the inconsistency. and lists the inconsistencies.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box Opens when you display the properties of an inconsistency indicator. All inconsistencies that occur at a junction. a ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description. A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe diameter.Displays the actual error or warning. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. and alternate design pressure between a piping component and pipe run — three different problems but at the same junction. are listed on the Consistency Check dialog box. Item 1 . Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically related to the selected inconsistency. For a lengthy error or warning. Item 2 . their specific problem area. 316 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Double-click an inconsistency indicator. review the list of possible problem areas at the junction. you can select the correct solution from this list. Invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction.Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. Reapply Rules . 3. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. After selecting an inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list. you can right-click an inconsistency indicator and select Properties. Note • Canceling selection of Item 1or Item 2 excludes the item from the select set in the drawing and thereby affects the display in the Properties window. Apply .Lists solutions for resolving the drawing inconsistency. On the Consistency Check dialog box. Warnings. or you can click Reapply Rules to copy properties from one side of the indicator to the other according to placement rules. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 317 . • • You can choose the appropriate solution in the Solutions list and click Apply in order to correct an inconsistency. the selected solution is performed.Consistency Checking: An Overview Solutions . Related Topics • Properties Command. page 28 • Resolve an Inconsistency. Approved warnings. Open a drawing. 2. The inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated.Copies properties from one side of the selected inconsistency to the other according to placement rules. and after clicking Apply. page 317 Review an Inconsistency 1. Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors. Tip In addition. • Notes • The options for solving the inconsistency in Solutions vary depending on the type of inconsistency.

page 313 318 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the Drawing view offers different inconsistency indicators: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction.Consistency Checking: An Overview • To alert you to possible problems.

If you determine that this solution is the best one. you can select it and click Apply. which could involve inconsistent nominal diameters of a pipe and nozzle. for example. 2. On the Consistency Check dialog box. • 4. Click Apply. you can click the Reapply Rules button on the Consistency Check dialog box. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. 5. Chose the appropriate solution from the Solutions list. depending on the type of inconsistency. Tip • An example of a solution is Copy property value Item 1 => Item 2. When you right-click the indicator. Or you can use the Properties window to change the nominal diameter of either the pipe or nozzle. This action can correct the inconsistency. you can choose the Reapply Rules command. The options in the Solutions list vary. Open a drawing. Tips • Or you can right-click an inconsistency indicator to review its properties. • Tip • In addition. select the inconsistency that you want to correct in the list.Consistency Checking: An Overview Resolve an Inconsistency 1. 3. Notes • Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors Warnings Approved warnings • A Drawing view also offers graphical symbols to alert you to possible problems: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 319 . Changing the diameter confirms that the values are consistent with the information that exists in Rule Manager.

page 317 320 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Consistency Checking: An Overview Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 322 • Review an Inconsistency. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.

Frequently this command resolves the inconsistency in your drawing.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Rules Command Available on the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. It is possible that you still need to choose Properties from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve any remaining inconsistencies there. Notes • The Reapply Rules button is available on the Consistency Check dialog box. For example. then the rule that copies the cleaning requirement to the nozzle at placement is re-invoked and the inconsistency is resolved. choosing Reapply Rules causes properties to be copied from one side of the inconsistency to the other according to the same rules that govern copying properties at placement. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. choose the button for Reapply Rules Then you can reapply rules with one click. An inconsistency indicator at the junction between the vessel and the nozzle is displayed for the mismatched cleaning requirements. and drag it to the main toolbar. If you use Reapply Rules at this indicator. however. the nozzle does not inherit that property. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. too. page 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 321 . That is. Go to Tools > Customize. if your vessel has a cleaning requirement assigned to it and you place a nozzle on the vessel. this command reapplies the rules defined in Rule Manager for copying properties at placement. rather than a single inconsistency. But if you place a nozzle on the vessel and then you assign a cleaning requirement to the vessel. then the cleaning requirement is copied to the nozzle at placement. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar.

2. Go to Tools > Customize. It is possible that you need to choose the Properties command from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu in order to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve or approve any remaining inconsistencies there. Then you can reapply rules with one click. Notes • Invoking placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. rather than a single inconsistency. page 313 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency 1. Right-click the inconsistency indicator to display a shortcut menu. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. • • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Placement rules are defined in Rules Manager. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. You can use the Reapply Rules command from the Consistency Check dialog box. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. Select Reapply Rules. too. choose the button for Reapply Rules and drag it to the main toolbar.

page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 323 . Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Drawing Data: An Overview There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch files can be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. Also. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. You can import data and items into the database using reports and other files. During the import process. you can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file.

which is saved to your local TEMP folder. page 324 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 267 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.log. Related Topics • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import Data File Command File > Import > Data File Allows you to import data and items into the database from reports and other files. Import log . These results are also available in SPImport. only items and their properties. Note • Relationships between items cannot be imported. page 265 Import Log Dialog Box Shows the progress of the data importation process and allows you to review the log file.Lists the results of the file importing process. page 267 324 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. This dialog box opens when you use the Import > Data File command on the File menu. Related Topics • Import Data File Command.

Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. a nozzle cannot be placed unless it is attached to a piece of equipment. Symbols attached to symbols that are attached to a connector or pipe 6. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. For example. Symbol placement is performed in this order: 1. SmartSketch graphics that are not recognized as symbols SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 325 . In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. the Migrator maintains graphic visual fidelity. Stand-alone symbols 2. During processing. To account for the rules in SmartPlant P&ID. the Migrator uses rules to determine the order in which to place the resulting symbols. When migrating your SmartSketch file to SmartPlant P&ID. page 328 Using the SmartPlant Migrator The SmartPlant Migration Wizard is a data migration tool provided by SmartPlant P&ID for converting and importing process flow diagrams (PFDs) and preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID. the Migrator looks at the SmartSketch symbols to determine what the symbols are attached to. The database does not contain any information for these unmapped objects. Any graphics that cannot be mapped are placed in a SmartSketch file that is then placed as an inserted object in the SmartPlant P&ID file. SmartSketch does not have rule sets. the Migrator scans the SmartSketch file and maps all the objects to SmartPlant P&ID equivalent objects. Symbols attached to stand-alone symbols 3. Connectors and pipes 4. Labels 7. Certain symbols cannot be placed unless a rule has been met.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import SmartSketch Command File > Import > SmartSketch Allows you to import data from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID and starts the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. Placement Order After the SmartSketch file is scanned and all its objects are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID objects. Symbols attached to connectors or pipes 5.

Properties .User-defined and default SmartSketch properties are mapped to an equivalent SmartPlant P&ID property. you must open the item in Catalog Manager. SmartSketch has a default set of attributes for vessels. These attributes are the same as the SmartPlant P&ID properties for the same items. All of those attributes. pumps. Notes • The AABBCC code is not displayed in Catalog Explorer or the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID. You can check the symbol map file. Nozzles are required in the SmartSketch document for connections to be established when converted to SmartPlant P&ID. Supported Templates . This file is created during the migration process and you can open this file by using Microsoft Excel. SymbolMap. 326 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Nozzles . both products have independent sets of symbols. To view the code.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Rule Considerations Because the SmartPlant Migration Wizard cannot account for all the rule possibilities that are defined in the default SmartPlant P&ID rule set or a customized rule set. migrate to the SmartPlant P&ID property database. You can add your own unique attributes to a P&ID symbol in SmartSketch. compressors. and if that same symbol with same properties is available in SmartPlant P&ID. symbol definitions and attributes migrated from a SmartSketch file are stored as properties in the SmartPlant P&ID database. and shell and tube exchangers. for duplicate codes. Non-Nozzle Connections . Symbols . if given a value in SmartSketch.Piping linear objects not connected to nozzles are placed in SmartPlant P&ID.Intergraph Process Flow and P&ID symbols map to the SmartPlant P&ID reference data included with the software.Delivered symbols with a matching AABBCC code are mapped intelligently to the equivalent SmartPlant P&ID symbol. You have to make valid connections manually in SmartPlant P&ID.Nozzles are required for connection of piping in SmartPlant P&ID. this means that the attribute must exist as a SmartPlant P&ID property for that symbol. SmartSketch symbol attributes are conditionally migrated. therefore. or you can edit a symbol map file to equate the symbol names between SmartSketch and SmartPlant P&ID. You define custom properties for SmartPlant P&ID symbols by using Catalog Manager.csv. Because SmartSketch is file-driven and SmartPlant P&ID is databasedriven.Appropriate flow direction is established based on the terminator of the connector. but are not connected. you must create your SmartSketch drawing with the SmartPlant P&ID rule set in mind. custom SmartSketch attributes can migrate into those properties. Flow .

the symbols that were migrated. enter the appropriate AABBCC code. Open the P&ID label in Catalog Manager. select Text. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. 1. which are labels that are associated with one or more object properties. Then the file you just created can migrate Notes • • In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. and click the Symbol tab. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. 5. In the Value box.All unrecognized graphics are inserted in the SmartPlant P&ID drawing as embedded SmartSketch graphics. The properties of these smart labels are passed to the symbol to which they are attached and migrate to SmartPlant P&ID. • Unrecognized Graphics and Annotations . the time that the migration started and stopped.The following list shows planned limitations of the Migrator: • • • Multiple iterations are not supported Flow direction that is indicated by using symbols is not understood The primary goal is not to take fully developed P&IDs into a data-centric environment The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. SmartSketch does include a subset of the SmartPlant P&ID labels. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file. and any errors encountered during the migration. Right-click the symbol page in order to open the File Properties dialog box. for example. In the Type box. type AABBCC_code. This rule maintains visual fidelity even if there are items that could not be mapped intelligently. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 327 . do the following.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview SmartLabels . Any label placed in SmartSketch must have an equivalent label in SmartPlant P&ID before it can migrate.log file in the Temp folder. 3. 4.Item tags and other single property labels are maintained intelligently. In order to assign an AABBCC code to a SmartPlant P&ID label so that it matches a SmartSketch label. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. In the Name box. Notes • Labels in SmartSketch files are migrated very much like symbols. Limitations . and most of the common labels are smart labels. 2. 1F6Y01.

select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file in SmartSketch. Follow the instructions in the SmartSketch Migrator. page 325 328 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. Tip • The Migrator allows you to browse in the file system for the SmartSketch drawing that you want to import. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. the symbols that were migrated. • 3. Open the drawing that you want to import the SmartSketch objects into. and any errors encountered during the migration. if you want to. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. empty drawing in Drawing Manager.log file in the Temp folder. • Related Topics • Using the SmartPlant Migrator. • Tip You can create a new. page 328 Import a SmartSketch File Important In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. Then the file you just created can migrate. Click File > Import > SmartSketch. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. Notes • The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. the time the migration started and stopped. 1.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. 2.

and Exchangers. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Click OK to populate the Properties window with the selected stream ID. All three reports.xls. page 267 Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data 1.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data You can populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. 4. or . you can click Edit > Properties after you select the pipe run. are updated with data from the newly imported file. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. Pumps. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the design software. and Heat Exchanger Equipment List. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. Click the Stream ID list and select a stream ID. Click the Calculate button next to the Stream No. Click the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data . • 3. modifications must be made to the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide. You can easily update stockpile items that originate from importing Aspen Zyqad data by re-importing a data file. Vessels. Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe run. Previously imported items. Such spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. . 2. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 329 . During the import process. Tip If the Properties window is not open. Pump Equipment List.xml file from the appropriate folder. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. cell to display the Stream Number dialog box. Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. 5. For more information. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing.txt.

Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 265 330 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Note • Existing values in the Properties window are redefined by importing Aspen Zyqad stream data.

If the nozzle is added as a child of Equipment: Mechanical. reports are fully customizable. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. For example. you do not have to include every available property in your report if it is not appropriate. Each report item is based on an item type. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel workbook and a report definition. Your report definition is retrieved from the Excel workbook. The location of a report item in the tree hierarchy affects the properties that are collected for the associated item type. You can create your own reports that contain the information that you want to see in a format you choose. if a nozzle is added as the toplevel item in the tree. For example. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 331 . and pipe run. The report template is copied to the report output folder. instrument. all nozzles in the database are collected for your report.Generating Reports: An Overview Generating Reports: An Overview Reporting is the process of retrieving information from the database and displaying the information as formatted output. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. and then the Excel workbook opens. For example. Several default report templates already exist. For example. Your report definition contains one or more report items organized in a tree hierarchy. Then the software performs the following tasks: 1. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. Your data is retrieved based on the report item definitions of the report template. The relationships that exist between the various item types constitute additional available information for a report. This item type serves as the starting point for collecting data for your report. At any time during the design creation process. You can define additional report items to access more properties for more item types. 3. Each report that you create is based on an item type. Each report contains at least one report item to define the item type of the report. a nozzle is related to the equipment with which it is grouped. When creating your report. which describes the data to collect and how to organize the data in the workbook. only items that have a relationship with your selected item type can be used as input. Microsoft Excel starts. you can create a report. You begin your reporting process by selecting a report template from the Reports menu and then selecting items in the drawing for inclusion in your report. a report based on the equipment item type contains a report item named Equipment. only the information about nozzles that are associated with pumps is collected. a nozzle report item can be added to access data about nozzles because nozzles and equipment are related. nozzle. Examples of item types include equipment. however. This report item makes the properties associated with each piece of equipment available for inclusion in your report. however. see the Properties Glossary. 2.

Data prints to the Microsoft Excel workbook using the cell mapping data in your report definition.Generating Reports: An Overview 4. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. page 349 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. page 334 332 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. • Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

Entire drawing .Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 333 .Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. use the Reports menu. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is the area where you can view stockpile items. This command is available on the Reports menu on the main toolbar and also on the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. use the Engineering Data Editor View menu. If you want to run a report on drawing items. page 331 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. use this command from the Engineering Data Editor View menu. If you have a drawing in the Design window and you want to report on items in that drawing. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. page 38 Plant Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on. This list is alphabetical. which displays a list of all plant-level reports associated with the current plant. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command.Generating Reports: An Overview Plant Reports Command Reports > Plant Reports Opens the Plant Reports dialog box. Current Selection . use this command from the Reports menu. if you want to run a report on table items. If you want to run a report based on items in your Engineering Data Editor. Selecting a plant report from this list and specifying the items that you want to report on generates the associated report in Microsoft Excel. The location of these report templates is defined in Options Manager. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. Include items in drawing stockpile . This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview.

the software gives you the option to report on all items. • 4. You can include more items in your report by selecting Entire drawing. Select the report that you want to generate. choose the items that you want to report on. 2. page 265 334 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the Report using area on the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box. • • Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. page 333 • Select an Item. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. page 147 Generate a Report 1. Click Reports > Plant Reports. • Tip Or click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you defined already. Related Topics • Generate a Report. verify that every line in the selection has an Item Tag. select the items that you want to include in the report. Before running the Line List report. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. Tip If you select no items. 3.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. page 334 • Plant Reports Command. page 331 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor.

This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. that is active when you access this dialog box. page 348 • Generate a Report. not the Engineering Data Editor command.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. Current Selection . If you want to run a report based on drawing items.Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. Report using . This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. Entire drawing . use the Engineering Data Editor menu. access this command from the Reports menu on the main toolbar. Note • You can define the location for storing user-level report templates by clicking Tools > Options and then selecting the Files tab. if you want to run a report on table items.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 335 . You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. The options that appear in this area depend on the view. Include items in drawing stockpile .Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. page 331 My Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. if you want to run a report based on table items. This list is alphabetical. If you want to run a report on drawing items.Generating Reports: An Overview My Reports Command Reports > My Reports Opens the My Reports dialog box which lists all user-level reports. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. page 334 • Generating Reports: An Overview. They can be stored on your local workstation. access this command from the View menu on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. use the Reports menu.

Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. page 334 • My Reports Command. page 335 • Select an Item. You can include more items in your report by selecting the Entire drawing option.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. Related Topics • Generate a Report. page 147 336 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

combine tabular and fixed formatting. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. So the software allows you to define report templates in several different formats and with all manner of information from the design database. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. Fixed format templates allow the greatest amount of freedom in formatting your report. Now the property name is mapped into the report template. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. as long as all plants use the same property name. but you can control the content of the template also. as the name suggests. any item that is related in any way to the basic item type of your report makes its properties available to include in the definition of your template. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 337 . too. You can create report templates in three different formats: • • • Tabular Fixed Composite Format Report The delivered report templates are all tabular format reports. Portable report templates In previous versions of the software. the properties of inline components and instruments can be used in a pipe run report because inline components are related to their pipe runs. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. Each report is based on a unique item type. such as Equipment List and Pipe Run List. and the properties that are associated with that item type are readily available to include in your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. thus. page 340 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. the template file stores an internal identifier for that property. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. that report template is tightly linked to the plant that creates the property. For instance. when a property is mapped to a report template. you create your own custom report templates or modify the delivered templates in order to gather and display the specific information that you want. In addition.Generating Reports: An Overview Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview Although the software includes several default report templates. the same report template is valid. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. and composite report templates. Not only can you completely control the format of your report. see the Properties Glossary. therefore.

page 338 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. The Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is important for setting aside space for the header and empty rows between lines in the report because the placement of report item properties is restricted in the tabular format report template. In other words. page 334 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template 1. When the report is generated. you are free to type a label and map report item properties anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header. That is. Also. choose the size of your report header. The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report. For example. page 348 • Generate a Report. • • • 338 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 357 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. click Options. such as Unit or Plant Name. 2. you can add graphics in your report header. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. tabular format reports are row-based. On the Options dialog box. the report template for an Equipment List can appear like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type #Equipment::Name# #Equipment::Description# #Equipment::Type# When the report is generated. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular Format Report All the delivered report templates are tabular format reports. all properties populate the report by using the same format defined for the first row. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Tips • The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped based on rows. Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns. the output appears like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type D-100 T-100 Horizontal Drum 100 Potable Water Tank Horizontal Drum Vertical Tank Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

for example the Line List. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the Options dialog box. 4. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. although the same property can be mapped to more than one cell. Properties for all the items follow the format you map for the first one. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. • 10. • Tips • You only have to map properties for one item. Tip This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header. For more information. if you create a template based on an existing template. designate two rows of data for each report item and then an empty row. Save the template and quit Microsoft Excel. 8. • 5. Select Blank as your source template if you want to create a fixed or composite format report template.Generating Reports: An Overview 3. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. The items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. in your header. Tip Some report templates. 7. Each row is filled with properties for one item. Complete general labels and graphics. page 357. 9. Only one property can be mapped to a given cell. The location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager. if needed. The location for user-level templates is defined on the Files tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). When you add any property value in the header. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to map on this report template. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. Notes • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. 6. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property. Complete column headings in the last row of your header. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 339 . the format of your report template is also tabular.

page 357. You can simply map properties to cells without any labeling if you want. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. When defining the report template. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet. Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item properties to the corresponding locations in your template. page 338 Fixed Format Report The fixed format report creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. 2. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. all fixed format worksheets. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. you only edit the first worksheet. and the layout for each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet. Tip The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the contents of your report. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear. follow the format of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. When you generate your report. Tip A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. and from the menu select the property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 340 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. • 340 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4.Generating Reports: An Overview Related Topics • Composite Format Report. page 348 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template 1. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it. When you generate a fixed format report. For more information. one for each item of the report item type. • 3.

page 334 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template 1. the first worksheet is automatically fixed format. page 348 • Generate a Report. You choose your report format on the Report Properties dialog box. In a composite format report template. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 341 . page 344 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. For more information about defining fixed format report templates. In your Microsoft Excel workbook the first sheet contains the fixed format report. page 340. Tips • Each item in the report has its own page. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 338 Composite Format Report The composite format report template is a combination of fixed and tabular format reports. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. but the properties for subsequent items in the report are displayed starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet is tabular format. page 341 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. The properties of the first item are displayed on the first worksheet. choose Blank from the Source template list if you want to create a composite format template. Note • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. and the second sheet contains the tabular format report.

save the template and quit Excel. 2. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. page 338. although you can map the same property to more than one cell. In a composite format report template. After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report template. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option. When you add any property value in the header. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. however. the Options command is available for you to use in the tabular portion of the composite report template. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet. the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. • Related Topics Composite Format Report. For more information about defining tabular format report templates. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. • 3. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 338 • 342 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Generating Reports: An Overview You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Notes • You can map only one property into a given cell.

Fixed format . and composite. names. the item type automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. page 338 New Report Template Dialog Box Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. You select a user-level template. page 349 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. one for each item of the report item type. You do not have to edit the report template when you first create it. page 341 • Create a New Blank Report Template. The software appends . Available options include fixed. or Blank. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar. but all fixed format worksheets. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. plant-level template. and descriptions for your report template and define the item type upon which you base your report. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. You only edit the first worksheet.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. you must specify an item type.Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank. You can assign source templates. page 337 • Fixed Format Report.Specifies your report format. All delivered report templates are tabular format. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. If you chose Blank. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical order. whereas.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. if you do not chose Blank. This dialog box provides options for defining plant-level and user-level templates.Defines the item properties available in your report. Name . Source template . The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Item type . then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. If you do not select a Blank source template type.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating.Generating Reports: An Overview New Command Reports > New Displays the New Report Template dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 343 . Report Type . formats. tabular.

You can assign any description. In the Item type box. Tip • These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source template list. you must choose Blank if you want a fixed or composite format report template. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report item type when you generate your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 348 • Edit Command. The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format. 2. When you save the template. page 34 Create a New Blank Report Template 1. That is. All delivered reports are tabular format. type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular format . see Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Describes the report type that this template produces. choose template format. • 5. Since delivered reports are all in tabular format. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. page 349. select Blank from the Source template list. or the template format is row-based. 3. Composite format . Click Reports > New. For more information. the software appends . 4. You can select Blank for a tabular format report template. Description . In the Name box.Formats your report in a table. the second sheet is Tabular format. 344 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 345 • New Command.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats. In the Report type box. On the New Report Template dialog box. select an item type. Tips • You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a source template also.xls to the name. • Tip This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. nonetheless. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row.

page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 340 Edit Command Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. This dialog box lists all the available report templates. to create plant-level report templates. page 348 • Fixed Format Report. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. type a description for the template. click OK and define the layout and contents of the template.Generating Reports: An Overview 6. 8. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. In the Description box. Tip You must have the appropriate permissions. Note • You must have valid privileges to edit a report template. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 345 . Click OK to create the template. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel. 7. select the Add to plant reports option. For more information on those procedures. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel. page 341 Related Topics • Composite Format Report. • 9. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview.

Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. or Blank.Displays the names of all existing report templates and Blank. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box. Report Type .xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. Important • You must have the correct privileges.Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel. tabular.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft Excel so that you can make changes to it. You select a user-level template. Name . The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information.Lists all report templates available to edit or customize.Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description and the report template format. the software automatically specified the Item type option as the item type that corresponds to your source template. Templates in this list appear in alphabetically. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar. page 348 • Edit Command. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. Item type . to edit plant-level report templates. Open . plant-level template. whereas.Specifies your report format. If you select a source template other than Blank. page 34 Report Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates. Available reports . Available options include fixed. the Item type option is automatically specified with the item type that corresponds to your source template. Properties . Click Properties to view and update properties for a report template. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. you must specify an item type. 346 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. If you choose the Blank option. if you do not choose Blank. Select a template from the list. and composite.Defines the item properties available to populate your report. Source template . page 345 • New Command. The software appends .

Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles. or the report format is row-based. Composite format . The first sheet in the workbook is fixed format. but all fixed format worksheets. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row.Describes the report type that this template produces. the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet two for each item that matches your report item type. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. one for each item of the report item type. When you generate your report. page 348 • Edit Command. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. page 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 347 . Tabular format . the second sheet is tabular format.Generating Reports: An Overview Fixed format . page 345 • New Command. You can assign any description.Formats your report in a table. You only edit the first worksheet. All delivered report templates are tabular. Description . Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. That is. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet.

3. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. 2. changing the Report type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties dialog box. • You must have the correct permissions. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. On the Edit Report Template dialog box. 2. see • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template.Application. select Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor and follow these steps: 1. page 357 Notes • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. select a report from the Available reports list. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. For more information about these procedures. page 341 Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 4. page 337 • Generating Reports: An Overview. then on the Excel menu bar. 3. page 331 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template properties on the Report Properties dialog box. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Select View > Immediate Window. Quit Excel.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). Type Sheet1. to edit a report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit a Report Template 1. Click Reports > Edit. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template.Delete in the Immediate window. Tip Because you are modifying a template that already is defined.

page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. select an existing template from the Source template list. type a description for the new report template. page 341 Notes • Because the delivered report templates are all in tabular format.Generating Reports: An Overview Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template 1. the format of your report template is tabular. Because you are creating a report based on an existing template. In the Name box. some options on the New Report Template dialog box are not available. if you create a template using an existing template. For more information. For more information about those procedures. page 344. In order to make all options available. In the Description box. 6. 3. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. • Related Topics • Composite Format Report. choose Blank from the Source template list. click OK to open Microsoft Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. type a name for the new report template. see Create a New Blank Report Template. Click OK. page 340 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 4. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. 2. 5. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 349 . Click Reports > New. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. On the New Report Template dialog box. When the software gives you the option to edit your template.

Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. page 351 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 Delete Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates.Generating Reports: An Overview Display the Properties of a Report Template 1. which allows you to select and delete a report template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. 3. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 34 350 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Available Reports . 2. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. to delete a report template. You can delete a selected report template if you have the proper privileges. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 345 • New Command. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box. page 346 Delete Command Reports > Delete Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box. page 351 • Edit Command. page 331 • Report Properties Dialog Box. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Select Reports > Edit.Lists all available report templates. Click Properties. Note • You must have valid privileges. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template.

select a report from the Available reports list. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 2. page 331 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar Appears when you are editing or creating a report template in Microsoft Excel. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. 3. 3.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete a Report Template 1. page 348 • Map Properties Command. Select View > Immediate Window. 2. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. On the Delete Report Template dialog box. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. 4. Quit Excel. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Type Sheet1.Delete in the Immediate window. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. page 360 • Options Command. Related Topics • Define Command. Click OK to delete the report template. then click Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor in Excel and follow the steps below: 1.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports").Application. Important • You must have the correct privileges. Click Close. Note • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. to delete a report template. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 351 .

which allows you to define a report template specifying the layout and contents of your report. For the selected item in the Report on tree. To create a report definition (a list of report item properties available to include in your template). Each report item is based on an item type (equipment. and so forth) and controls how the properties of that item type. You map properties to the individual Microsoft Excel cells to define the content and layout of your report. A report definition describes how to collect the properties data and how to format it in a report. nozzle. Select the cell and then select the property from the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. which opens when you click Define on the Define Reports Contents dialog box.Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on the worksheet. 352 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This template is a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains cells and worksheets. are retrieved from the database. page 348 Define Report Contents Dialog Box Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items. Note • In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. pipe run. use the Define Report Items dialog box. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. This dialog box opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template. page 344 • Edit a Report Template. Define .Generating Reports: An Overview Define Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Define Opens the Define Report Contents dialog box. instrument. you assign properties to particular cells. or item types related to it. In order to define the layout of the report item properties.

a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. That is. Select an item type to make its properties available to include in your report. its properties are available for inclusion in your report template. Report on . the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. page 348 • New Command. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. New . the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. That is. page 349 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. If you add a new item type. To include the properties. For instance. page 34 New Items Dialog Box Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of items that are related to the item that you selected there. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. you must select an item from the Report on list and click Define. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Displays a tree view of item types the properties available for inclusion in your report template.Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to include in the Report on tree. For instance. Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete . Its properties are no longer available for your report template. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template.Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Displays the New Items dialog box. Apply . if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 353 .

The Report Item Group Total property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. page 348 • New Command. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. 2" nominal diameter. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. is accessed by clicking Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. If you do. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Name . in turn.Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. Select item types from this list to include in your report template. If you want to tally similar items in this way. which. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 344 • Define Command. page 34 Properties Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template. 1. Group by the selected property . be sure not to map unique properties. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in your report.5" nominal diameter. the software prompts you to rename the new item type uniquely. onto your report. You can rename the item. and so forth. page 348 • Edit Command. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total property to the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. For example. page 345 • New Command. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. such as item tags. This dialog box is accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that items never share. you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves with 1" nominal diameter. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 34 Define Report Items Dialog Box Specifies the report item properties available for your report.Generating Reports: An Overview Items related to . Select the properties to include for each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. If you have duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy.Displays the name of the selected item type.

page 34 • New Report Template Dialog Box. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. Use short text . page 343 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 355 . Selected properties . selecting this option for Drawing causes repetition of Unit cells on any line containing Drawing cells. Left Arrow . For more information about select lists and their values and indices. which is defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. For example. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the right arrow.Displays the cells of parent item data in your report.Generating Reports: An Overview Repeat parent data . the short value is longer than the regular value. double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to the Available properties list. Right Arrow . Related Topics Edit a Report Template. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the left arrow. In a few cases.Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report. if your report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit.Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Also. page 348 • New Command.Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the Selected properties list. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.Displays the short text value.Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available properties list.Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the short value or select list value for that property. double-clicking an item in the Available properties list moves it to the Selected properties list. Also. Use select list index . Available properties .

page 357 • Edit a Report Template. in turn. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. page 348 • Map Properties Command. You can select more than one item and then click this button. type a valid filter name or click Browse to locate a filter. Browse . which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 343 356 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties list. which allows you to choose or to further define item types for your report template. page 17 • Sort Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. To select a new filter. Also.Displays the properties selected for sorting. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 360 • Options Command. Left Arrow . Also.Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties list. which. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Down Arrow . page 357 • Edit a Report Template. which.Lists all the properties of your report item.Displays the Select Filter dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Filter Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item.Moves the selected item down in sorting priority. Right Arrow . Related Topics Define Command.Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data. double-clicking an item moves it to the Sort properties list. You can select more than one item and then click this button.Moves the selected item up in sorting priority. Applied filter . in turn. Available properties . Sort properties . Order . This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. double-clicking an item moves it to the Available properties list. Up Arrow .Displays your selected filter. page 348 • New Report Template Dialog Box.

Change the name of the item that appears in the hierarchy by typing text in the Name box. Select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the new item type to appear to add a new report item type so that its properties are available to map onto your report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Define the Contents of Your Report Template 1. • Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database. Click Define. Tips • When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box. 2. 3. click Close. On the Define Report Contents dialog box. • 9. • 7. click Define. When you have added all the items that you want from this list. • 5. 6. select an item with properties that you want for your report template. 10. On the New Items dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 357 . 8. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box. choose the properties that you want to map to your report template. choose that node and repeat the previous steps. you can choose from only those items that are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy. Click New. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. Tip If the item that you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy. You can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they have items related to them. 4. you must type a different name for it in the Name box. Tip If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy. The highest node in the Report on hierarchy under which you can add a new item is the node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. select the new item that you want to add to the hierarchy. Click Apply.

Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. If you want to change the filter that finds your report items. page 331 Options Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Options Opens the Report Options dialog box. When you have selected all the properties that you want in your report. use the Filter tab. • Tip The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. which provides options for defining header and spacing details in your report template. 11. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. page 331 358 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Now you can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template. For instance. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. • Notes • All the properties that you have made available to map into your template are now displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. click OK on the Define Report Contents dialog box. choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab. Click OK.Generating Reports: An Overview Tips • If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report. In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. • Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. 12. you can switch from a filter that displays all pumps to a filter that displays only active pumps. and so you can repeat the previous steps to continue adding more items and specifying their properties. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 357 • Edit a Report Template.

Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your report. This dialog box opens when you click Options on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. Rows in report header . You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. In fixed format report templates. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions and properties in any configuration that you want.Generating Reports: An Overview Report Options Dialog Box Specifies the number of empty rows between items in your report and the number of rows in your report header. you are not constrained to have a header or rows at all.Specifies the number of rows in your report header. Note • The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates only. The maximum value allowed is 1000. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 359 . Skip lines between rows . page 349 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template.

page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. You can select a cell in your report template and then assign a property from the Map Properties list. Note • The SmartPlant Reports toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel when you create or edit a report template. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. and you can add properties to the menu by using the Define command again. page 331 360 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This menu is populated with the items that you define with the SmartPlant Reports toolbar Define command.Generating Reports: An Overview Map Properties Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Map Properties Displays a menu of all properties associated with your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. You do not have to map all the properties in the Map Properties menu. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. The software places the corresponding property in the selected cell. The Map Properties menu contains a subset of all the properties in the plant database.

or filtered items. select a printer and the settings for it. you must install and select the printer you want to use. The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities. and then click the printer you want to use. or file. You can set properties for the printer by clicking the Properties button. Printing a Drawing As you work on a drawing. click the Print command on the File menu. click the Settings button. you can send a copy of it to a specified printer. Except for the color settings and a few special effects.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Drawings: An Overview You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to laser printers and plotters. Zero length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing Manager. Preparing to print The printer you use affects the way the current drawing prints and displays text on the screen. Items look the same on the screen and in the printed drawing. you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font. However. Set printing options. your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. to make sure that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. To set the print range and scale. Before you print a drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 361 . inconsistency indicators. It also supports pen plotters. To do this. see the documentation for your printer. plotter. This stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items. Note Zero length pipe runs will print. the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. You can click the Print command on the File menu to do the following: • • Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing. If you use printer fonts. For more information about installation. Before you print. subject to the limitations of the device driver. the fonts you select can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. For example. and screen fonts. such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. printer fonts. such as TrueType® fonts. the screen display of the drawing closely matches the printed drawing. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts. when a reducer is connected to a nozzle. Use scalable fonts.

Related Topics • Print a Drawing. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: • • • • Curved items Many fills that have complex colors.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Part of a Drawing You can print selected sheets in a drawing or a selected area. anyone with a Web browser can view the digital drawings online. You can print all views or certain views. patterns. Printing to a Digital Archive You can use a separate Intergraph software application to store drawings in a Web server-based digital archive called the Digital Print Room (DPR). Some older versions of PostScript® printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. Contact Intergraph for more information. This feature is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. page 366 • Print to a File. or textures Large bitmaps Links to various drawings The type of printer you have also affects the printing time. PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times. page 368 362 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Printing Time Drawings can take some time to print. because they can make the necessary calculations faster. You can print not only drawing items that are selected. After you populate the DPR. A DPR Windows printer driver extends the capabilities of File > Print to add drawings to the DPR. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. but other items that are in the view with the select set print.

number of copies. Options are available for defining the printing area. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Before using this command. or file. see the printer documentation.Stores your drawing in a file with extension . page 102 Print Dialog Box Controls how a drawing is printed. printer port. Where . This area is read-only. which allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings. range.Specifies the printer you want to use. This area is read-only. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 363 .Printing Drawings: An Overview Print Command File > Print Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter. This area is read-only. You can select from a list of all the available configured printers. and other printing characteristics. page 367 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. printer. Print to file . The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. The Print to File dialog box appears when you select the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK. For help on installing a printer. Name . Properties .pri instead of sending it to a printer. busy or idle.Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration. Comment . Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box.Identifies the printer path.Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box. Status . or physical location of the currently selected printer. Type . page 361 • Set Print Options. You select a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click File > Print on the menu bar. queue name. Then you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured. The printer you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a different printer. you must install and select a printer. such as.Describes the state of the selected printer. This area is read-only.Displays the type of printer currently selected.

page 363 • Print to a File.Prints the user-defined area. the Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable. Number of copies . page 367 Settings Dialog Box Specifies the area you want to print.Prints the copies in proper binding order. you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1. Print watermark . page 365 • Print Command.Opens the Settings dialog box. Fit to page . If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale. Print black and white . For example. Related Topics • Print a Drawing.Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. Settings . which allows you to view and edit the scale and origin of your print area. When you select this option. This button is disabled when the Selection option in the Print range group is selected. then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper. Best fit .Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the view or views to print. page 368 • Set Print Options.Prints only the active view. All . Active .Prints each defined view associated with the drawing. View .Printing Drawings: An Overview Drawing .Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background.Displays the number of copies you want to print.Prints your entire drawing. Selection . Manual scale . 364 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12. Type the number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number. This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box.Prints your entire drawing on one page.Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device.Prints the drawing in black and white. Collate .

If you do not set this option. select the printer before you begin working on a drawing. Center . when you change an option. Click Print on the Main toolbar.Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin. 3. page 363 • Print to a File. page 366 • Print Command. and so forth.Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin. Note • For many of the options on this dialog box such as. X origin . page 368 Print a Drawing 1. and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect your new values. Preview . Y.Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the dialog box. you have a dynamic representation of how your graphic fills the printed sheet.Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both displaying and printing. Y origin . Related Topics • Print a Drawing.Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the Paper length option. the red.Printing Drawings: An Overview Paper length . Caution • It is a good idea to save your drawing before you print it so that a printer error or other problem does not cause you to lose any work completed since the last time you saved the drawing. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. 4.Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to the Design length option. type the number of copies you want. Design length. specify the range of pages you want to print. In the Number of copies box. Therefore. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 365 . Design length . then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. blue. Select the printer that you want to use from the Name list. 2. In the Print range box. Paper length. X.

you must connect the printer to the computer or network. page 366 • Print Command. Select the portion of the drawing for printing. Click Tools > Options. • • • Related Topics • Print a Selected Area. see the printer documentation. Click File > Page Setup to specify the drawing size. On the General tab. Click File > Print. see Zoom In on an Area. page 368 Print a Selected Area 1.Printing Drawings: An Overview Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking the Properties button or the Settings button on the Print dialog box. choose Selection from the Printer Range area. install a printer driver. page 23. select the Display as printed option. page 361 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 366 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information about how to install a printer. page 363 • Print to a File. Before you can print for the first time. You can display the drawing as it is to be printed. • 3. On the Print dialog box. and select the printer to print the drawing. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Tip For more information on zooming in on an area of a drawing. 2.

use SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. page 361 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 367 . source. To sort the sheets by sheet number. Arrange the views you want to print. The active view A selected area To a file Select View and then Active. The Print to File dialog box appears. and orientation. enter a number of copies. Click Selection. Tip • button on the Main toolbar. The entire drawing is printed. • Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Click File > Print or the Print 2. and you can enter the file name and select its location. and then on the Print dialog box. Under Options. The Settings button becomes unavailable. Do one of the following. Click OK. Select the item or portion of the drawing that you want to print. Multiple copies Drawing fit to 1 page Watermark Black and white Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. select Print black and white. select Drawing. If you want to print more than one drawing. Select Print to file on the Print dialog box. In the Number of Copies box. Under Options. select Print watermark. select Fit to page. select View and All. which has multiple drawing printing functionality. You can create more than one Drawing view by selecting Window > New > Drawing and zooming or panning to the area of the Drawing view that you want to print.Printing Drawings: An Overview Set Print Options 1. To print The entire drawing All defined views Do this Under the Print range option. You can set the paper size. Under Options. select Collate. Click OK on the Print dialog box.

style. Click OK. 6. On the Main toolbar.prn extension. and so forth. select the folder to which you want to print to. On the Layout tab. On the Print dialog box. 4. and so forth. Note Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. 2. Paper Size options. view or change the Orientation option and choose the Duplex Printing option if necessary.Printing Drawings: An Overview Change Printer Properties 1. On the Paper/Quality tab. 4. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. The file is saved with a . select Print to file. page 361 368 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 361 Print to a File 1. view or change the Paper Source option and color quality setting. 2. 5. click Properties. such as. Note • . picture. Click Properties on the Print System Advanced Options dialog box to open the Halftone Color Adjustment dialog box and further specify color. the Copy Count. On the Print dialog box. click Print 3. Scaling. 3. Click File > Print. and type the name of the file. On the Print to file dialog box. Click Advanced on the Printer Document Properties dialog box to specify more printing options.

Orientation . for example. Browse . Landscape . The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. you must type custom W and H values.Displays the page so that the short edge is the top of the page. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The page orientation is displayed according to each option. Portrait .Defines the sheet size according to the recorded width (W) and height (H) values. orientation. The Custom option is not available for existing drawings.Sets the size of the sheet.Specifies when a watermark appears by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. Custom .Click either the Portrait or Landscape option. H (Height) . Sheet Size . a B-size drawing to a C-size. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. You can set the sheet size. If you select Custom as the sheet size. If you select Custom as the sheet size. Click File > Page Setup to open this dialog box.Displays the height of the custom sheet size. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout.Click this button to search for a watermark graphic. Choose the template size from the list. you must type custom W and H values.Printing Drawings: An Overview Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box. page 125 • Set Document Properties. Note • You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. that is.Displays the page so that the long edge is the top of the page. page 102 • Page Setup Dialog Box Specifies information about the layout for the entire drawing. you can change. Related Topics Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. only for new templates. which allows you to specify information about the layout and size for the drawing or template. Show Watermark . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 369 . and watermark.

On the Page Setup dialog box. specify a standard sheet size. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Related Topics • Page Setup Command. you can change. While printing . While working . Specify when you want the watermark to be displayed by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. 3. and the Custom option is not available for an existing drawing. page 119 • Printing Drawings: An Overview. page 361 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. If you select Standard. of the sheet. Tip You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. The watermark also appears on any printed copies. Specify a watermark if you want a watermark to be displayed. page 369 • Set up a Page Layout. that is. Watermark .Displays the watermark in the background while you are working within the drawing. W. W (Width) . Click File > Page Setup. select either Standard or Custom sheet size.Allows you to choose a graphic that faintly appears in the background of the drawing. specify the width. page 15 370 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a B-size drawing to a C-size. for example.Defines the sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes.Printing Drawings: An Overview Standard .Displays the width of the custom sheet size. H. • 4. If you select Custom. Select either Portrait or Landscape. Choose the template size from the list. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. 2.Displays the watermark only when you are printing the drawing. and height. page 370 Set up a Page Layout 1.

retrieving PFDs. and operating a plant. and only one. When you use the Register command in any of the authoring tools. TEF acts as a repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools. such as Zyqad. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 371 . Equipment Data sheets. A SmartPlant Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a plant with TEF. The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool with TEF once. access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client in order to browse in TEF and subscribe to change notifications and compare documents. which points to one. The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL. SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. and creating a set of tasks in the To Do List that you can run to update the plant database.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview The Engineering Framework (TEF) standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools you use in the course of designing. INtools. such as Zyqad or INtools. Most of the commands that provide access to TEF functionality exist in the common user interface available on the Framework menu in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you are registering an authoring tool plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify. The Framework menu commands are not available unless your plant is registered with the Framework. The connection allows SmartPlant P&ID to display The Engineering Framework (TEF) commands. this action takes place in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. see the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. constructing. SmartPlant P&D interacts with TEF by correlating items between the plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database. and the like from TEF. After the plant is registered. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. In SmartPlant P&ID and Drawing Manager you can also use the Framework menu to publish drawings and retrieve data. Registering Tools with The Engineering Framework Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools. For more information. and SmartPlant P&ID. you can publish and retrieve documents. you must register each plant in SmartPlant P&ID with a SmartPlant Foundation database. For more information about TEF commands in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. SmartPlant P&ID. and Drawing Manager.

page 378 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. page 386 372 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client.

The software publishes some document types without the associated data. called a RAD file. The software the loads the data from the . After the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation.pdf or . The viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type. The publishing process involves selecting a document to publish.doc. Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring tool.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publishing to TEF: An Overview In The Engineering Framework (TEF). You can submit documents published without data to workflows just like documents with data. The document types and data that you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use. Changes in the document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published versions and revisions of the document. the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you publish. The published data is not enough to recreate the document in the original authoring tool. depending on workflow approval. line lists in P&ID).xml format. such as reports from authoring tools (for example. which can be a different workflow from the original publish action. If the data is approved and loaded. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow. the authoring tools share data and relationships when you publish documents containing the data and relationships. The software publishes only meaningful engineering data to TEF. and specifying a version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. From that point on. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 373 . The authoring tools (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. Publishes associated data into TEF. For many applications. you can retrieve the data from TEF into other authoring tools. For most documents. the software creates new versions and revisions each time that you publish the document. the software does the following things: • Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first time that you publish a particular document. see the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client User's Guide. • • • For more information about revisions and versions. The software relates revisions to the master document. it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications. When you publish documents. for instance) publish data to TEF in .xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. such as . this is an Intergraph proprietary file. assigning it to a workflow when necessary. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup.

To share data. limited Instrument Specification Sheet documents Instrument Process Data Sheet documents Instrument Loop Drawings I/O Assignment document Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) documents and data Line List documents P&ID generated report documents PFD documents and data Equipment Data Sheet documents and data Summary Sheet documents and data SmartPlant P&ID • • • Zyqad • • • 374 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . INtools • • • • • Instrument Index documents and data. the document types that each tool publishes.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Reasons to Publish You can publish documents and associated data into TEF for several reasons: • To exchange and enhance data among tools. You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow but by using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation. allowing users to avoid creating data multiple times in multiple authoring tools To report on common data that originates in multiple tools To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents To manage change. Document Types for Publishing Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data. and information about whether data is also published with each document type. the Framework Loader loads the document into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue. including workflow history and document revision management • • • You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going through a formal workflow. When you do not select a workflow for a document during publishing. The following list contains each authoring tool that is part of the Framework. you can publish a document to a For sharing workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as you publish the document.

The WBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work correctly. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 375 . These documents are always published without data. and units that need to be created in each authoring tool. the authoring tools are notified about the plant. or SmartSketch® files. in order to publish them. When a WBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. Related Topics Publishing to TEF: An Overview. page 380 Publish Command Framework > Publish Opens the Publish dialog box. such as Microsoft Word or Excel files.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview SmartPlant 3D • Orthographic Drawings Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) Plant Breakdown Structures (PBS) SmartPlant Foundation • • All Authoring Tools The PBS document contains information about the physical project with the following structure: plant/area/unit. The primary reasons to publish documents without data are that the SmartPlant Foundation Change Management functionality can manage document changes and reviews using workflows and that you can view the documents electronically. the authoring tools are notified of projects and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tools. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. The PBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work properly. The WBS document contains information about the project and its status in a plant/project/contract structure. Publishing Files without Data You can also browse to other file types on the file system. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. and allows you to send the information of the documents that you have selected to The Engineering Framework (TEF). areas. When a PBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.

type. Batch publish . Find .Opens a tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list.Removes the selected file or files from the Selected documents list. this list provides the name. Rows that are gray are provided for viewing purposes only and cannot be selected. This command is available only if it is defined by your project implementation team.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publish Dialog Box Displays a list of documents to publish to The Engineering Framework (TEF). and title of the document.Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. page 375 376 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . in the background). which allows you to search for files that are of a specific type and that have been updated since they were last published to TEF. the application which last published the document. Selected documents . This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Publish on the main menu bar. and you can specify information about the file. the documents begin to be published as soon as you click OK. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. Contract . the revision schedule. Engineering Tool . opens the Contract dialog box. Remove . such as whether it is a new file or was previously published.Indicates that the system publishes the selected documents in batch mode (that is. File System . and subtype of the document. If this options is not selected. and the name.Opens the Advanced Publish Options dialog box. description.If applicable. For each document. and the date that the document was last published. the revision and version numbers. You can populate this list by clicking the buttons in the Add area of this dialog box. you open the Document Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. the category. which allows you to search for documents to add to the Selected documents list. Advanced .Opens the standard Microsoft Select File dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. When you select a file in this dialog box. Note • You may select rows that are in white on this dialog box. page 378 • Publish Command. the type of the document.

page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. Descriptions .Allows you to enter the official title of the document. Published previously . Note • An asterisk * next to a box indicates that the information is mandatory. Title . select one.Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box. Document category . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish.Allows you to enter a brief description of the file. This dialog box opens when you click File System on the Publish dialog box. New document . Name . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 377 . This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Publish dialog box.Indicates that this document has not been published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) before. Document type . page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. If applicable.Indicates that the file has already been published to TEF at lease once before. page 375 Document Properties Dialog Box Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing.Indicates the types of documents the software considers when selecting the documents to publish. The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document category box. Document subtype .Allows you to enter the name of the file as it is known in TEF.Allows you to select a category to assign to the document. This description appears later to help you recognize the file.Lists the subtype of the document. The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document type box.Allows you to select the type of the document. Selected file . Document type . page 378 • Publish Command.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Advanced Publish Options Dialog Box Allows you to specify the type of files that you want to search for when you look for documents to publish.

• The documents listed on the Publish dialog box when it first opens are documents that you selected in the authoring tool before you clicked the Publish command. For more information. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. • Note • You can select the Batch publish option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. Tips • This feature is also available through the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. the publishing process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. page 378 • Publish Command. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Click Framework > Publish. page 371 378 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list on the Publish dialog box by using the buttons in the Add area. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. in the background).Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. Otherwise. page 381. For more information. see Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 375 Publish a Document to TEF 1. 2. When you use this feature. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview.

Selects all the files in the Select documents to publish list. Last search performed . This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you used the command.Displays the date when the files were last searched.Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published to TEF or files that have not yet been published. for instance). page 371 Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) or that were previously published but no longer exist in your authoring tool (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that the document was last published. Update . page 378 • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. Select All .Indicates what types of files were considered when the last search was conducted. which helps you select the documents that you want to write to The Engineering Framework (TEF) and specifies those documents that have been published before.Displays a list of all the files that were previously published to TEF but were subsequently removed from the project.Performs a new search for documents to publish. Select documents to terminate . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. If the file has not been published to TEF. For each file. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Find Documents to Publish on the main menu bar. Select documents to publish . the Last Published box for the document displays the value New. have never been published.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Find Documents to Publish Command Framework > Find Documents to Publish Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. For each file. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Document types searched . page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. The information that appears in the lists on this dialog box were found on this date and time. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 379 . and need to be re-published. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that it was last published.

see Publish a Document to TEF. The selected documents now appear in the Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Clear All . • • 380 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This step is necessary only if a document was deleted from the authoring tool. and you can publish them to TEF.Cancels the selection of all the files in the Select documents to publish list. indicate the documents that you want to publish to TEF by clicking the corresponding check box. • TEF communicates with the authoring tool to determine the documents that need to be published or re-published to TEF. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. 2. 3. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. page 375 Find a Document to Publish 1. For more information. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. Click Framework > Find Documents to Publish. From the Select documents to terminate list. • Tips • Documents in this list are in TEF but are no longer present in the authoring tool. Tips • This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. For more information about publishing documents. but is still available in TEF. • Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. page 378 • Publish Command. When the results of this search are available. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. indicate the documents that you want to remove from TEF. page 378. the documents appear in lists in the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.

using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List to complete tasks. page 371 Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client Click Framework > Browser. Tip • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). comparing documents. From this interface. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. page 381 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. but this process can be time consuming. and so forth. For more information. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. and subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. page 371 Browser Command Framework > Browser Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the active plant is registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at the time indicated in the Last search performed box. but the Web Client provides unique access to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. such as publishing or retrieving documents. Note • From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. you can perform a number of tasks. Related Topics • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. subscribing to document changes. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 381 . depending on the mode you are running the applications in: synchronous or asynchronous. You can update the lists by clicking Update. comparing TEF documents with the data in your authoring tool. you can perform a number of tasks. such as browsing for documents that have been published to TEF.

• 382 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieving from TEF: An Overview You can retrieve documents from The Engineering Framework (TEF) into an authoring tool for subsequent work. when you use the command from an authoring tool.Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the selected revision and version of the document. The Framework > Retrieve command in an authoring tool is slightly different from the Retrieve command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. you can access the Web Client through the Framework > Browser command. The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that tool. you can use the Framework > Retrieve command in the Web Client to start the retrieval process. Additionally. However. from INtools. or with some authoring tools. you can configure an automatic retrieval feature. without first selecting documents. The Web Client presents a list of documents that you can choose to retrieve. You can use either the Framework > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you in retrieving applicable documents. the software searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve.Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in the SmartPlant Foundation database. After you select the documents that you want to retrieve. or you can find the document that you want to retrieve using the Web Client search capability. Retrieval States • As published . and then you can select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client To Do List or the tree view. if another more recently published document contains updates to objects in the document that you selected. and these are presented in a list in the Retrieve dialog box. the software retrieves the most current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those common objects. That is. For example. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. With the latest data . you can retrieve engineering information from a published SmartPlant P&ID.

The WBS contains information about the concepts of the project in a plant-project-contract hierarchy. Create the appropriate structures by running these tasks.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieval Document Types The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool that you are using. units. The following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve: SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Instrument Index documents Instrument I/O Assignment documents P&IDs PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Summary Sheet documents and data P&IDs P&IDs Instrument Index documents P&IDs Zyqad • • • • INtools • • SmartPlant 3D • All Authoring Tools From most authoring tools. created in SmartPlant Foundation and published to TEF. The PBS and WBS. Notes • Retrieving the WBS and PBS into SmartPlant Engineering Manager (SPEM) creates items in the SPEM To Do List. When an authoring tool retrieves it. the WBS communicates project status. you can retrieve Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents. areas. The PBS contains information about the physical project with the following plant hierarchy: plant-area-unit. are retrieved by authoring tools in order to provide information about the plants. and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent across all associated applications. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 383 . projects.

When using INtools. deleting. which pulls the data and correlates items. • Data Handling After Retrieval The authoring tool that you use also determines how the software deals with changes in downstream data when you retrieve a document. An object that becomes a design basis for another object can be a specific object that gets richer as it moves through the schematic or logical lifecycle of one application and evolves into a more detailed object downstream. such as a stream in Zyqad that results in multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. tasks to update the pump automatically appear in the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview • When using SmartPlant 3D. you do not have to define it. or modifying those changes. on the other hand automatically overwrites the existing database information when you retrieve data. the authoring tool analyzes the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database. In SmartPlant 3D. you must create the plant-area-unit according to PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the WBS. you must create the PBS and WBS structures manually. Design Basis Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tools can become the design basis for objects downstream in the design process. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. For example. You are not required to accept or reject changes in Zyqad. page 386 384 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The same process works for logical items that are a design basis for other items. You must create at least one unit before you can retrieve any documents from TEF. you can view the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) by using the View > P&ID command. These documents cannot be retrieved into that application. When you change common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into SmartPlant P&ID. The design basis is implied and based on retrieval. delete. In SmartPlant P&ID and INtools. Zyqad. or modify items at the appropriate time in the design process on the To Do List. a pump retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. page 391 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. The To Do List gives you the opportunity to view and understand potential changes before accepting. and then it places tasks that instruct you to create.

the status of the document. page 386 • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. the revision and version numbers. Batch retrieve . Clear All . and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by the authoring tool (SmartPlant Electrical or SmartPlant P&ID. Show . page 385 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 385 . Select All . You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. Documents to retrieve . Related Topics Retrieve a Document from TEF. this list provides the name. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Displays a list of the documents to be retrieved from TEF. you can indicate whether you want to retrieve the document as it was published or with the latest data. You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the information from the The Engineering Framework (TEF). the type of document. and the Revision option.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve Command Framework > Retrieve Opens the Retrieve dialog box. the documents are retrieved as soon as you click OK. Related Topics • Retrieve a Document from TEF.Indicates the type of documents you can retrieve from TEF and changes the list view so that it displays only that document type. By using the Revision option. Document type .Allows you to indicate whether you want to view a list of all of the latest documents available or of only those documents that need to be retrieved from TEF. page 386 • Retrieve Command. for instance).Selects all the files in the Documents to retrieve list. the last retrieval date. For each document.Indicates that the system retrieves the selected documents in batch mode.Cancels the selection of documents in the Documents to retrieve list. If this option is not selected. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Retrieve on the main menu bar. page 371 Retrieve Dialog Box Allows you to specify options for retrieving information from The Engineering Framework (TEF).

When you use this feature. in the background). the retrieval process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. Otherwise. From the Documents to retrieve list. On the Retrieve dialog box. select the types of files that are displayed in the Documents to retrieve list by choosing either Only documents to be retrieved or All documents in the SmartPlant Foundation project or by using the Document type list. Tips • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 371 386 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . These documents can appear in the Documents to retrieve list. For more information. Click Framework > Retrieve. select whether you want to retrieve each document by using the As published option or the With the latest data option. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. Related Topics • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve a Document from TEF 1. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. • 3. 2. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. By using the Retrieve Option list for each document you are retrieving. • Notes • You can select the Batch retrieve option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. TEF searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents that are ready to be retrieved into your tool. select the documents you want to retrieve by clicking the corresponding check box. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 4. Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All.

For example. a single stream item in Zyqad normally maps to multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. A single item can be selected from the list. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 387 . page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. For example. and when selected. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item from which it came. Items in the active drawing are displayed in bold font style. page 371 Correlate Items Dialog Box Allows you to review and edit the relationship between plant items and design basis items imported from external applications.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlating Items: An Overview In many cases. page 389 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. The Correlate Items command allows you to review and manage these relationships within the drawing environment. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Correlate on the main menu bar. For some types of piping. When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 389 Correlate Command Framework > Correlate Opens the Correlate Items dialog box and allows you to review and edit the correlation between plant items and design basis items. a piece of equipment defined in Zyqad usually maps to a single equipment item in SmartPlant P&ID. a one-to-one relationship exists between an item in an external application and an item or items in the drawing software. page 389 • Correlating Items: An Overview.Lists all the items associated with a single design basis item. Items . Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. a single item in the external application is associated with multiple items within the drawing software. the item is highlighted in the drawing.

Deletes the selected item from the Items list and cancels its correlation with the design basis item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that has the same item type as the items in the list. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. the item is highlighted. Right-clicking quits this command. the new item inherits the properties of the item that it is correlated to rather than the design basis item. both are associated with the same design basis item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Select . and it is added to the list. a confirmation message appears. Clicking this button clears the Items list. When you click on a correlated item. If you click on an item that is already correlated to some other design basis item. When you click on a highlighted item. page 389 • Correlate Command.Allows you to correlate an additional item to the same design basis item that the listed items are already correlated to. it is added to the Items list as a primary item. it is correlated with the same design basis item. Add . page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. page 371 388 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available only when one or more items already appear in the Items list. however.Allows you to review a different drawing item. Remove . If you correlate a new item with a previously correlated item. the drawing item is highlighted. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item 1. • 4. a message appears to make sure that you want to change the existing correlation. click Add. On the Correlate Items dialog box. 3. Related Topics • Correlating Items: An Overview. Tip As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. 2. In the drawing. 3. The above procedure is to correlate additional drawing items to the design basis item. Since items from TEF already have a correlation. page 371 Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items 1. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 389 . the item is highlighted. 2. Note • When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from TEF. Select a item in the drawing that you want to correlate to the retrieved item. Click Remove. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. select the item in the Items list whose correlation with the design basis you want to remove. it is added to the Items list on the Correlate Items dialog box as a primary item. Click Framework > Correlate Items. select either an item that was retrieved using The Engineering Framework (TEF) and placed in the drawing or a previously correlated item. On the Correlate Items dialog box. When you click on a correlated item. you can highlight and select only items that were retrieved from TEF or native P&ID items that are already correlated. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item that it came from. Click Tools > Correlate Items. Tip • When the Correlate Items dialog box opens. page 387 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.

Creates a new item in the stockpile Update . If you successfully run the task. if you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right from the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction. Error status occurs. Notes • When an Update task is created in the To Do List. Additionally.Creates and displays a reminder.Deletes the specified item from the plant Manual . The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create tasks and Update tasks. this feature aids in retrieving data from TEF by providing a list of all the things that must be added. Some types of tasks have associated code and you can run them thereby causing the database or drawings to be modified. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. the status is changed to Error . You can decide when a manual task is complete and set the status accordingly.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Using the To Do List: An Overview The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep P&IDs updated with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). deleted. The available task types are • • • • Create . you sort the list by the values in that column. the units of measure used in properties are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. Initially. the status changes to Complete . you can view properties for each task in the To Do List. for example. You can also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred . The units of measure used for properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run. the status is Open. • 390 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or delete them altogether. If you attempt to run a task.Updates the selected properties of the specified item Delete . but the process is not completed successfully. By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List. defer them. A single To Do List is shared by all the users of a plant database. for instance. or modified to bring the drawing into agreement with the newest information retrieved from TEF. From the To Do List. Specifically. Each task in the To Do List has a status. but certain information is provided for all types. you can perform tasks.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. you can run. and you can organize your tasks. page 394 • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 396 • Defer a Task on the To Do List. defer. page 402 • Run a Task from the To Do List. page 405 To Do List Command Framework > To Do List Opens the To Do List dialog box. page 401 • Update the To Do List Display. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 391 . Note • This command is available regardless of whether a drawing is open or not.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. From this dialog box. which lists tasks to be performed in SmartPlant P&ID. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. or delete tasks. page 402 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 371 Open the To Do List Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar.

This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. this command activates it.Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. Assign Drawing . this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task.Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. You can assign or reassign a Create task. This command is not available for manually created tasks. The commands associated with the To Do List are all on the To Do List toolbar. in other words.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview To Do List Dialog Box Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a SmartPlant P&ID database to keep the plant current with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). Properties . If multiple tasks are selected. Open Drawing . this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. remain open.Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. This command is available only when a single task is selected. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. 392 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command.Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. If multiple tasks are selected. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar.Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. If multiple tasks are selected. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. New Manual Task . This command is available when an executable task is selected. If multiple tasks are selected. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. Run Task . this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. If the drawing is not active. Zoom In . This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. and allows you to manually create a new task.Displays the Task Properties dialog box. Any drawings that are currently open. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. the associated drawing is open and active.

Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred .Displays a list of tasks that have been deleted from the To Do List in the Task list on a gray background. or Deferred status. the destination drawing.xls. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. View Deleted .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • When a task runs. By clicking the heading of any of these columns. Refresh . You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right on the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction. This list provides information about each task.Populates automatically when you retrieve a document from TEF. you sort the list by the values in that column. the status is updated to Completed . the status of the task. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. the name of the task. Task List .Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. but the report template. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. called To Do List. including. and so forth. for example. page 391 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 393 . If the task runs successfully. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. a description of the task. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. Error . This command toggles this feature on and off. Delete Task . produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced.Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. Report . Related Topics • Open the To Do List. If there is a problem. Doubleclicking a task opens the Task Properties dialog box for that task.Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. and so the information can change at any time. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. the status is updated to Error . If you wish to completely delete tasks from the list of deleted tasks. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. page 391 • To Do List Command. Defer Task . multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. you can select them and click Delete Task again on the To Do List toolbar.

page 371 • Zoom In Command Framework > To Do List > Zoom In Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List. select a task that is assigned to a drawing. Tip You can assign tasks to drawings by using commands on the To Do List. If the drawing is not active. remain open. page 395. For more information. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Click Framework > To Do List. Related Topics Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 400. you can display drawing items from the To Do List. Any drawings that are currently open. this command activates it. 394 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. • Note • Once the drawing is open. If multiple tasks are selected. You can assign or reassign a Create task. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. 3. see View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. page 371 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List 1. see Assign a Task to a Drawing. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. For more information. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. 2. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. too. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Open Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Open Drawing Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. Click Open Drawing .

page 371 New Manual Task Command Framework > To Do List > New Manual Task Displays the Task Properties dialog box. click Zoom Tip • . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. not for Create tasks. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. The software opens a Drawing view with the drawing items that are associated with the task highlighted. select a task or tasks. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 395 . page 371 View a Drawing Item from the To Do List 1. page 394. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Notes • The Zoom command is available only for Update and Delete tasks. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. and only when the drawing that the item belongs to is already open. page 396 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. On the To Do List toolbar. 3. 2. Related Topics • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. For more information. Click Framework > To Do List. and allows you to manually create a new task. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 390 • View a Drawing Item from the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview If multiple tasks are selected. Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 395 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.

page 371 Properties Command Framework > To Do List > Properties Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Enter a name. click New Manual Task 3. The tabs that appear on this dialog box are determined by the type of task that you selected from the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List 1. and status for the new task. 4. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. Note • . 2. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. page 399 • Properties Command. There are three basis types of tasks: Create. This command is available only when a single task is selected. select the General tab. On the Task Properties dialog box. 5. In the Notes area. page 371 Task Properties Dialog Box Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog box. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box. description. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Update. enter comments if you want to. and Delete tasks. page 28 396 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 399 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box. Click Framework > To Do List. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties.

but you can use the Assign Drawing command on the To Do List dialog box to change this value. page 399 • Properties Command. Engineering Tool . such as the success of the procedure. this box displays the item tag of the item to be created.Displays the name of the document from which this task originated (for example. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Notes .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks.Displays the item tag of the drawing object from which this task originated. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 397 .Indicates the level of completion of the task. Name . Status . This value is not a unique identifier for the task.Displays a longer description of the purpose of the task. a Zyqad equipment data sheet or an INtools instrument index). Drawing . Description .Displays the name of the application that published the document from which this task originated. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. this box displays the name of the drawing to which the task is assigned. Item Tag . For Create tasks. page 28 Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and destination of the information being imported as part of the task. this box displays the item tag of an existing item.For drawing-specific tasks.Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. the status is set to Open. When a task is created. For Update and Delete tasks. Document .Allows you to enter freeform text about the task. The following choices are available: Open. which does not have an identifying icon in the Task list on the To Do List. is added to the end of any existing notes for a task. Information about the execution of the task. Completed . Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. and Error . Deferred . You can also enter hyperlinks to other documents for more extensive information. This information cannot be directly edited on this tab. This information is read-only.

Created Date . 398 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Item Type . Run By . or deleted. and so forth. or deleted the task. This information includes the type of item created and the names and values of the properties of the new item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar.Displays the date and time that the task was last run.Shows the name of each item property and its new value. To prevent a value from being used if the Create task is run.Displays the user name that last ran.Displays the user name that removed the task. turn off the property by selecting it in the list. Modified By . Created By .Displays the user name of the task creator. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. The information on this tab is read-only. page 28 History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the task.Displays the date and time that the task was created. modified. Deleted Date . Catalog item .Displays the date and time that the task was last run. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Modified Date .Indicates the catalog item used to create the drawing item if the task is run.Displays the user name that last ran the task. page 28 Create Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays information specific to tasks that create new items in the drawing. page 399 • Properties Command. Item Properties .Displays the date and time that the task was removed. page 399 • Properties Command. This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item. Run Date . modification of an item. modified.Displays the type of item to be created. Deleted By .

Note • The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. If multiple tasks are selected.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. On the Properties dialog box. From the task list on the To Do List dialog box. 3. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. you can edit the name and notes for the task. For Create tasks. 4. you can edit the catalog item being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item. On the toolbar. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item. page 399 • Properties Command. For Update tasks. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Assign Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Assign Drawing Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. select the task or tasks that you want to edit. Click Framework > To Do List. 2. page 28 Modify To Do List Task Properties 1. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 399 . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. change the properties as necessary. click Properties Tip You can also open the Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the To Do List. • . page 400 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. For all types. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics Assign a Task to a Drawing.

Lists all the drawings associated with the active plant. page 371 • Run Task Command Framework > To Do List > Run Task Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. the associated drawing is open and active. 4.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Assign Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to associate a task in the To Do List with a drawing assigned to the active plant structure. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. the selected tasks are assigned to that drawing. Related Topics • Assign a Task to a Drawing. If multiple tasks are selected. On the Assign Drawing dialog box. Select the drawing that you want to associate with the task or tasks you selected on the To Do List dialog box. page 399 Assign a Task to a Drawing 1. Drawings . 2. 400 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can assign Create or Manual tasks using this dialog box. This command is available when an executable task is selected. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. in other words. page 400 • Assign Drawing Command. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. select the task or tasks that you want to assign to a particular drawing. The Create tasks are not initially associated with a drawing. Click Assign Drawing . From the list on the To Do List dialog box. This command is not available for manually created tasks. select the drawing that you want to assign these tasks to.Removes the association between the selected task and a drawing. 3. Clear . When you select a drawing and click OK. Click Framework > To Do List. This dialog box opens when you click Assign Drawing on the To Do List dialog box.

If the task runs successfully. page 394. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. Click Run Task Notes • . If a task is assigned to a drawing. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 401 . select the task or tasks that you want to run. For more information. page 371 • Run a Task from the To Do List 1. If there is a problem. Error . that drawing must be open before you can run the task. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. 2.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview When a task runs. the status is updated to Completed . page 371 Defer Task Command Framework > To Do List > Defer Task Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. or Deferred status. Click Framework > To Do List. 3. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Defer a Task on the To Do List. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics Run a Task from the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. the status is updated to Error . page 401 • Using the To Do List: An Overview.

Related Topics • Remove a Task from the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. On the toolbar. 2. 2. 3. page 371 Delete Task Command Framework > To Do List > Delete Task Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Defer a Task on the To Do List 1. 3. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. select the task or tasks that you want to defer. click Delete Task Note • . Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. On the toolbar. see Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. select the task or tasks that you want to remove. Click Framework > To Do List. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. For more information. page 371 Remove a Task from the To Do List 1. click Defer Task . page 371 402 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can display deleted tasks in the To Do List. Click Framework > To Do List. page 403.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.xls. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. click View Deleted again. called To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List 1. To return to the current task list. 2. page 371 Report Command Framework > To Do List > Report Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 403 . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. but the report template. click View Deleted Tip • . produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Related Topics • Run a To Do List Report. page 404 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Click Framework > To Do List.

For more information on running reports. Click Report Tip This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. see Generate a Report. page 371 404 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • on the toolbar. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. page 405 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. you must choose a name and location for the current report on the Save As Output dialog box. or you can sort the output in an appropriate order for your project). you can add a filter so that only tasks with particular properties are reported on. see Edit a Report Template. 2. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. For more information. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Then the report opens in Excel. page 348. 3. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Update the To Do List Display. It is a tabular format report template.xls. page 371 • Refresh Command Framework > To Do List > Refresh Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. page 334. and so the information can change at any time. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. If a To Do List report has been generated previously. Note • The report template for this report that is included with the software is called To Do List. but the report is produced much the same way that other SmartPlant reports are produced. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. This To Do List report can be customized in the same ways that other reports can be customized (for instance.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Run a To Do List Report 1.

Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 405 . click Refresh .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Update the To Do List Display On the To Do List dialog box toolbar.

With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. see Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. code lists and select lists. and using filters. For more information. graphics are called cells. page 410 • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. you can set construction status before or after you place an item. filters show certain parts of the drawing. design file differences. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. For more information.Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. Code Lists and Select Lists . and you can combine filters. Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID . such as only the equipment or only the piping.In PDS 2D. For more information. Setting Construction Status . In SmartPlant P&ID. piping. page 409. page 407 • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview The are many functions that can be compared between SmartPlant P&ID and the PDS product. they reside in a select list. see Using Filters Versus Levels. see Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. page 412. see Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. Related Topics • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. see Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID. When you place an item. These graphics include pumps. For more information. In SmartPlant P&ID.PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. consistency checking and propagation. see Setting Construction Status. They include attributes and properties. tanks. Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation .With PDS™ 2D. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. before you place an equipment group. page 408 • Setting Construction Status.In PDS. valves. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. page 413. Using Filters Versus Levels . Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID . page 410. Future. construction status values. the default construction status is New. and other items.In PDS 2D. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. page 408. you set the construction status by clicking the New. page 409 406 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . graphics are called catalog items. For more information. relationships between placed items. For more information. page 407. In SmartPlant P&ID.

Select entries are the individual members of a select list. the accepted values for the attribute are defined in a code list. These special values help SmartPlant P&ID communicate information to other applications. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. Consequently. frequently in the Short Value entry. For more information on defining select lists and entries. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 407 . some properties are likewise restricted to preset values. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. In SmartPlant P&ID. restricted values.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists In PDS. such as PDS 3D and SmartPlant 3D. That is. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. Select lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. to modify select lists in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. You must have special permissions. Some code lists and select lists contain special. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. you should use caution when modifying any entries already included with the product when it is delivered to you. they reside in a select list.

This guideline also exists for placing equipment labels and equipment component labels. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. before you place an equipment group. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. Moving components from one equipment group to another also requires that you manually regroup components so that they belong to the destination equipment. Related Topics • Place Equipment.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID With PDS™ 2D. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. page 153 408 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

If you have already placed an item. select the item in the drawing and change the status in the Properties window. In SmartPlant P&ID. • Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. you can set construction status before or after you place an item: • If you know the construction status before placing an item. click Tools > Options. you set the construction status by clicking the New.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Setting Construction Status In PDS 2D. the default construction status is New. page 21 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 409 . and then set the status on the Placement tab. When you place an item. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. All items that are subsequently placed in the drawing are assigned this status. Future.

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. more so than the workflow associated with propagation. and it automatically reports in the graphical view on junctions that do not follow these rules. resolution can be time-consuming. and label items. route lines. Errors occur when you violate the design practices for a plant. Consistency Check continuously blends into the software product. Also. with the design practices of the associated plant. when you discover an error. SmartPlant P&ID uses predefined rules to establish relationships that verify the design. Also. After the designer completes this work. In the SmartPlant P&ID environment. Available tools can help in the review of the report along with the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID continuously checks for design errors as you create the drawing. an inconsistency occurs if a designated material is connected to a different type of material. while SmartPlant P&ID uses consistency checking. Consistency Check starts when you place or modify an item. and adds labels for accuracy. Propagation determines that a drawing is not ambiguous. For example. because you do not receive a list of possible solutions. routes lines between equipment. tools or suggested error recoveries are not available. pinpointing the source of the inconsistency could require time. according to settings in SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager. Double-click an inconsistency in a Drawing view. However. Propagation produces a report with propagation exceptions. such as pipe and valve conflicts. instead of waiting to check for errors until after the drawing is complete. PDS 2D uses propagation. The designer places equipment. You can list the types of errors you want to detect. places components on lines. To check for errors in your design. PDS 2D uses a process called propagation to verify the suitability of a design. the process populates the associated database if serious propagation errors do not exist. However. You must resolve them for an acceptable drawing. consistency checking occurs continuously as you place equipment. 410 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . However. or is consistent. Consistency checking is an important function in producing a useful design. propagation checks for errors each time that the software populates the database. consistency checking confirms that the created drawing agrees. In PDS 2D. In SmartPlant P&ID. The designer places the elements that compose the overall configuration of the design in a graphical mode. and the Consistency Check dialog box lists solutions to fix the errors. The software detects and reports the errors so you can correct them in the drawing.

page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 411 .

which are stored in the database. tanks. Plant administrators can create more symbols if needed." because they are updated as the property values of the item are updated. page 184 412 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and other items. you can record text on a label. These graphics include pumps. which you can use to directly edit properties in the database by editing the properties of the label.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID In PDS 2D. In PDS 2D. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. valves. PDS 2D cells are grouped together in libraries. you add or edit properties information for each item in the Properties window. at certain times. labels play a different role than in PDS 2D. SmartPlant P&ID supplies a pre-loaded set of symbols. graphics are called catalog items. graphics are called cells. You can add and delete cells or place cells from a library into the design file. Then. see the SmartPlant Catalog Manager Help. Most labels show item properties. In SmartPlant P&ID. For more information about creating symbols. and the software continuously writes this information to the database. SmartPlant P&ID also provides "driving" labels. In SmartPlant P&ID. These labels are referred to as "driven. piping. you propagate or write the information on the labels to the database. In SmartPlant P&ID.

In SmartPlant P&ID. The software automatically defines levels for the various parts of process systems. Then. and personal filters are stored in My Folders. SmartPlant P&ID filters fall into the following categories: • • Project filters Personal filters Project filters are stored in Project Folders. You can customize these levels. and you can combine filters. For example. For more information about creating and editing filters. see SmartPlant Filter Manager Help. The plant administrator defines project filters. filters show certain parts of the drawing. both 6-inch pipe and tanks over 5 feet in diameter are displayed. SmartPlant P&ID offers extensive flexibility in creating and editing filters. You can even edit the individual properties of the filters.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Using Filters Versus Levels PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 413 . you can combine a filter that displays 6-inch pipe with a filter that displays tanks more than 5 feet in diameter. You can use filters along with rules to check for errors in certain filtered views. such as only the equipment or only the piping. while each individual user defines personal filters. and you can combine them to view collective data sets. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

beginning with the node name. \\MyPC\C:\temp\MyFile. angle bisector A line that divides an angle into two equal parts. A property or characteristic of a component. archive To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location. for example. angle key-in A number that you type to specify an active angle. or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or comments. symbols. access Performing actions that are required to use the SmartPlant P&ID software. attribute 1. and some special character and punctuation marks. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. Each property has an associated value that defines its current state. a file name.Glossary Glossary A absolute path name Sequence of directories. active placement point Coordinates that define the point where you place piping and instrumentation. and so forth. 2. text string. You measure angles in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. 414 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . that locates a file. numbers. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table. notes. alphanumeric Information in the form of letter. angle Circular measurement of the intersection of two lines in degrees. append To add to the end of a file. annotations Dimensions.txt.

Boolean operator Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both). y-. B batch A group of jobs to process on a computer at one time with the same program without user intervention. branch point A point on a pipe run that separates piping segments for assignments with different segment parameters. character Data type that stores alphanumeric character data. Most orientations use an x-. Bill of Materials A detailed list of the items that you assemble. centerline Graphic representation of the central axis of an item.Glossary axis An imaginary line that defines the orientation of a system or item. and z-axis. and NOT (other than). OR (either). bearing The acute horizontal angle of a line with respect to a reference line. C cache A secure place of storage. catalog A collection of catalog items. category A grouping of items by description. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 415 . A set of filters can define the potential membership in a category. A classification of items that share common values for specified properties. break label A graphic label placed at a point in a piping line at which any property can change value. which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the model.

The workstation for the user is the client. commodity item Standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog. collection An indexed group. and the database runs on the server. intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network. 416 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A component has database information associated with it. that contains similar items. client In network operations. a node that accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource. to link or append. or select list. usually a server. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can show. concentric Having a common center or origin point with varying radii. In this system. client/server database A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate. component A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. All network operations among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.Glossary check in Process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that location in the database. concatenate To connect in a series. the processing power is split between the two CPUs. class Blueprint for creating an item. commodity code A code that you define that provides an index to material descriptions. configuration Relative arrangement of parts or items. commodity option A pre-defined exception to the default settings for a component definition in the Piping Job Specification.

or delete. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 417 . data dictionary The underlying data model of a plant. the origin of coordinate systems is 0.0. coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. or z-axis. For example. Typical items in a data model are components. or use a cylindrical coordinate system to define points on a cylinder. cursor See pointer. change. and z-axes.0. coordinate Location of a point along the x-. labels. Other coordinate systems more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entries. D data Facts or raw material that you add. y-. SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information. consisting of database entries and select lists. you can use a spherical coordinate system to define points on a sphere. context-sensitive help Display of help topics that are associated with a dialog box or command. Also. and labels. y-.Glossary connect point Active point item that is specially designated in a component. behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects. a location for applying a relationship connectivity Linkage between items that relates because of their graphics. data model Application items that populate a project. Normally. like a valve and a pipe run. lines. you can press F1 to learn about a dialog box. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. points are located by traversing the x-. coordinate system Geometric relation that denotes the location of points in the design cube. connector Item with multiple vertices. Proper connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity. For example. A connect point is a location at which you can connect lines. and other components to one another.

device Non-addressable component of a network. Indicating the region. disk drive. removes databases no longer in use. a closed shape exists. 418 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . interpret. along with an accompanying label that shows the property value. design database Database that contains the non-graphical data for the equipment and piping models. or floppy disk. creates new databases. default Predetermined value of a parameter that the system or a program automatically supplies whenever the user does not specify a value. database table Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the project and design elements. database administrator The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions.Glossary database Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization. also called a drawing file. a specific program can communicate. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. design file File containing graphics and text data. or process these files. ending at the points of intersection with that arc or circle. delimiter A separating mark or space. examples of devices are a tape drive. diameter A straight line passing through the origin of an arc or circle. digits of accuracy Number of digits used after a decimal point to display the discharge dimensions. design session Elapsed time from when you open a design file until you close the design file. design-wide break A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included components. and monitors disk storage usage of the database and performance.

or both with their own entities and properties that you place on the P&ID to define values for properties of the components and groups to which they apply. P&ID Graphics file that contains data about one unit. difference in longitude. diversity Amount of deviation in airflow that a system encounters from the design conditions. text. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 419 . directory File or folder that stores the names of other files. scaled view produced from the model graphics. directional items use the direction of the line in which you located them. drawing. driving label Graphics. You can consider a drawing view like a window into a specified volume in the model. display-only annotation Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the graphics in a design file. dithering Technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. also called a design file. Each drawing has a unique drawing number within the unit to which the drawing belongs. drawing view Specific. edge-edge model Model that represents connectivity entire by edges. or positive. More colors are produced with loss of some detail. drawing file File in which you place items. drag To use the software functionality that attaches the pointer to an item so you can see the item move in dynamics. E easting Term used in plane surveying that describes an east.Glossary directional Referring to items that depend on their orientations to directional flow for correct placement in a drawing.

that is. exit elevation Lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe. file Collection of logical records stored as a unit.Glossary endpoint Data point that defines the end of a linear element. name change. Examples of events are creation. such as nozzles and trays. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. such as a tray or nozzle. exclusive database relationship Relationship that exists between any given instrument and the loop to which it belongs . file specification Path name that instructs the software for the location of a file. event A status milestone that tracks the history of an item. enumerated list See select list. F fences Temporary method of locating and grouping items that you need to change. the components move along with the equipment. equipment group A single-name equipment body and any items within or attached to the body. an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time. file name Name that a user defines for an interactively created file. the name should relate to the contents of the file. As a group. field Interface component of a dialog box that displays information to you or allows you to type data to record. equipment components Items associated with pieces of equipment. and assignment to unit. 420 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For easier identification. As you place equipment components.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 421 . flow time Required time for the flow. flow rate Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time. 2. grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify either 2-D or 3-D relationships. This subset meets criteria that property values define. See also relative path name. a group number.Glossary filter Function that creates a subset of items. G gap Condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the P&ID but not physically in the plant. ISO.industry standard such as ANSI. Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw. glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating. fixed point A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates. geometric industry standard A select-list property that identifies the source of the data . or DIN. full path name Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. from the start of the piped system. to reach a downstream point. glyphs 1. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as you point over items in the drawing.that is. including the filename. font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text that you place in a drawing file.from which the software deduces the specific geometry of a commodity item. For SmartPlant P&ID. or company standard . group Set of components with physical boundaries and a single name .

Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed to determine bearings and azimuths. height property Distance between the base offset and the top of the item. horizontal Parallel to. 422 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. and subordinates. I icon A pictorial representation or image. hierarchical An ordered relationship from greatest to least. hierarchy A classified structure with superiors.Glossary H handles Graphical indications that appear when you perform a valid change to an item. or roots. This property provides a method to represent a 3-D model when working in a 2-D drawing. horizontal distance Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the points. horizontal scale A scaling factor that exaggerates the horizontal scale as you draw graphics. a symbol that graphically identifies a command or task. or dependents. horizontal angle Angle measured in the horizontal plane. implied piping component Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database. header First items of information in a file that precede any actual data. refers to the relationships among groups. and labels. or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. these components are not represented graphically. in the plane of. for grouping files or commands. components.

computing devices. Inline instruments include instrument valves. interference checking Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing. In SmartPlant P&ID. such as flow or temperature. inline Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that you can insert in a piping segment. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. a view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. import script File that the software uses to import or transfer data. instrument loops A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. instance A single allocation of an item class. such as orifice plates and flow controllers. or electrical switches.Glossary import Process that transports or transfers data from one environment to another. input The data submitted to a computer for processing. instruments Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process. such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 423 . Instruments can be devices such as final control elements. integer A whole number with no fractional part. inline instruments Components that you can insert into a piping segment. isometric Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. and other instrument components.

keypoint Point on an item. L label A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item. Each label is an entity with properties and provides the primary means of defining property values in the P&ID task. A line route contains line runs. 424 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . however. events. layer A logical grouping of items on a drawing sheet.Glossary item Unit of storage within a larger unit. and safety classes. line style Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a line. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet. PDS 2D Intelligent graphics and text that identify a group or component. gaps. such as equipment. connect to the item. a single member in the P&ID. components. and properties. label. including vertices. line route Collection of ordered line runs. item type Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID. line string A series of connected line segments. a line route does not contain any branches. gaps. and components that all share the same attribution. to which you can snap in the drawing . such as a file in a catalog.that is. J justification Point of orientation for text placement. K key Property or column in a table that is the access vehicle to individual rows of the table.

northing Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. collection of all items and their relationships to create a coherent description of a process plant. nozzle A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping. When you run the macro. Point to the manipulation handle on upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle. M MTO Material take-off. mirror handle Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes.Glossary line width Thickness of a displayed item. Visual C++ Delphi. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 425 . mirror To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis. Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) The approximate diameter of a pipe. a line. makeup air Air brought into a space from the outside to replace exhausted air. linear Having a single dimension. also called a Bill of Materials. or network can refer to the connected system. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. the software performs the actions or runs the commands. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA. macro A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system. N network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control. Visual Basic. and so forth. model A representation of graphics or a schema.

Examples are equal to and greater than. offline Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run. orientation by user A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. See also orientation by user. You can change the default orientation at placement time. if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. and z-axes intersect. the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise from the orientation in which you created it. orientation by system A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created them. origin In coordinate geometry. orientation by user. Offline instruments include temperature regulators. Oracle A relational database management system. orientation Position of items in the design plane relative to the origin. Typically. For example. the point where the x-. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed. offline instruments Components that you do not insert into a piping segment. level gauges. operator The part of the Structured Query Language (SQL) syntax that defines relationships between data. regardless of the method or location that you used for placement. and orientation fixed.Glossary O occurrence A row within a relational database table. these components are the instruments that monitor and control inline instruments. y-. See also orientation by system and orientation by user. such as digital control stations (DCS) or computers. See also orientation by system. if you placed the item in a vertical line. and system functions. orientation fixed A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you created them. You cannot change the orientation at placement time. 426 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The default orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients.

A pipe run has a beginning and an end. peak flow Maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe. The drawing relates critical processrelated information. and identifies physical components in the plant. Also. piping. P&ID See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. and instrumentation. branch points and gap components. Also. pipe run A line run that has piping properties. A pipe run segment may have identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe run. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Primary drawing for maintaining a plant. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 427 . The P&ID includes three primary groups of items: equipment. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters. pipeline Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items.Glossary orthogonal view A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the plane. the collection of pipe runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. parameter A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item. a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only by inline components. such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures. See also absolute path name and relative path name. parametric item Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships. P PFD Process Flow Diagram. path name Sequence of directories leading to a file. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further specification of instrumentation components.

strainers. as drawn through the anchor point. piping network Series of connected pipe runs and inline components. position angle Defines the angle between the horizontal axis. utility connector. One company can have several plants located at different geographical locations.for example. pointer On-screen tool that allows you to indicate an item or area. and safety components. primitive commands The most basic graphic command such as placing a line or placing a circle. A network terminates at a nozzle. and the rotate handle.Glossary piping components Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. PFD Process Flow Diagram. In drawings. a 150-pound carbon steel specification. off-page connector. process line Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties . flanges.typically. piping segment A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run. 428 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Piping Materials Class (PMC) Classification of components by service or specification . reducers. a representation of the piping that transfers process fluid. or one-point piping component . such as a line or circle. a pipe cap. items with the same line number. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. primitive items An item. Piping components include valves. piping components are connected with multiple line segments. plant A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions within a given geographical area. that you place by a primitive command.for example. Specifically.

commodity libraries. catalog data of vendors. reference file A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference. line style. graphics symbology. property A unique characteristic of an object. and other information of a similar theme. project 1. Examples include defining temperature. a graphic representation attached to a drawing view. A project is not necessarily specific to an application. The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. cost. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. job specifications. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 429 . label descriptions. For example. R RAD 2D Draft Platform 2D graphic platform developed from the product core functionality of SmartSketch. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer. reference data A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes. symbol. the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and subprojects. and flow rate. density. projection lines Witness lines. You can establish relationships as you place new items or between items already on the drawing sheet. probably in separate geographical locations and having limited communication among them. This connection indicates that some form of communication of behavior or state occurs. or document. relationship A condition that exists between items. Several projects can be under design at one time. lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed. 2. the project may contain design files from multiple applications. and width. or material. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window when the valve symbol is selected. item. report formats.Glossary process point A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process.

orientation by system or orientation by user. whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed. You can select a user-level or a project-level template to create a new report template. 430 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . rotate handle Turns a selected item around its anchor point. row A unit of related information in a table. Point to the manipulation handle on either side of an item to display the rotate handle. but much more difficult to predict. A rule defines a valid context for two items to communicate their behavior or state. revision triangle A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change occurred. required item Item that the plant model needs. If you delete a required item from a drawing. rotation angle Defines the angle of change between the old and new positions of a rotated element. relative path name Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager. rubberbanding Animation dynamic that allows you to specify the position of a data point while the item changes as you move the pointer. See also absolute path name and path name. and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at placement time. rule Standard mechanism for creating relationships. report template An online outline for a new report that you need to define. one collection of column values for a table.Glossary relative mode A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time. revision cloud A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute. it appears in the stockpile for later placement.

3. schematic file Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant. and by the terminal ends of piping lines. See also pipe run. signal run A line run with signal properties. a representation of the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals. Segments terminate by property break labels. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. Specifically. schema Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. nozzles. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. An ordered collection of connectors. branches. select set A group of more than one drawing item.Glossary S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined item. inline instruments. All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. and piping. 2. segment Contiguous piping and piping components between two points in the network at which properties change value. server In network operations. Scale Handle Changes the size of a selected drawing item. the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that clients need. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 431 . items that share the same line number. Point to the manipulation handle on any corner of the item to display the scale handle. and inline components with an equal set of core properties: typically. modifying only the dimensions but not the ratio among the pieces. signal lines 1. off-pace and utility connectors. search criteria Set of values used to scan a database or object library.

A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the element. symbology 1. and width. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. and so forth. symbol. A value of 0 degrees allows free rotation. and style associated with items in a particular filter. style. and querying relational databases. stockpile View of the data model. Display style of an item. The default Step Angle is 0 degrees. dimension. source file Uncompiled version of a parametric definition or other data table. style 1. symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating among various items by their appearance.Glossary slider Interface component of a dialog box that displays values along a range. specific energy Depth of flow plus velocity head. relative to the anchor point of the item. For example. surface of revolution Surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane. line weight. graphic Permanent association of items that you can store and place as a group but cannot manipulate as individual items. line. step angle Specifies the increment of rotation for a selected item. color and line weight of an element. 432 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. Usually. The style types include: fill. When you apply a style to a selected item. and text. symbol name Descriptive phrase that names a symbol that resides in a folder. modifying. Standard Query Language (SQL) Language developed by IBM for creating. See also neutral file. pattern. the font used in a text box. Symbology refers to the color. In Options Manager. 2. text libraries contain source files. including color. displaying items that you have not yet placed in the graphic model.

time stamping Process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change an property. Most companies. use the concept of unit. used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular application so that the format does not have to be recreated each time it is used. either you can enter this data or the software determines the value. In SmartPlant P&ID. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the plant. task Grouping of related design activities.Glossary T table Collection of data for quick reference. deletions. values Data stored in a property. a template serves as an outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager. but not all. and changes that you request during job posting activities. V validation program User program that verifies data integrity in the database. data dictionaries or other database schemas. user name Name that provides access to an account on the system. Same as username. a file used to create roles. template A document or file having a preset format. transaction Nongraphic record of any additions. utility Program that provides a commonly used service. alphanumeric information. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 433 . tabular data Non-graphic. a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters. U unit Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given process function.

work area Individual parts of a single process function that. The visual contents of a window displaying an aspect of the application model. generally represented as a line. You can manipulate vectors geometrically. window A control in the software that is the physical outline that contains a view. z) represents a vector. constitute a unit. the foresight point. The format that you type for vertical angles is the occupied point. W width Line thickness of a displayed item. workflow Method of selecting processes and performing tasks. vector A quantity that has both magnitude and direction. A coordinate triple (x. vertical scale Scaling factor that exaggerates the vertical scale of graphics when you draw.Glossary variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. work session All operations performed in the period between opening and closing a database partition of the task. vertical angle Angle above or below a horizontal plane through the line of sight. when considered as a whole. witness lines Dimensioning items that extend from the dimension points to the dimension line. A work session is not limited to worth in the drawing file. y. also called Z scale or Z factor. 434 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . view Defined area of vision on a screen or window. vertical Located at a right angle to the plane of a supporting surface. and the measured angle.

For example. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 435 .Glossary working units Real-world units that you can group into the design plane. working units can be defined in terms of feet and inches.

262. 173 reports. 285 assigning insulation specifications. 102. 60 tabular views. 329 tasks. 12 recent drawings. 247. 242 adding buttons. 169. 178. 182. 269 lines. 319 approving warnings. 28. 316. 280 lines. 162 alternate symbology. 70 commands. 122 sizes. 95 filter tabs. 189 alter segment. 175. 80 catalog items. 265. 94. 323. 113 AutoCAD exporting. 171. 131. 119 bounding box 436 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 159 altering segment. 269 using. 171. 172. 208 axes mirror. 131 filters. 399. 140 anchor point rotating. 313. 280 objects. 121. 61 AutoFilter customizing. 132. 267. 111 Web Client. 261 piping specifications. 173 tasks to drawings. 396 toolbars. 158 Alter Segment routing lines. 169. 237 instruments. 260. 172. 321. 80 author documents. 138. 179 insulation specifications. 277 shortcut buttons. 184 aligning labels. 241. 322 approved warnings. 80 stockpile items. 66. 260. 381 activating symbol toolbars. 267. 161 menus. 211 applying rules. 88 attaching commands. 30 embedding.Index Index AABBCC codes assigning. 122 linking. 125 autofilter Engineering Data Editor. 18 borders displaying. 400 associating plant groups. 284. 36 Aspen Zyqad importing. 287 saving. 169 access control. 161 piping specifications. 67. 317 area breaks claiming. 175 items. 395. 238 annotations labels. 210 placing. 133. 94. 60 autogapping activate. 261 item tags. 270 automation item tag formats. 76 actuators aligning. 96 pipe runs. 27 affixing labels. 242 backgrounds customizing. 126 OLE objects. 329 assemblies creating. 141 placing. 297 multi-sided. 95 items. 64 options. 105 accessing Help. 212 arranging windows. 286 explained. 281 Save As. 343 shortcut buttons. 212 rectangular.

114 update symbols. 281. 69. 283 pipe runs. 197 removing items. 250 inserting objects. 79. 78. 281. 156. 162 break labels. 191 breaking lines. 83. 397. 396. 254. 68. 278 mirror items. 157 linked objects. 345. 78 catalog items cloning.Index labels. 197 branches connecting. 94 calendar using. 197 brief properties. 399 view properties. 48. 202 placing labels. 79. 368 pipe runs. 75 cloning. 282 list views. 165. 141 placing items. 338. 78 page setups. 156. 14 Navigation menu. 182. 80 Catalog Explorer. 277 labels. 74 displaying. 86 case data control. 255 selecting. 166 breaks area. 54. 157 properties. 410 child SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 437 . 76 catalog nodes. 83. 72 deleting items. 65. 72. 282 items. 73 closing. 283 catalogs cells and graphics. 124 change details. 196. 90 brief properties pasting. 273 cells graphic. 166 links. 82 toolbars. 80 View menu. 217. 89 buttons adding. 68. 197. 304 changing embedded objects. 216. 74. 198 Offset Distance property. 198 OPCs. 67 browsing for catalogs. 69 bulk properties. 238. 283 items. 69 buttons. 82 views. 199 linking objects. 82 opening. 82 File menu. 73 Catalog Manager Cut command. 258 relationship properties. 304 change groups. 70 list view. 68. 165. 412 checking paths. 82 finding items. 83 sources. 65. 76 command buttons. 66 shortcut buttons. 215. 81. 187. 246 deleting items. 80. 282 table properties. 75 deleting nodes. 82 custom catalogs. 245 symbol properties. 248 lines. 72 overview. 48. 319. 398. 90 process. 84. 70. 348 select set properties. 325 unit of measure. 73 cloning items. 77. 212 labels. 199 leader lines. 89 browsing for catalogs. 28. 276 links. 276. 86. 90 Catalog Explorer add to stockpile. 256 branching lines. 54 tasks. 82 catalog items. 188. 187. 84. 36 case data. 78 navigating. 84. 412 CGM file format. 341. 134 cascading windows. 412 symbols. 87. 83 report templates. 88 bulk properties copying. 66 displaying buttons. 33 checking inconsistencies.

109 to plant structures. 32. 43 gaps. 303 exclusive. 238 components inline. 298 and replacing items. 297 related items. 309 versions. 293 and deleting. 173 compare. 204. 293 status. 247 cloning Catalog Explorer. 299 clearing selections. 304. 293. 21 Colors tab Options dialog box. 109 to TEF. 188 piping. 309 component handles. 202 stockpile. 216 stockpile items. 293 items. 308. 45. 300 To Do List. 289. 407 colors customizing. 291. 297 area breaks. 313. 308. 43. 310 version. 304. 124 P&IDs. 293 claiming. 253 Cut command. 205 consistency checking. 305 drawings. 310 comparing. 410 consistency check PDS 2D propagation. 207 opening partner. 293. 297 claim mode. 300 to do list. 105. 289. 246 Paste an Item. 167 composite formats. 381 connectors deleting. 341 compound filters. 291. 289. 300. 44. 147. 301. 28 inserting. 45. 299 TEF. 251 labels. 289. 306 example. 295 multiple representations. 247 pasting. 105. 42. 147 Clipboard copying. 250. 316. 293 Compare and Refresh column headings. 32. 297 labels. 156. 43. 146 tool. 308. 289. 280 pasting items. 95 comments on documentation. 303 access. 406 consulting services. 241. 206 open partner drawing. 309 options. 302. 293. 19 setting. 306 Engineering Data Editor. 206 placing. 293. 293 shared. 207. 17 commands buttons. 292. 68. 18. 76 drawings. 32. 9 contents of reports. 293. 390 validating properties. 308 Compare and Refresh dialog. 44. 305. 293 releasing claims. 73 catalog items. 238. 166 to databases. 244 rotating using handles. 251 moving. 409 construction status placed items. 9 commodity codes adding.Index representations. 406 constraints databases. 118 code lists. 293. 297 invalid claims. 154 claim modes. 82 customizing. 292. 352 continuation 438 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 137 configuration PickQuick tool. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 20 storing. 166 pipe runs. 293. 305. 73 closing Catalog Explorer. 149 tools. 293. 254. 148 connected items. 135. 315. 255 lines. 289. 301. 172 changing. 256 connecting items. 143 construction status. 296 lines.

331. 131. 207 copying bulk properties. 356. 56. 293 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 439 . 273 inline component values. 92 custom catalogs. 356. 102. 110 placement. 28 catalog nodes. 95. 89. 353. 133. 175 properties. 395. 245. 91. 92. 35. 352. 17 display properties. 284. 28. 27. 250 OPCs. 120. 121. 119. 105. 138 formats. 132. 84 customizing appearance. 21 buttons. 134 decimal places. 14 data files importing. 245. 309 display options. 322 using the select tool. 43. 52. 273 items. 136. 246. 64 toolbars. 387. 350 and claiming. 19. 212 assemblies. 95 with macros. 208 menus. 46 tasks. 389 correlations removing. 409 Properties window. 396 toolbars. 17 setting. 341 select sets. 254. 143 dates defining. 80. 17 toolbars. 341. 102 filter tabs. 18. 131 filters. 122 drawings. 351. 102 drawing templates. 349. 109 databases constraints. 68 compound filters. 354. 95 filter tabs. 96 Open dialog box. 71. 30 environments. 78. 92. 27. 175 items. 141 opening. 337. 107. 189 mirrored items. 13 correcting actions. 78 menus. 137 custom catalogs. 206 continuation drawings how to.Index drawings. 88. 389 creating area breaks. 86. 90. 135. 93. 331 tabular views. 401. 21. 28. 88. 254 copyrights software. 338. 141 packages. 81. 93. 324 database connecting to. 82. 240 pipe run values. 344. 321. 83. 59. 255. 50. 354. 96 P&IDs. 114 defaults construction status. 91 reports. 26. 217 error conditions. 331. 91 Catalog Explorer. 96 deferring tasks. 357 reports. 89 heat tracing. 410 correlating items. 335. 21 instrument loops. 83. 129 graphical operations. 21. 340. 402 defining brief properties. 29. 91. 77. 409 restoring. 254 labels. 9 customization Options dialog box. 21 compare options. 253. 91 colors. 164 report contents. 216 inconsistencies. 91. 237 item tags. 127. 80 tables. 246 Data Dictionary Manager customized properties. 137. 92. 343. 256 shortcut buttons. 334. 352 table layouts. 94. 138. 89 files. 93. 174 list views. 53 deleting. 360 report items. 357 report template contents. 130. 72 documents. 72 customer support. 47. 213 report templates. 286 buttons. 247 files. 91 cutting equipment components. 340. 90 bulk properties. 331. 346. 354 report templates. 308.

403 views. 250 shortcut buttons. 121. 62. 386 dragging items. 34 new views. 32. 162 Digital Print Room driver. 309 in use. 90 buttons. 35 new. 348 settings. 207. 304. 197. 248. 30. 102. 207. 248 report templates. 41 subnodes. 130 overview. 30 brief properties. 9 documents retrieving. 35 opening. 85. 100 OPCs. 402. 110 printing. 64 distances offset. 251 model orphan items. 304. 35 toolbars. 63 status bar. 147 Design window. 198 display filters. 371 filters. 382. 102 history. 59. 66 catalog items. 314 labels. 13 inconsistencies. 30. 82 case data. 87. 78 diagonal mode. 94. 21. 102 Engineering Framework. 111 440 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 218. 251 inline components. 17 stockpile. 28. 86. 389 from model. 30 different symbols. 303 claims. 350. 198 document properties. 250. 22. 302.Index assembly items. 15 Drawing Manager change drawing name. 80. 249. 245. 76 table views. 115 Engineering Data Editor. 107. 363. 99. 98. 110 symbol toolbars. 250. 251 lines. 351 select sets. 26 displays customizing. 305. 207. 115 documentation comments. 108. 207 creating. 119. 259 OPCs. 30 leader lines. 190 notes. 254 drawing revision clouds. 23. 57 descriptions adding. 62 grids. 130 using filters. 130 displaying about SmartPlant P&ID. 75 catalog nodes. 69 document properties. 48 tables. 89 reports. 30. 13 as printed. 121 drawings comparing. 64 filters. 30 nulls. 65. 308. 203 properties. 367 templates. 81 stockpile items. 331. 95 connectors. 11 print options. 105. 24 windows. 74. 301. 29. 214 templates. 42. 365 borders. 26 using zoom. 84. 251 instruments. 81. 246. 207. 180 items. 309 continuation. 14. 305. 31 Help. 385. 367 properties. 106. 89 properties. 131 properties. 104. 28. 333. 284 catalog items. 57 tasks. 122 views. 30 tabular views. 77 claim status. 15. 112 recent. 86. 41. 251 correlations. 335 reports toolbar. 45. 261 deselecting items. 17. 74 commands. 112. 263 tabular views. 251. 246. 90 Catalog Explorer. 34 Details command. 361 Disable Flip Text labels. 32 customizing.

305 saving. 397. 221 relationship properties. 273 images. 371 zooming. 181. 20. 125 templates. 387. 181 linked objects. 60 caption. 40. 386 retrieving files. 398 creating tasks. 153 erasing items. 263 Stockpile. 392. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 97. 396 deferring tasks. 381 correlating items. 102. 254 editing drawing templates. 278 URLs. 400 To Do List. 121. 111 exiting Catalog Explorer. 152. 261 items. 273. 380 refresh. 376. 401 existing drawings. 341. 378. 319 Excel. 395 assigning tasks. 276. 282 filters. 280 objects. 400. 120 views. 217 labels. 45. 50 table properties. 131. 402 deleting tasks. 396. 399. 401. 35 driving labels. 277. 41 editing. 43 removing views. 338. 353. 350. 34 displaying. 282 pipe run properties. 41 table layouts. 47 views. 389 correlations. 373. 47 pasting. 396. 404 refreshing. 398. 402 using. 119. 214 embedded objects. 220. 267. 87 equipment components. 127. 403. 400 Browser. 394 properties. 152 groups. 329 executing macros. 51. 381 adding tasks. 348. 345 select set properties. 48 copying. 399 embedding borders. 54. 356. 84. 87. 405 reporting. 337. 349. 276 items. 129 consistency checking. 395. 282 table items. 44 shortcut menu. 275. 377. 34. 34.Index recreating. 390. 129 errors checking. 83 sources. 39 stockpiles. 221 properties. 68 P&IDs. 46 tasks. 346. 122 documents. 127. 38 tabular views. 273 Engineering Data Editor. 379. 396. 273 editing. 118. 58 Engineering Framework accessing Web. 403 modifying properties. 354. 375. 397. 237 insulation specifications. 385 running a task. 57 selecting items. 220. 43 defining. 398 publishing. 357 reports. 43 editing items. 391. 408 placing. 122 drawings. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 276. 382. 276 links. 38 filters. 317. 404 retrieving documents. 331 importing. 15 display. 316 conditions. 216. 46 table views. 188 duplicating items. 389 creating properties. 87. 258 properties of pipe runs. 281. 134. 55. 34. 260. 43. 35. 394 entering free text. 101 tasks. 345. 394. 83 report templates. 129 recreating errors. 127. 397 opening drawings. 118 exploring SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 441 . 249 error conditions. 282 hyperlinks. 124. 40 autofilter. 129 refreshing.

130 setting. 340 flow arrows. 231. 225. 386 retrieving files. 382. 138. 24. 51. 343. 130 tab. 139 Properties. 229. 394 properties. 68. 258 reports. 228. 394. 234 replacing. 131 Filter tab customize. 329 fabrication categories. 226. 340. 361 formats fixed. 378. 397 opening drawings. 61 compound. 225. 132. 104 publishing to TEF. 47. 17 report templates. 64 from and to data reports. 352 files. 131. 379. 237 inconsistencies. 376. 373. 376. 15 definition. 341 report templates. 64. 394 freezing panes. 21 Filter tab. 390. 395 assigning tasks. 267. 237 customizing. 400 Browser. 138 Paste. 392. 373. 375. 386 Files tab Options dialog box. 197 connectors. 273 opening. 396. 228. 270 lines. 234. 64 finding catalog items. 46. 371 zooming. 130 drawings. 396. 377 checking paths. 379. 169 fields reports. 382. 191. 401. 136 properties. 229. 131 tabular views. 226. 235 fitting views. 376. 381 adding tasks. 381 Framework accessing Web. 403 modifying properties. 201 fluids code values. 230 new. 379. 137. 397. 269 442 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 136. 29. 227. 335 reports. 135. 137 creating. 404 Retrieve command. 403. 136. 283 manipulating. 378. 133. 381 correlating items. 399. 126 objects. 140 finding items. 377. 396 deferring tasks. 29 filtering. 375. 385 retrieving documents. 395. 25 fixed format. 52. 380 refresh. 377. 341 Foundation SmartPlant. 194. 132 tables. 69 exporting drawings. 173 fabrication categories assigning. 375. 356 rules. 400 To Do List. 378. 373. 385. 172 relationships. 380 retrieving. 91 defining. 226. 387. 186. 281 stockpile items. 138. 398 creating tasks. 69 documents to publish. 60 filters autofilter. 131 displays. 230. 131 Design window. 131. 215 fonts printing. 402 using. 398 publishing. 22 stockpile. 54 tabular views. 354. 234. 405 reporting. 338. 389 creating properties. 110. 70 catalogs. 60. 413 display.Index elsewhere. 139. 352. 269 Gap Now. 47 Filter Manager Add Filter command. 380 drawing items. 377. 389 correlations. 402 deleting tasks. 385 running a task. 357 gapping AutoGap. 69. 404 refreshing. 346 reports. 391. 340.

278 icons customizing. 273 inserting. 324 drawings. 323 pipe runs. 177 height printing. 324. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 443 . 179 items. 325. 335. 151 spacing. 31 tabs. 323. 351. 273. 238. 324 overview. 270 using. 276 importing data. 77 images embedding. 175. 276 instruments into loops. 338. 156 headers defining for reports. 175 inserting buttons. 304. 313 histories. 150 properties. 226. 359. 13 support.Index manually. 150 grouping equipment. 28 commands. 325 files. 316 correcting. 276. 152 plants. 329 using reports. 408 groups equipment. 163 tools. 319. 157. 33 snapping. 31 displaying. 141 properties. 238. 95 documents. 12 World Wide Web. 247. 30 indices. 88 handles colors. 12 programming. 328 items. 265. 316 errors. 268 pumps. 175 offline instruments. 314 finding. 208 reports. 275. 31 views. 360 heat tracing. 161 objects. 275. 325 stream data. 321. 241. 112 General tab Options dialog box. 94. 273 from reports. 234 inconsistency indicators. 216 displaying. 238. 315 resolving. 340 reports. 144 using. 12 user's guides. 30. 334. 265. 31 placing. 370 Help accessing. 31. 329 log. 240. 32. 317 inline components and validation. 341 graphics cells. 262. 273 images. 331. 30. 305 hyperlinks adding. 244 mirror. 358. 164. 268 SmartSketch files. 333. 78 display. 259 defining. 20. 26 highlights colors. 410 display. 261 heat tracing inline instrument. 18 component. 67. 242 parametric. 248 vertex. 244 scale. 178. 17. 313 overview. 270 General tab. 238. 78 displaying small. 31 styles. 267. 412 grids densities. 273 hyperlinks. 18 hints consistency check. 13 hiding toolbars. 277. 280 lines. 268 inconsistencies checking. 239 selecting items. 238 rotate. 276 inserting. 17 generating item tags. 78 large. 324 from SmartSketch. 322 inconsistency indicators.

201. 30 Installation Guide overview. 179. 208 items claiming. 198 offset source. 182. 175. 125 PDS 2D. 201 descriptions. 197 leader lines. 54 leader lines connectors. 197. 291. 412 driving. 187 placements. 198. 199 mirrorable. 45. 196 rotatable. 293 removing correlations. 329 using Aspen Zyqad. 389 deleting. 188. 194. 303 connected. 178. 184. 182. 301. 196. 45. 208 validation. 413 libraries 444 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 50 options. 255. 194. 199 flipped text. 190 labels. 32. 191. 47. 165. 198 title blocks. 125 exporting. 197 two-point placements. 199 targeting. 30 driven. 369 report templates. 182. 174 loop. 180 loops. 175. 233 selecting. 191. 197 types of terminators. 301. 177 properties. 186. 199 aligning. 182. 161 viewing items. 197 terminator types. 184. 188. 210 breaks. 323 importing. 291. 340. 186. 189 annotations. 197 components. 338. 166 pipe runs. 164. 174. 11 instruments inline. 11 integration Aspen Zyqad. 387. 190 placing. 200 updating. 156. 182. 198 modifying. 293. 341 reports. 189 displaying. 300. 262 insulation heat tracing. 260 Insulation Manager overview. 370 layers AutoCAD. 44. 191. 259. 53. 211 properties. 186. 166 labels. 48 Page Setup. 175.Index pipe runs. 188 placing. 191. 188. 161 shortcut buttons. 67 URLs. 186 legal notices. 197 copying. 289. 412 fitting text. 126 MicroStation. 161. 232. 44 joining lines. 182 placement. 265 offline. 302 generating. 258 offset distance. 329 Internet viewing drawings. 188 types. 197 item types. 261 specifications. 182. 303 item tags. 199 displaying. 190 landscape printing. 182. 292. 178. 202 piping. 302. 200 text display. 188. 156. 186 OPCs. 42 implied. 273 vertices. 292. 406 using filters. 256 correlating. 197 Catalog Manager. 13 levels exporting. 126 layouts default. 141 invalid claims. 161. 46 setting. 190. 191. 195. 198 flow arrows. 338 saving. 198 one-point placements. 196 moving. 22 tables. 51. 32. 124 intranet bypassing. 199 property breaks. 254. 389 replacing. 262 revisions. 267. 182. 157. 179. 300. 80 stockpile items. 44. 302. 181. 329 with Aspen Zyqad. 186.

242 handles. 351. 254. 300. 272 line settings updating. 162 breaking. 281 editing. 13 line routing ribbon. 166 properties. 54. 160. 217. 159. 99. 15 MicroStation exporting. 265 stockpile. 165 deleting. 328 mirror axes. 135 Match any defining filters. 325 migrator importing. 161. 166 routing. 160. 101 making buttons. 226 loops instrument. 221 views. 292. 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 445 . 240. 96 shortcuts. 96 default. 282 list views. 68 inconsistencies. 412 licenses notices. 242 items. 281. 78 lists select. 92 customizing. 302. 91 executing. 125 migration rules. 44. 301. 98. 341. 241 items. 179. 248. 92. 276. 45. 166 updating. 28 filter tabs. 83 sources. 242 mirroring axes. 175. 407 views. 100 modifying claimed items. 287 equipment. 258. 145. 338. 282 properties. 165. 25 windows. 145. 52 Match Any filters. 198. 119. 126 OLE objects. 65. 180 macros adding. 281 Save As. 146. 15 models orphan items. 273 lines. 281 files. 207. 255. 241. 84. 218.Index cells. 219. 256 starting. 87. 283 changing. 156 weight and color. 190 lines. 95. 278. 83 report templates. 202 pipe runs. 80 manipulating assemblies. 265 relationship properties. 131 shortcut buttons. 271 lines branching. 93. 284 borders. 157. 240. 156. 303 embedded objects. 271. 121. 282 filters. 325 SmartSketch. 282 table properties. 162 routing ribbon. 238 leader lines. 178. 345 select set properties. 132 items. 251 gapping. 25 mapping attributes. 265 links. 174. 96 restoring. 122 changing. 272 linking assemblies. 159 update settings. 52 Match All filters. 220 selecting. 216. 166 objects. 360 Match all defining filters. 169 menus creating. 77 tags. 135 maximum units. 158. 281 pipe runs. 241 modeler displaying windows. 91. 238. 78 locating catalog items. 221 OPCs. 281 links breaking. 102. 357. 238. 153 items. 97. 163 joining.

206. 186. 190 leader lines.Index tabular views. 197. 190 lines. 173 defning. 120 toolbars. 102. 343 tables. 137 drawing views. 156. 137 drawings. 201 OLE files. 206 opening Catalog Explorer. 215. 169 defining. 35 drawings. 108. 186 labels. 109 drawing views. 121 plant structures. 104 Help. 207 databases. 265. 46 tasks. 65 navigating. 97. 206 placing. 201. 75 nominal diameters assigning. 344 toolbars. 216. 182 moving. 126 filters. 14 rename. 104. 156. 121 features. 222. 198 source. 69 tables. 35. 396. 27 Navigation Catalog Explorer. 204 storing partner. 367 multiple representations child and parent. 188. 195 OPCs deleting. 268 moving. 202. 223 stockpile items. 167 select sets. 75 compound filters. 253 labels. 222. 221 piping components. 265 to another drawing. 399 title blocks. 204 properties. 218. 207. 187. 46 user's guides. 72 renaming. 136. 35. 105. 217. 186 how to. 136 report items. 101 new drawings. 219. 186. 206. 186 properties. 216. 204. 398. 20. 206. 343. 30 properties. 216 window. 263. 138 report items. 203 storing. 12 macros. 397. 201 offset distance. 255 creating. 273 insert an object. 105. 35 drawings. 220. 51 templates. 202 off-page connectors. 205 open partner drawing. 353 report templates. 34 nodes Catalog Explorer. 408 items. 264. 172 notes displaying. 194 using reports. 220. 27 views. 79 networks connecting. 182 one-point placement. 109 recent drawings. 204. 153 null property value. 110. 12 Web Client. 277 one-point placement. 107. 331 report templates. 184. 221 OPCs. 20. 108. 177 off-page connectors. 86 offline instruments placing. 105. 89 setting to display. 223 multiple drawings printing. 173 446 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 394 files. 42. 198. 184. 256 new compound filters. 111 symbol set. 154 naming catalog nodes. 381 options codes. 222. 205. 261 nozzles placing internally. 184. 238. 132. 207 opening partner OPC. 106. 254 selecting. 223. 251 matching OPC label. 12 filters. 189. 72 continuation drawings. 222 pipe runs. 222 moving partners. 111. 204 equipment. 205. 184 labels.

246. 408 errors. 370 orphan items deleting. 182. 313 solving inconsistencies. 409 equipment groups. 156. 166 selecting. 166 properties. 167 inserting vertices. 213 stockpile. 370 templates. 363. 273 items. 391 orientations drawings. 147. 162 breaking runs. 17 Options Manager connectors. 181 reports. 238 parametrics resizing. 159. 272 update symbology. 280 objects. 169 piping branches. 146 placement. 17 placements construction status. 280 properties. 160 runs. 167. 181 one-point. 148 pipe runs inline components and validation. 406 construction status. 15 drawings. 250 line settings. 188 placing annotations. 182.Index colors. 77. 283 linking files. 98 overview SmartPlant P&ID. 89 files. 246 default units. 154 pasting bulk properties. 369 printing. 215. 278. 25 parametric handles. 173 selecting. 11 removing items. 165 components. 13 packages creating. 272 overview. 268 joining. 121 Page Setup. 271 symbology changes. 165. 369 Page Setup. 212 assemblies. 365. 271 organizing tasks. 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 447 . 253. 184. 149 selecting items. 277. 256 specifications. 141 database. 412 comparing to SmartPlant. 172. 161 joining. 175 placing items. 247. 18 construction status. 175 item tag. 172. 17 Options dialog box. 62 panning views. 141 design window. 369 printing. 211 area breaks. 368 layouts. 409 setting. 173 Placement tab Options dialog box. 169. 280 paths checking. 171 using. 43 special. 239 parent representations. 158. 114 deleting items. 333 symbology. 245 report templates. 166 routing. 122 panes freezing. 413 PickQuick configuration tool. 254. 10 overviews creating a drawing. 265 page setups changing. 159. 171. 410 using filters. 255 PipeSpec assigning. 284. 88. 19 two-point. 256 selecting runs. 186 tolerances. 287 catalog items. 42. 130 labels. 102 filters. 273 PDS 2D cells. 202 Cut command. 331 P2C2 Web forum. 162. 409 labels.

363. 84. 87 displaying alphabetically. 195 connectors. 401. 66. 169 printable user's guides. 291. 288 statuses. 292. 300 prompts status bar. 149. 232. 175 instruments. 175 in stockpile. 201. 113. 114 filters. 167 revision clouds. 114. 367. 173 property. 172. 195 OPCs. 365. 109 plants groups. 364. 264 items on a grid. 202. 237 formatted. 84 adding descriptions. 213 pipe runs. 88 PMC assigning. 146. 363. 87. 302. 141 Page Setup. 294. 87 448 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 32. 361. 300 enabling. 44. 361 to a file. 186. 188. 233. 171 using. 150 labels. 299 break labels. 158. 333 plant item groups examples. 84. 369 page setups. 91 importing. 116 drawings. 367 origin. 89. 184. 131. 153 flow arrows. 201 postponing tasks. 410 properties. 86 displaying categorially. 303 claiming items. 182. 259 and claiming. 42. 361. 84. 182. 370 positioning assemblies. 264 title blocks. 329 macros. 288 to do list. 367 drawings. 215. 48. 90 bulk. 90 displaying. 33. 154 offline instruments. 367 documents. 77 inline instruments. 187. 361 multiple drawings. 112. 194 heat tracing. 265 plant structures opening. 152. 402 precision units. 299. 12 printing copies. 370 settings. 321. 175 internal nozzles. 115. 204 packages.Index component labels. 361. 177 instruments with heat tracing. 361. 204 equipment. 194 plant reports. 370 files. 337 portrait printing. 97. 363. 301. 367 time. 368 range. 17 propagation comparing. 144 end. 141. 144 portable reports. 363. 141 files. 363 scale. 289. 86 documents. 298. 112 editing. 258 explained. 48. 295. 66. 162. 363 overview. 45. 175. 288 overview. 101 projects. 84. 367 process case data assigning. 144. 85. 90 display. 153 items. 114 pressure maximum. 211 lines. 105. 28. 293. 88. 88. 177 OPCs. 196 brief. 363 selected areas. 169 points center. 86. 30. 89 copying. 300. 43. 221 piping components. 169 programming customization. 296. 88. 284 catalog items. 367 setting options. 297. 162. 368 fonts. 153 items. 112. 248 labels. 66 equipment. 84. 406 PDS 2D. 322 customizing. 263. 214 stockpile items. 368. 221 multiple representations. 158. 366.

371 with SmartPlant Foundation. 376. 231. 337. 102 Replace Mode catalog items. 373. 28. 333 importing items. 350 table. 404 reports changing templates. 396. 81 stockpile items. 251 instruments. 333 to do list. 340. 378. 358 including select lists. 88. 44. 240 refresh Compare and Refresh dialog. 180 items. 378. 346 formats. 399 validating. 42 tasks. 83 report templates. 167 printers. 262 labels. 68. 68. 344. 129 reflecting items. 237 mode. 118 reapplying rules. 229. 14. 335. 341 deleting templates. 346. 321 recreating drawings. 354. 377. 43 releasing claims. 248 report templates. 350. 380 to TEF. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 449 . 301. 343. 261 nulls. 199 lines. 345 editing items. 75. 345 composite. 51. 350 editing. 248. 379. 380 files. 245. 75 drawings. 403 views. 250. 357 defining layouts. 57 renaming catalog items. 402. 198. 315. 380 queries Engineering Data Editor. 373. 68. 305 drawings. 83 releasing claims. 230. 76 catalog nodes. 358 reporting contents. 165. 100. 397. 268 lengths. 354 deleting. 306 example. 221 piping components. 377. 379. 151 Properties window. 233. 379. 310 views. 335. 166. 40 quitting Catalog Explorer. 292. 341 creating templates. 340 headers. 45. 337 defining items. 305 registering projects. 75 catalog nodes. 371 relationships using. 398. 351 displaying. 43 pipe runs. 302. 90 tasks. 293 items. 235. 99. 333 creating. 95 correlations. 249. 98. 375.Index grids. 233 report templates contents. 225. 334. 76 SmartPlant P&ID. 376. 94. 159. 141 publishing documents. 166. 127. 246. 300. 89 proxy server. 232. 356 defining contents. 319 instruments. 201. 165. 221 notes. 58 To Do List. 299 views. 378. 159. 377. 232 replacing and claiming. 404 version. 215. 28. 234. 389 inline components. 376. 251 OPCs. 368 relationship. 352 creating. 373. 331 editing. 259. 331. 175. 29. 354. 80 catalog items. 341 contents. 375. 375. 46. 358 spacings. 354 options. 303 removing assembly items. 74 commands. 89 OPCs. 74. 228. 341 defining template layouts. 403. 350 shortcut buttons. 203 pasting. 305 tabular views. 220. 310 To Do List. 405 versions. 35. 31 inconsistencies. 58 refreshing. 284 buttons. 338.

352. 239 resolving inconsistencies. 239 parametrics. 341. 217. 284. 161. 244 items. 322 running macros. 351. 160. 130 overview. 354. 21 fixed formats. 125. 319. 158. 345 sources. 154 required items. 262 ribbons line routing. 148. 156. 243. 55 scale handles. 357. 348. 325 reapplying. 11 rules inconsistencies. 410 restoring menus. 251 resetting toolbars. 338 lengths. 96 toolbars. 228 segment alter. 42. 199. 239 searching for drawing items. 237 for items. 351. 157 insert. 385. 338.Index editing templates. 161 rotation. 255. 359. 241 move. 248 connected items. 147. 359 importing items. 160. 344. 157 select sets. 126 P&IDs. 352. 341. 216. 220. 254. 157. 238 rotating handles. 321. 221 pipe runs. 42. 227. 239 embedded objects. 28 views. 221 mirror. 141 portable. 369. 226. 340. 337 sort orders. 125 views. 353 template options. 124. 101 tasks. 341 template formats. 321. 160. 356 layouts. 265 items. 37. 238 scaling drawing items. 282 revision clouds. 344 spacings. 242. 124. 385. 346. 360 types. 20 handles. 322. 315. 244 routing lines. 87 revising drawings. 343 options. 218 piping. 350 templates. 214 links. 146 rotate handles. 117. 282 report templates. 22 retrieving documents. 370 parametrics. 156. 350. 32 migration. 44. 354. 341 formats. 340. 340. 382. 346. 22. 162. 352 find directory. 220. 157. 348. 360 toolbars. 385. 159. 220. 386 from TEF. 56 templates. 157. 382. 340 template items. 162. 159. 42. 286 drawings. 217. 338. 118. 343. 356. 102. 337. 240. 156. 400 saving assemblies. 386 files. 352. 386 reviewing properties. 352 filters. 359 overview. 343 representations child. 28 resizing drawings. 37 tabular views. 256 450 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 130. 144 selecting all. 335 modifying. 343 new. 352 source templates. 225. 349. 118 settings. 221 Rule Manager consistency checking. 154 multiple. 145. 317. 313 filters. 345. 243 select tool. 343 headers. 358 template properties. 345 naming templates. 359 tabular. 154 parent. 358 fields. 285. 214 revisions text. 382.

245 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 451 . 63 shortcuts buttons. 151 solving inconsistencies. 80. 255. 222. 201 report templates. 43. 254. 46 drawings. 256 lists. 66. 256 properties. 223 spreadsheets adding items. 81. 282 symbols. 255. 277. 145. 141 packages. 328 snapping grids. 91 Catalog Explorer. 53 sources offset. 248. 159 statistics current document. 248. 248. 344 symbol file. 260. 271. 121. 44. 178. 248 deleting items. 198. 77 Engineering Data Editor. 325 SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. 146. 267. 250 displayed items. 144. 407 filters. 148. 109 Open Site Server. 141 pipe runs. 329 starting lines. 333. 109 Open Site Server. 263. 329 moving items. 22 tabular views. 287 SP_ID. 255. 254. 32. 97. 130 importing. 201 Cut items. 147. 261 splitting drawings. 158. 302 specifications insulation. 254 selection criteria. 67 Aspen Zyqad. 256 inserted items. 84. 17 showing brief properties. 158. 105 settings labels. 18 servers open site server. 190 lines. 67 adding to. 202 overview. 222. 17 stockpile claiming items. 255. 44 runs. 293. 255. 255. 11 SmartSketch migration. 190 sites open server. 86. 265 placing items. 370 SmartPlant Engineering Manager using. 112 properties. 237 inline components. 43.Index entries. 272 printing. 246 deleted items. 254. 122. 112 setting options. 11 Insulation Manager. 11 overview. 256 sets. 299 setting partner locations. 82. 90 buttons. 101 networks. 265 OPCs. 281. 335 selections colors. 86. 86. 20 stockpiles adding items. 65. 329 importing. 371 SmartPlant Migrator importing. 314 leader lines. 381 using. 77 connectors. 116 status construction. 254. 83. 317. 105 sizing drawings. 264. 90 inconsistencies. 131. 265. 10 Rule Manager. 15. 145. 278. 256 tool. 11 Options Manager. 371 SmartPlant Foundation interfacing with. 81 case data. 218. 356 tables. 62. 30 items. 367 saving. 319. 254. 407 macros. 79. 159 P&IDs. 41 filters. 256 lines. 409 status bar prompts. 65 menus. 283. 223. 254. 179. 264 removing items. 146. 369. 325. 215. 114 for a drawing. 410 sorting report items. 42.

12 switching drawings. 400 To Do List. 404 refreshing. 402 ing items. 404. 404 retrieving documents. 272 symbols displaying. 278. 395 assigning tasks. 41. 301. 51 properties. 381 correlating items. 399 opening drawings. 394. 41 storing partner OPCs. 54 italic items. 246. 205 stream data importing. 390 updating. 387. 262. 281 toolbars. 329 summaries current document. 69. 400 Browser. 113 for a drawing. 398 creating tasks. 333 saving. 375. 76 symbology alternate. 399. 55. 258 filters. 391. 9 TEF. 390. 76 tables bold items. 396. 389 creating properties. 58. 90 tabs customizing. 35. 289. 400. 405 zooming. 392. 40. 14 viewing. 204. 47 tabular views editing. 386 retrieving files. 57. 15. 400 creating. 403 reporting. 376. 401 To Do List. 62 filters. 402 executing. 12 World Wide Web. 45 tags required. 395 technical support. 398. 397. 402 using. 396 deferring tasks. 401 modifying. 271. 69 sources. 371 zooming. 400. 38 editing items. 35. 111 views. 404. 54 new. 59. 399. 265 tasks adding. 394 types. 45 modifying. 46. 48. 245. 405 reporting. 338 freezing panes. 391. 116 support Help. 63 Tabular Editor filters. 64 deleting. 208 XML. 277. 389 correlations. 46 view layouts. 398. 60. 394 properties. 396. 373. 387 modifying properties. 402. 20. 63 view filters. 38. 403. 301 accessing Web. 385 running a task. 378 refresh. 52. 43. 292. 54. 401. 47. 287 toolbars. 395. 57 displaying views. 47 table views. 248 validation. 50. 46. 377. 61 format reports. 381 adding tasks. 111 windows. 395. 38 editing properties. 62 updating views. 303 updating. 46.Index reporting. 38 items. 395. 397. 140 claims. 396 deferring. 53. 138 tabular customizing views. 397. 34. 112 setting options. 32. 46 view settings. 63 views. 396. 398 publishing. 58 view displays. 394 properties. 397 opening drawings. 382. 392. 404 running. 293. 47. 39. 44. 333 view. 62. 263 tools. 35. 405 removing. 36 symbol sources. 46 reporting. 46. 38 layouts. 399 refreshing. 403. 401. 390. 292. 396. 56 stockpiles. 60. 71. 394 452 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 396 assigning to drawings.

36 title blocks. 403 dialog box. 125 sizes. 175 values dates. 119 reports. 95 default. 340. 394. 401 deferring tasks. 20. 352. 329 label settings. 405 zooming. 197 placing. 112 precision. 105 user's guides printable. 26 project specific. 345. 272 tabular views. 76 To Do List. 21 gapping. 184. 71. 121. 353. 204 validation item tags. 359. 76 symbology. 169 version numbers. 94. 12 utility connectors. 391. 194 to and from data reports. 120 creating for drawing. 351. 360 symbol. 398 creating tasks. 134 short. 190 line settings. 404 running a task. 71 tools Customize. 392 user specific. 191 title blocks labels. 119. 28 creating. 329 symbol toolbars. 392 how to. 208 piperun and inline components. 394 modifying properties. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 453 . 357 to do list tasks. 91. 349. 405 user access. 26. 13 versions compare. 19 pointer. 398. 390 updating drawings. 397. 403. 187. 370 terminators types of. 102 drawings. 402 deleted tasks. 354. 146 reports. 394 properties. 350 saving. 58 to do list. 28 displaying. 346. 285 changes. 96 customizing. 65 two-point placement. 396 deferring items. 267. 195 undoing actions. 390 To Do List adding tasks. 395 assign drawing. 130. 143 tiling windows. 121. 404. 396. 19 toolbars adding buttons. 272 links. 84 reports. 404 remove a task. 93. 402 reporting. 270 General tab. 21 Select Tool. 83. 341. 188. 182 two-point placement labels. 397 opening. 343. 402 removing tasks. 281 properties. 399 assigning tasks. 28. 92 customizing. 400 creating properties. 122. 17. 399 refresh. 216 assemblies. 17 PickQuick. 214 items. 217 units for a drawing. 254 tree views. 348. 271. 400 updating. 27. 92. 369. 122 included sizes. 27. 114 To Do List. 338. 395 tolerances placement. 202.Index temperature maximum. 200 testing databases. 169 templates creating. 391 opening drawings. 344. 71 Properties window. 271.

23. 115 report templates. 48. 47. 84. 34 displaying. 24 using zooming. 77 defining filters. 35. 314 leader lines. 36 views arranging. 53 tables. 35 drawings. 54. 31 inconsistencies. 23 out. 15. 22 printing. 115 drawing. 23 windows. 102 list. 161 inserting. 28. 41. 83 switching. 14. 303 deleting. 22 table layouts. 37 stockpile. 111 tabular. 57 Design. 25 previous. 89. 51. 305 vertices. 12 width printing. 34 drawings. 370 Web forum. 32 consistency checking. 367 properties. 35 General tab. 29. 36 Catalog Explorer. 151 restoring. 90. 24 tasks. 36 panning. 395 Zyqad importing. 15. 52 Design view. 33 claims. 34. 15 drawing views. 22 saving. 15 drawing. 333. 335 settings. 30 grids. 36 wizards migration. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 78 manipulating. 141 panning. 66 catalog items. 39 switching. 370 windows arranging. 23 in. 369 printing. 26. 77. 259 support. 190 properties. 22. 78 changing properties. 36 displaying. 310 refreshing. 305. 161 viewing about SmartPlant P&ID. 124 XML tags. 22. 325 World Wide Web forum. 13 Web Client accessing. 35 tabular. 55 settings. 25 grids. 394. 308. 85. 258 Engineering Data Editor. 381 What's New for this release. 35 using zoom. 13 Catalog Explorer. 14. 304. 35 document properties. 36 overview. 329 454 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 317. 34 fitting. 131. 22 Engineering Data Editor. 22. 25 properties.Index comparing. 265 zooming areas. 24. 12 viewing drawings. 150 inconsistencies. 36 cascading. 88. 350 reports. 309 refresh. 17. 32 lists. 258 warnings approve. 13 links to. 46. 319 watermarks Page Setup. 237 properties of documents. 39. 367.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful